SEPED303005EN Dec20

Electrical network protection
Sepam
series 20, series 40, series 60,
series 80
Digital protection relays
Catalogue
2020
Sepam series 20 General Content
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
Sepam series 80
Range description 1
Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 2
Sepam series 60 3
Sepam series 80 4
Additional modules and accessories 5
Order form 6
3
1
4
Sepam series 20 Range description
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
Sepam series 80
Maximize protection 6
Selection guide for all applications 14
Substation applications
Feeder protection
18
18
1
Incomer protection 19
Busbar applications 20
Transformer applications 22
Transformer feeder protection 23
Transformer incomer protection 25
Motor applications 28
Generator applications 32
Capacitor applications 36
Low voltage applications 38
Communication networks and protocols 39
Implementation 40
Examples of architectures 42
Available Sepam data 46
Selection table 46
Description 47
Sepam Series 20 - Sepam series 40 51
Sepam series 60 89
Sepam series 80 139
Order form 275
5
Range description Maximize protection
1
Increase
energy
availability
100% available
energy
Fast response Maximum Your electrical equipment is under control.
dependability With Sepam protection relays, you get
maximum energy availability for your process.
6
Range description
Sepam protection relays

Number one in dependability
1
Maximize energy availability and the profits
generated by your installation while protecting
life and property.
Keep informed to manage better

With Sepam, you get intuitive access to all system information in
your language so that you can manage your electrical installation 1982
effectively. If a problem occurs, clear and complete information Launch of first multi-
puts you in a position to make the right decisions immediately. functional digital
The electrical supply is restored without delay. protection relay
Maintain installation availability

Sepam maintains high energy availability thanks to its diagnostics
201 8
function that continuously monitors network status.
In-depth analysis capabilities and high reliability ensure that
equipment is de-energized only when absolutely necessary.
Over 900,000
Risks are minimized and servicing time reduced by programming Sepam units installed
maintenance operations. around the world
Enhance installation dependability

Sepam series 80 is the first digital protection relay to deliver
dependability and behaviour in the event of failure meeting the
requirements of standard IEC 61508.
All Sepam series 10, 20, 40, 60 and 80 boards and electronic
components are industrially conformal coated.
This manufacturing allows Sepam to be used in the most severe Standard
industrial environments including off-shore oil rigs and chemical

IEC
60068
factories (IEC 60068-2-60 and EIA 364-65A IIIA).
Standard
EIA
364-65A
Electrical utilities, petrochemical plants, hospitals, infrastructures, shopping centres, small industry.
7
1
Improve
satisfaction
100%
satisfaction
A set of simple and Fast response from With Sepam protection relays, you can count
effective functions Schneider Electric: on simple, high-performance products and the
suited to your save time at every support of top-notch Schneider Electric teams.
customer’s application step in your project Meet your obligations the easy way.
8
Range description
Sepam protection relays

Save time at every step in project development 1
and installation to consistently meet your project
deadlines.
Go for simplicity
With multi-functional Sepam protection relays, you can measure,
190
manage, analyze and produce diagnostics for all applications in Schneider Electric
does business in
an installation. Range modularity makes it easy to select the relay
190 countries
corresponding exactly to your needs.
The range is structured for typical applications (substations,
transformers, generators, capacitors, busbars and motors) and
provides the necessary functions for each application (protection,
metering, control and monitoring, etc.).
Starting with a Sepam base unit, complete solutions can be built
up by adding input/output modules, sensors and communication
modules.
Make configuration easily

A single PC software tool for the entire Sepam range makes system
start-up and operation particularly easy. The user-friendly program
guides you step by step from the initial programming on through to
final commissioning. Sepam produces a detailed report on system
configuration and all the activated protection functions.
On Sepam series 80, the entire setup is saved to a memory
cartridge that can be accessed in front, for instance when replacing
a unit.
Communicate the open way

In addition to the DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus standards,
Standard
Sepam complies with IEC 61850 (GOOSE messages, TCP/IP
IEC
redundancy) and uses the communication protocol that is today’s 61850
market standard to interface with all brands of electrical-distribution
devices.
Installation Setup Local display Supervision
9
1
What level of safety?
For what applications?
Sepam range design is based on a simple idea. All users should
be able to find a solution corresponding exactly to their needs and
offering the right balance between performance, simplicity and cost.
A Sepam relay for Custom

each application…
27TN/64G-2, 67, 67N, 87T
O Overcurrent Long distance
L Line differential 46, 79, 25
25
49RMS, 51C
Source
67N
… and different levels 67, 68 12, 14
87M
of protection 25
> Thermal protection based on

temperature rise calculation, with
predictive indications to optimize process 32PQ
control. 40
> Directional phase over-current 50/51V
protection for closed-loop networks.
> Directional earth-fault protection for all 87T
types of neutral systems.
Source
> Fast and highly-sensitive protection HV 25
of transformers, motors and generators
using differential functions with restraint.
87T 67N, 64REF
67, 68
26/63
87T 50BF
68
10
Range description
Custom Demanding Standard

applications applications applications
Sepam series 80 Sepam series 60 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20
Demanding Usual
27
59
67, 67N
ATS 37, 66
48, 51LR
50BF
32Q/40, 32P
49RMS
26/63
38/49T, 47
27D/R
50/51
50BF
79, 68
59N, 68
27, 47
67N
50/51
50BF
79, 68
38/49T
81H/L
49RMS 81LHR
59N
11
1
Start-up was never so easy
The Sepam programming and operating software provides a single
environment for the entire range. The result is a simple, user-friendly
approach for fast commissioning.
Setup
Equipment Protection setup Protection Summary of
setup Prepare the single- activation functions
Set up the various modules line diagram either by Graphically create the Assign easily and
(input/outputs, display, reworking a mimic diagram links between sensors quickly the various
communication, sensors). from the library or by and the measurements protection, control and
creating a new one. carried out by the relays. monitoring functions.
10 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 40 minutes
12
Range description
Operation
The setup is now ready to be

deployed on all the Sepam
units in the installation.
Analysis of Real-time Management

waveform supervision of alarms
capture Supervision of the status and events
Display, analysis and of all the relays in the
printing of disturbance- electrical installation.
recording data.
Automatic generation of the

relay setup report.
15 years of peace of mind
13
Selection guide for all Selection guide for all
applications
applications
The selection guide proposes the Sepam types suited to your protection needs,
based on the characteristics of your application.
1
The most typical applications are presented with the corresponding Sepam.
Each application example is described by:
b a single-line diagram indicating:
v equipment to be protected
v network configuration
v position of measurement sensors
b standard and specific Sepam functions to be implemented to protect the

application.
The list of functions is given for information purposes.

Earthing, wether direct or via an impedance, is represented by the same pictogram,
i.e. the pictogram corresponding to a direct connection.
14
applications
applications
series 10 series 20
See catalogue
Page 51
1
Sepam series 10
Protections
Current b b b b b
Voltage b b
Frequency b b
phase and phase and earth fault breaker disconnection
Specifics by rate of
earth fault earth fault overcurrent failure
overcurrent overcurrent change of
frequency
Applications
Substation P. 18 A B N S20 S24
Busbar P. 20 B21 B22
Transformer P. 22 A B N T20 T24
Motor P. 28 M20
Generator P. 32
Capacitor P. 36
Characteristics
Logic inputs/ Inputs 4 0 0 0 to 10 0 to 10
outputs Outputs 7 3 3 4 to 8 4 to 8
Temperature sensors 0 to 8 0 to 8
Current 3I + Io 3I + Io Io 3I + Io
Channel Voltage 3V + Vo
LPCT (1) Yes
Communication ports 1 1 to 2 1 to 2
IEC61850 Protocol Yes Yes
Redudancy
Goose message
Matrix (2) Yes Yes
Control Logic equation editor
Logipam (3)
Backup Lithium battery (4)
Other Front Memory cartridge
with settings
(1) LPCT: low-power current transducer complying with standard IEC 60044-8.
(2) Control matrix for simple assignment of information from the protection, control and monitoring functions.
(3) Logipam ladder language (PC programming environment) to make full use of Sepam series 80 functions.
(4) Standard lithium battery 1/2 AA format 3.6 V front face exchangeable.
15
applications
applications
series 40 Page 53 series 60 Page 89

1
Protections
Current b b b b b b b b
Voltage b b b b b b b
Frequency b b b b b b b
directional directional directional directional directional
Specifics earth fault earth fault earth fault
earth fault earth fault
and phase and phase
overcurrent overcurrent
Applications
Substation P. 18 S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 S60 S62
(5) (5) (5) (5) (5)
S50 S51 S52 S53 S54
Busbar P. 20
Transformer P. 22 T40 T42 T60 T62
(6) (6)
T50 T52
Motor P. 28 M40 M41 M61
Generator P. 32 G40 G60 G62
Capacitor P. 36 C60
Characteristics
Logic inputs/ Inputs 0 to 10 0 to 28
outputs Outputs 4 to 8 4 to 16
Temperature sensors 0 to 16 0 to 16
Current 3I + Io 3I + Io
Channel Voltage 3V, 2U + Vo 3V, 2U + Vo or Vnt
LPCT (1) Yes Yes
Communication ports 1 to 2 1 to 2
IEC61850 Protocol Yes Yes
Redudancy Yes Yes
Goose message Yes
Matrix (2) Yes Yes
Control Logic equation editor Yes Yes
Logipam (3)
Backup 48 hours Lithium battery(4)
Other Front Memory cartridge Standard cartridge
with settings
(1) LPCT: low-power current transducer complying with standard IEC 60044-8.
(2) Control matrix for simple assignment of information from the protection, control and monitoring functions.
(3) Logipam ladder language (PC programming environment) to make full use of Sepam series 80 functions.
(4) Standard lithium battery 1/2 AA format 3.6 V front face exchangeable.
16
applications
applications
series 80 Page 138

1
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
directional directional disconnection transformer & machine voltage and frenquency capacitor-bank unbalance
earth fault earth fault by rate of transformer- differential protection for 2 sets of
and phase change of machine unit busbars
overcurrent frequency differential
S80 S81 S82 S84
B80 B83
T81 T82 T87
M81 M88 M87
G82 G88 G87
C86
0 to 42 0 to 42 0 to 42 0 to 42
5 to 23 5 to 23 5 to 23 5 to 23
0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16
3I + 2 x Io 2 x 3I + 2 x Io 3I + Io 2 x 3I + 2 x Io
3V + Vo 3V + Vo 2 x 3V + 2 x Vo 3V + Vo
Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 to 4
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Lithium battery(4) Lithium battery(4) Lithium battery(4) Lithium battery(4)
Standard or extended cartridge Standard or extended cart. Standard or extended cart. Standard or extended cart.
(5) S5X applications are identical to S4X applications with the following additional functions:
b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up,
b broken wire detection,
b fault locator.
(6) T5X applications are identical to T4X applications with the following additional functions:
b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up
b broken wire detection.
17
Selection guide for all Substation applications
applications Feeder protection
Protection functions ANSI code S20 S24 B22 S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 S60 S62 S80 S81 S82 S84
(5)
S50 S51 S52 S53 S54
1
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8
Phase overcurrent cold load pick-up CLPU 50/51 1 4(6) 4(6) 4(6) 4(6) 4(6
Earth fault / 50N/51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8
Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G
Earth fault cold load pick-up CLPU 50N/51N 1 4(6) 4(6) 4(6) 4(6) 4(6
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Broken conductor 46BC 1(6) 1(6) 1(6) 1(6) 1(6)
Thermal overload for cables 49RMS 1 2 2 2
Directional phase overcurrent (1) 67 2 2 2 2
Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Directional active overpower 32P 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Directional active underpower 37P 2
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 2/1 (4) 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Rate of change of frequency 81R 1 2 2 2
Recloser (4 cycles) (2) 79 v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Synchro-check (3) 25 v v v v v v
The figures indicate the number of units available for each protection function
b standard, v options.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules.
(3) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.
(4) 2 undervoltage (L-L) and 1 undervoltage (L-N).
(5) Applications S24 and T24 perform the functions of applications S23 and T23 respectively.
(6) Only for applications S50, S51, S52, S53, S54, T50, T52.
Feeder protection
b feeder short-circuit and overload protection.
Protection of low-capacitance feeders in impedance earthed or solidly

earthed neutral systems: Sepam S20, S24, S40, S44, S50, S54, S60 or S80
b no voltage and frequency monitoring. b voltage and frequency monitoring.
DE88401
DE60528
Protection of high-capacitance feeders in impedance earthed or

compensated or isolated neutral systems: Sepam S41, S43, S51, S53, S62
or S81
b specific feeder protection: 67N/67NC.
DE60529
18
Selection guide for all Substation applications
applications Incomer protection
Incomer protection
b busbar short-circuit protection.
Incomer protection: Sepam S20, S24, S40, S50, S60 or S80

b no voltage and b busbar voltage and b line voltage and
Protection of 2 incomers: Sepam S60 or S80
b with automatic source transfer (ATS) and synchro-
1
frequency monitoring. frequency monitoring. frequency monitoring. check (ANSI 25).
DE88404
DE60530
DE60531
DE60532
Parallel incomer protection: Sepam S42, S52, S62 Parallel-incomer protection with disconnection function: Sepam S20 + B22,
or S82 S62 or Sepam S84
b specific line or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC. b disconnection-specific functions: b disconnection-specific functions:
27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R. 27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R, 32P, 37P.
DE60533
DE88408
DE60534
Protection of an incomer or coupling circuit breaker with load shedding

based on frequency variations: Sepam S60, S62 or S84
b load-shedding-specific functions: 81L, 81R.
DE60535
DE60536
Ring-incomer protection: Sepam S42, S52, S62 or S82

b line or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC
b directional logic discrimination.
DE60537
19
Selection guide for all Busbar applications
applications
Protection functions ANSI code B21 B22 B80 B83

Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 8 8
1
Earth fault / 50N/51N 8 8
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 2 2
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 1 1 2 2
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 2/1 (3) 2/1 (3) 4 4
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 2 2 4 4
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 1 1 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 2 2 4 4
Rate of change of frequency 81R 1
Synchro-check (2) 25 v v
(3) 2 undervoltage (L-L) and 1 undervoltage (L-N).
20
Selection guide for all Busbar applications
applications
Voltage monitoring
b voltage and frequency monitoring.
Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on busbars:
Sepam B21 or B22
b load-shedding-specific function: 81L. b load-shedding-specific functions: 81L,
1
81R.
DE88025
DE88026
Coupling circuit-breaker protection
b busbar short-circuit protection
Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on 2 both half-
busbars: Sepam B83
DE88027
Incomer protection with additional busbar voltage

monitoring
b busbar short-circuit protection
b line voltage and frequency monitoring.
Additional busbar voltage monitoring: Sepam B80
DE88028
21
Selection guide for all Transformer applications
applications
Standard transformer application diagrams do not take Protection ANSI T20 T24 T40 T42 T60 T62 T81 T82 T87
voltage levels into account: functions code T50 T52
1
b the transformer primary winding is always at the top Phase overcurrent 50/51 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8
(1)
b the transformer secondary winding is always at the
bottom. Phase overcurrent CLPU 1 4(5) 4(5)
cold load pick-up 50/51
The transformer primary and secondary windings need
Earth fault / 50N/51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8
to be protected. Sensitive earth 50G/51G
The Sepam proposed can be installed on either the fault (1)
primary or secondary winding of the transformer. Earth fault cold CLPU 1 4(5) 4(5)
The other winding can be protected by an incomer or load pick-up 50N/51N
feeder type substation application Sepam. Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Negative 46 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
sequence /
unbalance
Broken conductor 46BC 1(5) 1(5)
Thermal overload 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
for machines (1)
Restricted earth 64REF 2 2 2 2 2
fault differential
Two-winding 87T 1
transformer
differential
Directional phase 67 2 2 2 2
overcurrent (1)
Directional earth 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2 2
fault (1)
Directional active 32P 2 2 2 2
overpower
Overfluxing 24 2
(V / Hz)
Positive sequence 27D 2 2 2 2 2
undervoltage
Remanent 27R 2 2 2 2 2
undervoltage
Undervoltage 27 2 2 2 2 4 4 4
(L-L or L-N)
Overvoltage 59 2 2 2 2 4 4 4
(L-L or L-N)
Neutral voltage 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
displacement
Negative 47 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
sequence
overvoltage
Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Thermostat / 26/63 v v v v v v v v v
Buchholz (2)
Temperature 38/49T v v v v v v v v v
monitoring 8 8 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16
(8/16 RTDs) (3) RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs
Synchro-check (4) 25 v v v v v
(3) With optional MET148-2 temperature input modules.
(5) Only for applications S50, S51, S52, S53, T50, T52.
22
applications Transformer feeder protection
Transformer feeder protection

b transformer short-circuit and overload protection
b internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63)
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T).
Transformer feeder protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam T20, T24
1
Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G. b neutral point: 50G/51G.
DE88410
DE88411
Transformer feeder protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam T40, T50, T60
or T81
Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G.
DE60539
Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC.
23
applications Transformer feeder protection
Transformer feeder protection with voltage monitoring and additional

current measurement: Sepam T81
1
b primary: 50G/51G b primary: 50G/51G
b tank earth leakage: b secondary: 50G/51G.
50G/51G.
DE88032
DE88033
Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC.
Transformer feeder differential protection: Sepam T87

Transformer differential protection: 87T
Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G. b primary: 50G/51G b primary:
b secondary: v 64REF
v 64REF v 50G/51G
v 50G/51G. b secondary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G.
DE88034
DE88035
DE88036
24
applications Transformer incomer protection
Transformer incomer protection

b transformer short-circuit and overload protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T). 1
Transformer incomer protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam T20,
T24
b secondary: 50G/51G. b neutral point: 50G/51G.
DE88413
DE88414
Transformer incomer protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam T40, T50,
T60 or T81
b secondary: 50G/51G. b secondary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G.
DE60540
DE60541
25
Transformer incomer differential protection: Sepam T87

Transformer differential protection: 87T
1
Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G b primary: 50G/51G b primary: 50G/51G b primary: b primary:
b secondary: 50G/51G. b secondary: b secondary: v 64REF v 64REF
v 64REF v 64REF v 50G/51G v 50G/51G
v 50G/51G. v 50G/51G. b secondary: 50G/51G. b secondary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G.
DE88041
DE88042
DE88043
DE88044
DE88045
Protection of 2 non-coupled transformer incomers: Sepam T60 or T81
b automatic source transfer (ATS)
b synchro-check (ANSI 25).
DE60542
26
Parallel transformer incomer protection: Sepam T42, T52, T62 or T82

b transformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67
1
b transformer secondary earth fault protection: 50G/51G, 59N.
DE60543
b transformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67

b transformer secondary earth fault protection: 67N/67NC, 64REF
b with synchro-check (ANSI 25).
DE60544
Parallel incomer differential protection: Sepam T87

b transformer differential protection: 87T
b directional transformer protection: 67
b transformer secondary earth fault protection: 50G/51G, 67N/67NC 64REF.
DE88049
27
Selection guide for all Motor applications
applications
Protection functions ANSI M20 M40 M41 M61 M81 M87 M88
code
1
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 4 4 4 4 8 8 8
Earth fault / 50N/51N 4 4 4 4 8 8 8
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1
Negative sequence / 46 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
unbalance
Thermal overload for 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
machines (1)
Two-winding transformer 87T 1
differential
Machine differential 87M 1
Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2 2
Directional active overpower 32P 1 2 2 2 2
Directional reactive overpower 32Q/40 1 1 1 1 1
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 1 1 1 1
Phase undercurrent 37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Excessive starting time, locked 48/51LR/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
rotor
Starts per hour 66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Loss of synchronization 78PS 1 1 1
Overspeed (2 set points) (2) 12 v v v v
Underspeed (2 set points) (2) 14 v v v v
Positive sequence 27D 2 2 2 2 2 2
undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage 27R 1 1 2 2 2 2
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 2 2 2 4 4 4
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 2 2 2 4 4 4
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence 47 1 2 2 2 2
overvoltage
Overfrequency 81H 2
2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4
4 4 4 4
Thermostat / Buchholz 26/63 v v v
Temperature monitoring 38/49T v v v v v v v
(8/16 RTDs) (3) 8 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16
RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs
28
applications
Motor protection
b internal motor fault protection
b power supply fault protection
b driven load fault protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T).
1
Motor protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20
b direct starting. b auto-transformer b two-way.
starting.
DE88050
DE88051
DE88052
Motor protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam M40, M41, M61 or M81
b direct starting. b auto-transformer b two-way.
starting.
DE60545
DE60546
DE60547
Motor differential protection: Sepam M87

Motor differential protection: 87M. Phase protection by
self-balancing-differential
scheme: 50/51.
b direct starting. b auto-transformer b direct starting.
starting.
DE88056
DE88057
DE88058
29
applications
Motor-transformer unit protection

b motor and transformer protection against internal faults
1 b power supply fault protection

b driven load fault protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T).
Motor-transformer unit protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20

b transformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G.
Note: monitoring of motor insulation must be ensured by another device.
DE88059
Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring:

Sepam M40, M41, M61 or M81
b motor earth fault protection: 59N
b transformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G.
b transformer monitoring: Buchholz, thermostat, temperature measurement.
DE60549
Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring:

Sepam M81
b motor earth fault protection: 50G/51G
b transformer primary earth fault protection: 50G/51G
b transformer monitoring: Buchholz, thermostat, temperature measurement.
DE88062
30
applications
Motor-transformer unit differential protection: Sepam M88

Motor-transformer unit differential protection: 87T.
b motor earth fault protection: 50G/51G
b transformer primary earth fault
protection: 50G/51G.
b motor earth fault protection: 59N
b transformer primary earth fault
protection: 50G/51G.
1
DE88063
DE88064
31
Selection guide for all Generator applications
applications
Protection functions ANSI G40 G60 G62 G82 G87 G88

code
1
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 4 4 4 8 8 8
Earth fault / 50N/51N 4 4 4 8 8 8
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2
Thermal overload for machines (1) 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2 2
Restricted earth fault differential 64REF 2 2
Two-winding transformer 87T 1
differential
Machine differential 87M 1
Directional phase overcurrent (1) 67 2 2 2 2
Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2
Directional active overpower 32P 1 2 2 2 2 2
Directional reactive overpower 32Q/40 1 1 1 1 1 1
Directional active underpower 37P 2 2 2
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 1 1 1 1 1
Loss of synchronization 78PS 1 1 1
Overspeed (2 set points) (2) 12 v v v v v
Underspeed (2 set points) (2) 14 v v v v v
Voltage-restrained phase 50V/51V 1 1 1 2 2 2
overcurrent
Underimpedance 21B 1 1 1 1 1
Inadvertent energization 50/27 1 1 1
Third harmonic 27TN/64G2 2 2 2
undervoltage /
100% stator earth fault 64G
Overfluxing (V / Hz) 24 2 2 2
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2 2 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 2 2 2 2 2
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 2 2 2 4 4 4
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 2 2 2 4 4 4
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 1 2 2 2 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4
Rate of change of frequency 81R 2 2
Thermostat / Buchholz 26/63 v v v v
Temperature monitoring 38/49T v v v v v v
(8/16 RTDs) (3) 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16 8/16
RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs RTDs
Synchro-check (4) 25 v v v v v
32
applications
Generator protection
b internal generator fault protection
b network fault protection
b driving machine fault protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T)
1
Protection of a separate generator: Sepam G40 or G60

b 50G/51G b 50G/51G.
b 59N.
DE60550
DE60551
Protection of a generator coupled to other generators or to a network:

Sepam G62 or G82
Short-circuit detection on generator side.
Control fault protection.
Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection:
b 50G/51G b 100 % stator earth fault b 64REF and 50G/51G
b 59N. 64G. b 50N/51N.
DE60552
DE88068
DE88069
33
applications
Generator differential protection: Sepam G87

Phase protection by self-balancing differential scheme: Generator differential protection: 87M.
1
50/51.
Earth fault protection: 50G/51G. Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection: Earth fault protection:
b 50G/51G b 100 % stator earth fault b 50N/51N.
b 59N. 64G.
DE88070
DE88071
DE88072
DE88073
Generator-transformer unit protection
b generator and transformer protection against internal faults
b network fault protection
b driving machine fault protection
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T)
Separate generator-transformer unit protection. Sepam G40 or G60

Earth fault protection:
b 50G/51G.
Note: monitoring of generator insulation must be ensured by another device.
DE60553
34
applications
Protection of a generator-transformer unit coupled to other generators or to

a network: Sepam G82
1
Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67.
Control fault protection.
Internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63).
b generator earth fault protection: b generator earth fault protection:
50G/51G 100 % stator earth fault 64G
b transformer secondary earth fault b transformer secondary earth fault
protection: protection:
v 50G/51G v 50G/51G
v 59N. v 59N.
DE88075
DE88076
Generator-transformer unit differential protection: Sepam G88

Generator-transformer unit differential protection: 87T.
b generator earth fault protection: b generator earth fault protection:
50G/51G 100% stator earth fault 64G
b transformer secondary earth fault b transformer secondary earth fault
protection: protection:
v 50G/51G. v 50G/51G
v 64REF.
DE88077
DE88078
35
Selection guide for all Capacitor applications
applications
Protection functions ANSI code S20 S24 (3) S40 C60 C86
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 4 4 4 4 8
1
Phase overcurrent cold load pick-up CLPU 1
50/51
Earth fault / 50N/51N 4 4 4 4 8
Earth fault cold load pick-up CLPU 1
50N/51N
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 1 1 2 2 2
Thermal overload for capacitors (1) 49RMS 1 1
Capacitor-bank unbalance 51C 8
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 2 2
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 2 2 4
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 2 2 4
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 1 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4
Temperature monitoring 38/49T v v
(8/16 RTDs) (2) 8/16 8/16
RTDs RTDs
36
Selection guide for all Capacitor applications
applications
Capacitor bank protection
1
Protection of a capacitor bank (delta connection) without voltage
monitoring: Sepam S20, S24
b capacitor bank short-circuit protection.
DE88417
Protection of a capacitor bank with voltage monitoring: Sepam S40, C60 or

C86
b capacitor bank short-circuit protection
b voltage and frequency monitoring
b overload protection: ANSI 49RMS (Sepam C60 and C86 only).
DE60554
DE60699
Protection of a double-star connected capacitor bank with 1 to 4 steps:

Sepam C86
b capacitor bank short-circuit protection
b voltage and frequency monitoring
b specific overload protection, self-adapted to the number of connected steps
b unbalance protection: 51C.
DE88081
37
Selection guide for all Low voltage applications
applications
Compatibility of Sepam low voltage
1 Protection functions
Sepam protection functions can be used with low voltage (LV) as long as the
conditions below are met:
b The distribution circuit must be rated higher than 32 A.
b The installation must comply with standard IEC 60364.
For additional information about the compatibility of Sepam protection functions with
low voltage, please contact Schneider Electric technical support.
The table below lists the Sepam protection functions suitable for low voltage
according to the earthing system used. Sepam protection functions not listed in this
table are not suitable for low voltage.
Protection functions ANSI code Earthing system Comments

TN-S TN-C TT IT
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 b b b b Neutral conductor not protected
Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) 50N/51N b b b (1)
Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (3) 50G/51G b b b (3)
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 b b b b Threshold to be adapted to the phase unbalance

Thermal overload for cables/ 49RMS b b b b Neutral conductor not protected
machines/capacitor (1)
Restricted earth fault 64REF b b b (3)
Two-winding transformer differential 87T b b b b

Directional phase overcurrent (1) 67 b b b b (4)
Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC Incompatible with LV diagrams (4-wire)
Directional active overpower 32P b b (2) (2)
Directional reactive overpower 32Q b b (2) (2)
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 b b b b

Remanent undervoltage 27R b b b b
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 b b b b
Neutral voltage displacement 59N b b (4) (4)
Residual voltage not available with 2 VTs
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 b b b b
Overfrequency f 81H b b b b
Underfrequency f 81L b b b b
Rate of change of frequency f 81R b b b b
Synchro-check 25 b b b b
b : Protection function suitable for low voltage
(1) Not recommended even on the second fault.
(2) 2-wattmeter method not suitable for unbalanced loads.
(3) Residual current too low in IT.
(4) 2 phase-to-phase VTs.
Low voltage earthing systems

There are 4 low voltage (LV) earthing systems designated by a 2 or 3-letter acronym:
bb TN-S.
bb TN-C.
bb TT.
bb IT.
The letters making up the acronym have the following meanings:

Letter Meaning
First letter Transformer neutral point
I Earthed with an impedance
T Directly earthed
Second letter Electrical exposed conductive parts of
the consumer
T Earthed
N Connected to the neutral conductor
Third letter (optional) Protective Earth conductor
S Separate N neutral conductor and PE Protective
Earth conductor
C Combined N neutral conductor and PE Protective
Earth conductor (PEN)
38
Communication Communication networks and
protocols
All Sepam relays communicate and can be integrated

in a communication architecture.
Two types of communication network
Sepam relays can be connected to two types of networks, thus providing access to
1
All Sepam information can be accessed remotely.
different types of information:
b a supervisory local area network or S-LAN
b an engineering local area network or E-LAN.
Examples of communication architectures are presented on next pages.
Supervisory local area network (S-LAN)
DE60606
A S-LAN is used for supervision functions concerning the installation and the electric
network. It can be used to connect a set of communicating devices using the same
communication protocol to a centralized supervision system.
Sepam can be connected to an S-LAN using one of the following communication
protocols:
b Modbus RTU
b Modbus TCP/IP
b DNP3
b IEC 60870-5-103
b IEC 61850
Engineering local area network (E-LAN)
An E-LAN is intended for Sepam parameter-setting and operating functions. It can
be used to connect a set of Sepam units to a PC running the SFT2841 software.
In this configuration, the operator has remote and centralized access to all Sepam
information, with no need to develop any special communication software.
Sepam connection to two communication networks (S-LAN and The operator can easily:
E-LAN). b set up the Sepam general parameters and functions
b collect all Sepam operating and diagnostics information
b manage the protection system for the electric network
b monitor the status of the electric network
b run diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electric network.
Communication protocols
Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU is a data-transmission protocol, a de facto standard since 1979 widely
used in industry and accepted by many communicating devices.
For more information on the Modbus RTU protocol, visit www.modbus.org.
Modbus TCP/IP
Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol offers the same functions as Modbus RTU
as well as compatibility with multi-master architectures
DNP3
DNP3 is a data-transmission protocol specially suited to the needs of distributors for
remote control/monitoring of substations in the electric network.
For more information on the DNP3 protocol, visit www.dnp.org.
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 is an accompanying standard for the standards in the
IEC 60870-5 series. It defines communication between protection devices and the
various devices in a control system (supervisor or RTU) in a substation.
For more information on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, visit www.iec.ch.
IEC 61850
The standards in the IEC 61850 series define a protocol for communication in
electrical substations. The Ethernet-based protocol offers advanced characteristics
and interoperability between multi-vendor devices.
The Sepam relay handles the station bus, in compliance with standards IEC
61850-6, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4 and 8-1 edition 1.
For more information on the IEC 61850 protocol, visit www.iec.ch.
Other protocols
A gateway / protocol converter must be used to connect Sepam to a communication
network based on other protocols.
IEC 60870-5-101 & IEC 60870-5-104
The SIS Gateway (Substation Controller) or C264 (Bay Computer) are database
concentrators for industrial networks.
These gateways enable Sepam connection to IEC 60870-5-101 & IEC 60870-5-104
networks.
These gateways have a good capacity to manage high device concentration.
For more information on the SIS Gateway or C264, contact your local
Schneider-Electric Support.
39
Communication Implementation
Sepam communication interfaces

PE88025
1 A complete range of accessories

Sepam connects to a communication network via a communication interface.
Selection of the interface depends on the communication architecture:
b number of networks to be connected:
v 1 network, S-LAN or E-LAN
v 2 networks, S-LAN and E-LAN
b communication protocol selected for the S-LAN: Modbus RTU, DNP3,
IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850 or Modbus TCP/IP
b network physical interface:
v 2-wire or 4-wire RS485
v Ethernet
v fiber optic, with star or ring architecture.
Sepam communication interfaces are presented in detail on chapter communication
accessories selection guide.
Direct Sepam connection to the Ethernet network

Sepam series 40, series 60 and Sepam series 80 units can be directly connected to
the Ethernet network via the ACE 850 communication interface. In this way they
make full use of Ethernet network performance and all IEC 61850 functions.
A complete range of Sepam communication interfaces b Compatible communication protocols: Modbus TCP/IP, IEC 61850
b Network physical interface:
v 10 baseT /100 base TX (star or ring architecture)
v 100 base FX (star or ring architecture).
PB105301
Easy implementation
The communication interfaces are remote modules that are easy to install and
connect.
The SFT2841 software is used for complete setup of the communication interfaces:
b protocol selection and setup of the functions specific to each protocol
b setup of the physical interface.
Advanced configuration of IEC 61850 protocol

The SFT850 software is used for advanced configuration of the IEC 61850 protocol
for both the ECI850 server and the ACE850 communication interface:
b complete Sepam-configuration database (.icd)
b processing of system-configuration files (.scd)
b creation and processing of ECI850 and ACE850 configuration files (.cid).
ACE850 communication interface
IEC 61850 protocol
Two levels of IEC 61850 protocol functionality are supported by the Sepam range.
PE88026
Sepam IEC 61850 level 1 server

The entire Sepam range can be connected to an IEC 61850 (level 1) system via the
Sepam ECI850 server, representing the most economical solution.
Level 1 allows :
b upgrading of existing IEC 61850 Modbus installations on a single Ethernet port
b supervision of electrical characteristics and Sepam status
b circuit breaker control
b time-stamping, synchronisation via SNTP, network diagnostics and disturbance
recording
The server also ensures compatibility with the E-LAN network.
Sepam IEC 61850 server
40
Communication Implementation
Sepam IEC 61850 level 2

Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 units can be connected
directly to an IEC 61850 system via the ACE850 communication interface.
In this way they make full use of Ethernet network performance and all IEC 61850
functions.
1
b Compatible communication protocols: Modbus TCP/IP, IEC 61850
b Network physical interface :
v 10 baseT /100 baseTX (star or ring architecture)
v 100 base FX (star or ring architecture).
Level 2 allows :
b Level 1 functions
b Dual port Ethernet for redundancy on Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and
series 80 units (star or ring connection)
b GOOSE message on Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80 only (see below)
b Simultaneous Modbus TCP/IP TRA15
IEC 61850 GOOSE message

GOOSE messages allow standardised communication between Sepam units.
Sepam series 60, and series 80 and the ACE850 communication interface use
GOOSE messages to provide :
b Improved system protection :
v logic discrimination
v intertripping
v load shedding
b Better system control on Sepam series 80:
v user-defined Logipam contacts
High-level safety and performance are guaranteed for these messages by :
b using fiber optic connections,
b using Ethernet switches which are compatible with IEC 61850 and, for the ring
connection, RSTP 802.1d 2004, such as RuggedCom switches (e.g. RS900xx,
RSG2xxx)
b choosing a fault-tolerant communication architecture.
Ethernet gateways in a Modbus environment

Sepam can be connected to an Ethernet TCP/IP network in a totally transparent
PE88027
manner via the EGX100 gateway or the EGX300 server.
EGX100 gateway
The EGX100 offers access to enhanced communication and multi-master
architectures. It provides IP (Internet Protocol) connection for communication on all
types of networks, notably intranets and internet.
EGX300 server
In addition to Ethernet TCP/IP connection, the EGX300 offers a web server and
HTML pages designed specially to present the essential Sepam information.
This information may be accessed in clear text and at no risk on any PC connected
to the intranet/internet and equipped with a web browser.
Access to Sepam information via a web browser.
41
Communication Examples of architectures
Seven typical communication architectures are presented in the examples below.

Each architecture is presented with:
1
b a simplified diagram
b the characteristics of the implemented networks.
The physical architecture of the communication networks and the connection to
networks depends on the type of network (RS485 or fiber optic) and the
communication interfaces used. Sepam communication interfaces are presented in
detail on page 236.
Example 1. Single S-LAN network

S-LAN characteristics
Protocol Modbus RTU
DNP3 DE60555
or IEC 60870-5-103
Physical medium Twisted-pair (2-wire or 4-wire
RS485)
or fiber optic
Example 2. Single E-LAN network

E-LAN characteristics
Protocol Modbus RTU
DE60556

RS485)
or fiber optic
Example 3. Parallel S-LAN and E-LAN networks

Protocol Modbus RTU
DE60557
DNP3
or IEC 60870-5-103
Physical medium 2-wire RS485 (twisted-pair)
or fiber optic
E-LAN characteristics
Protocol Modbus RTU
Physical medium 2-wire RS485 (twisted-pair)
42
Example 4. S-LAN and E-LAN networks over Ethernet TCP/IP

Characteristics of Modbus network between
Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)
1
DE60558
Protocol Modbus RTU
RS485)
Characteristics of Ethernet network

Protocol Modbus TCP/IP
Physical medium Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or
100 Base Fx
Functions of EGX100 or Modbus TCP / Modbus RTU
EGX300 gateway conversion
Multiplexing between S-LAN
and E-LAN networks
Example 5. Two parallel S-LAN networks (Sepam series 80)

Protocol Modbus RTU
DE88334
DNP3
or IEC 60870-5-103
RS485)
or fiber optic
Note: the two communication ports on Sepam series 80 can
also be used to create two redundant S-LANs connected to a
single supervisor/RTU.
An E-LAN can be added to the two S-LANs.
43
Example 6: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IP level 1
Characteristics of Modbus network between
1 Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)
DE60560
Protocol Modbus RTU
RS485)
Characteristics of Ethernet network

Protocol IEC 61850
Physical medium Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx
Sepam ECI850 server b Modbus RTU / IEC 61850
functions conversion
b Multiplexing between
S-LAN and E-LAN networks
The level 1 allows:

b Upgrading of existing IEC
61850 Modbus installations
on a single Ethernet port
b Supervision of electrical
characteristics and Sepam
status
b Circuit-breaker control
b Time-stamping,
synchronisation via SNTP,
network diagnostics and
disturbance recording
The Sepam IEC 61850 level 1 Server also enables connection of several Sepam units.
The maximum Sepam configuration for a Sepam IEC 61850 level 1 server is:
b 2 Sepam Series 60 or 80 units, or
b 3 Sepam Series 40 units, or
b 5 Sepam Series 20 units.
DE60561
Note: Rc : line impedance matching resistor.
44
Example 7: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IP (Sepam series 40, series 60 and series 80) level 2
Characteristics of Ethernet network ACE850TP or ACE850FO communication architecture
Protocol
Physical medium
IEC 61850
Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or
100 Base Fx Performance
1
Functions supported b Level 1 functions
Redundancy performance tests have been conducted using RuggedCom switches
b Dual port Ethernet for (RS900xx and RSG2xxx ranges), compatible with RSTP 802.1d 2004.
redundancy on series 40, To ensure optimum performance of the protection system during communication
series 60 and series 80 (star between Sepam units via GOOSE messages, we strongly recommend setting up a
or ring connection) fault-tolerant fiber optic ring structure as shown in the connection examples.
b GOOSE messaging service
on series 60 and series 80 Note : Protection performance during communication between Sepam units via GOOSE
messages is only ensured by using:
b fiber optic connections
b IEC 61850-compatible managed Ethernet switches.
ROOT Ethernet switch

The ROOT Ethernet switch is the master switch of the RSTP reconfiguration
function:
b only one ROOT Ethernet switch is required per Ethernet network, in the main
network loop.
b a Sepam unit should not be the ROOT Ethernet switch of the network.
Example of Sepam units connected in a star configuration

DE60562
Example of Sepam units connected in loop configuration

DE60675
45
Communication Available Sepam data
Selection table
Modbus RTU DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 MODBUS TCP/IP

IEC 61850
1 series
20 40
Data transmitted from Sepam to the supervisor
60 80
series
20 40 60 80
series
20 40 60 80
series ECI850(1)
20 40 60 80
Metering and diagnosis

Measurements b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Energy b b b b b b b b b b
Network diagnosis b b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
Machine diagnosis b b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
Switchgear diagnosis b b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
Sepam diagnosis b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Logipam counters b b b
Remote indications
Alarms and internal status b b b b b b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
conditions
Logic inputs b b b b b b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
Logic outputs b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
Logic equations b b b b b b b b b b b b
Data transmitted from the supervisor to Sepam
Pulse-type remote-control b b b b b b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
orders, in direct mode

Pulse-type remote-control b b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2) (2)
orders, in “Select Before

Operate” mode
Maintained remote-control b b
orders (for Logipam)
Remote control security b b b b b
Data accessible via special functions
Time-tagging
Time-tagged events b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Unsollicited events b b b b b b b b
Time-setting and b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
synchronization
Remote setting
Selection of the protection- b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
setting group
Reading/writing of protection b b b b
settings
Reading of general b b b b
parameters
Reading/writing of analog b b b b b b b b
output (MSA141)
Network diagnosis
Transfer of disturbance- b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
recording data
Tripping contexts b b b b b b b (2) (2) (2)
Out-of-sync context b b (2) (2) (2)
Data exchanged between Sepam units

Protection data
Logic discrimination b b
Intertripping b b
Load shedding (motor b b
application only)
Inhibit closing b b
Miscellaneous
Identification of Sepam b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
(1) To or from the Sepam series 80, series 60, series 40 and series 20 units, depending on the case.
(2) Depending on the modelling of the IEC 61850 logic nodes.
46
Description
Data transmitted from Sepam to the

supervisor
Metering and diagnosis
1
The values measured by Sepam that may be remote accessed are divided into the
following categories:
b measurements: currents, voltages, frequency, power, temperatures, etc.
b energy: calculated or pulse-type energy counters
b network diagnosis: phase displacement, tripping currents, unbalance ratio, etc.
b machine diagnosis: temperature rise, motor starting time, remaining operating
time before overload tripping, waiting time after tripping, etc.
b switchgear diagnosis: cumulative breaking current, operating time and number of
operations, circuit breaker charging time, etc.
b Sepam diagnosis: partial or major fault, etc.
b Logipam counters.
Remote indications
The logic-state information that may be remote accessed are divided into the
following categories:
b alarms and internal status conditions
b status of logic inputs
b status of logic outputs
b status of nine LEDs on the front panel of Sepam
b status of logic-equation output bits.
Alarms and internal status conditions
The alarms and internal status conditions are remote indications (TS) pre-assigned
to protection and control functions.
Remote indications depend on the type of Sepam and can be re-assigned by
Logipam (when a TS is re-assigned with logipam, it is disconnected from the
previous pre-assigned signification).
The remote indications that can be accessed via the communication link include:
b all protection-function alarms
b monitoring-function alarms: CT or VT fault, control fault
b Sepam status data:
v Sepam not reset
v remote setting inhibited, remote-control orders inhibited
b status data on the following functions:
v recloser: in service / inhibited, reclosing in progress / successful, permanent trip
v disturbance recording: records inhibited / stored.
Data transmitted from the supervisor to

Sepam
Pulse-type remote-control orders
Pulse-type remote-control orders (TC) may be carried out in two modes (selected by
parameter setting):
b direct mode
b confirmed SBO (select before operate) mode.
Remote-control orders are pre-assigned to metering, protection and control functions
and depend on the type of Sepam.
They are used for the following, in particular:
b to control breaking device opening and closing
b to reset Sepam and initialize peak-demand measurements
b to select the active group of settings by enabling group A or B
b to inhibit or enable the following functions: recloser, thermal overload protection,
disturbance recording.
Remote-control orders can be re-assigned by Logipam.
Remote-control security
Transmission of Sepam series 60 and series 80 remote controls and settings over a
Modbus S-LAN can be password protected.
47
Description
IEC 61850 logical nodes

Sepam supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note
1
that the actual instantiation of each logical node depends on the application.
Nodes Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam

series 20 series 20 series 40 series 60 series 80
Busbar Others
L: system logical nodes
LPHD Physical device information b b b b b
LLN0 Logical node zero b b b b b
P: logical nodes for protection functions
PDIF Differential b
PDOP Directional overpower b b b
PDUP Directional underpower b b b
PFRC Rate of change of frequency b b
PHIZ Ground detector b b
PMRI Motor restart inhibition b b b b
PMSS Motor starting time supervision b b b b
PPAM Phase angle measuring b b
PSDE Sensitive directional earth fault b b b
PTOC Time overcurrent b b b b
PTOF Overfrequency b b b b
PTOV Overvoltage b b b b
PTRC Protection trip conditioning b b b b
PTTR Thermal overload b b b b
PTUC Undercurrent b b b b
PTUV Undervoltage b b b b
PTUF Underfrequency b b b b
PVOC Voltage controlled time overcurrent b b b
PVPH Volts per Hz b
PZSU Zero speed or underspeed b b
R: logical nodes for protection related functions
RBRF Breaker failure b b b b
RFLO Fault locator b
RREC Autoreclosing b b b b
RDRE Disturbance recorder function b b b b b
RSYN Synchronism-check or synchronizing b b
C: logical nodes for control
CSWI Switch controller b b b b b
GG: logical nodes for generic references
GGIO Generic process I/O b b b b b
M : logical nodes for metering and measurement
MHAI Harmonics or interharmonics b b
MHAN Non phase related harmonics b b
MMTR Metering b b b b b
MMXU Measurement b b b b b
MSQI Sequence and umbalance b b b b
MSTA Metering statistics b b b b
SIML Insulation medium supervision b b b
X: logical nodes for switchgear
XCBR Circuit breaker b b b b b
Z: logical nodes for further power system equipment
ZCAP Capacitor bank b b
48
Description
Time-tagging
Time-tagged events
The time-tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes (events)
so that they can be accurately organized over time.
1
Sepam systematically time-tags the following events:
b status changes of all logic inputs
b status changes of all remote indications (TS - alarms and internal status
conditions).
Each event is time-tagged to within one millisecond.
The number of stacks of time-tagged events managed by Sepam on each
communication port and the volume of each stack in terms of the numbers of events
depend on the communication protocol used.
Modbus RTU DNP3 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850

Number of event stacks 2 1 1 Depending on
for each Sepam configuration
communication port
Number of events per 64 100 100 Depending on
stack configuration
Whatever the communication protocol used, Modbus RTU, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103
or IEC 61850 events may be used by a remote monitoring and control system for
data logging and histories, for example.
Unsollicited events
Using the DNP3 and IEC 61850 protocols, Sepam can spontaneously transmit
time-tagged events to the supervisor. The transmission of unsollicited events must
be activated during setup.
Time-setting and synchronization

The Sepam internal clock manages the date and time.
Time-setting is possible:
b via the Sepam display
b using the SFT2841 software
b via the communication link.
To ensure long-term time stability or to coordinate a number of devices, Sepam units
can be synchronized:
b by an external pulse to a dedicated logic input
b via the communication link.
Remote setting
Sepam parameter and protection settings
The following remote-setting functions are available:
b selection of the protection-setting group
b reading of general parameters
b reading of protection settings (remote reading)
b writing of protection settings (remote setting).
The writing of protection settings may be inhibited by parameter setting.
S-LAN and E-LAN networks

The availability of remote-setting functions over the S-LAN depends on the
communication protocol used.
All remote-setting functions are available over the E-LAN using the SFT2841
software.
Other data accessible via special functions

Network diagnosis
The network diagnostic information recorded in files by Sepam can also be
transmitted over the communication link:
b disturbance-recording records in COMTRADE format
b tripping contexts
b Out-of-sync context.
Identification of Sepam
The identification function enables the supervisor to clearly identify the device
connected to the S-LAN, based on the following elements of information:
b manufacturer identification
b Sepam type.
This function is available for all Sepam relays, whatever the protocol used.
49
TOOLS
schneider-electric.com CAD software and tools
This international site allows you The CAD software and tools enhance
to access all the Schneider Electric productivity
products in just 2 clicks and safety. They help you create your
via comprehensive range data- installations by simplifying product
sheets, with direct links to: choice through easy browsing in the
ppcomplete library: technical Schneider Electric offers.
documents, catalogs, FAQs, Last but not least, they optimise use
brochures… of our products while also complying
pp selection guides from with standards and proper
the e-catalog. procedures.
ppproduct discovery sites and
their Flash animations.
You will also find illustrated
overviews, news to which you
can subscribe, the list of country
contacts…
50
Sepam series 20 Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
and Sepam series 40
Sepam series 80
Range description 5
Sepam series 20 - Sepam series 40 51

Selection table Sepam series 20 52
Selection table Sepam series 40 53
Sensor inputs 54
General settings 55
Metering and diagnosis 56
Description 56
Characteristics 59
Protection 60
Description 60
Main characteristics 64
Setting ranges 65
Control and monitoring 68
Description 68
Description of predefined functions 69
Adaptation of predefined functions using the SFT2841 software 71
Characteristics Sepam series 20  Sepam series 40 72

Base unit 72
Presentation 72
Dimensions 75
Description   76
Technical characteristics 78
Environmental characteristics 79
Connection diagrams 80
Base unit 80
Sepam series 20 80
Sepam series 40 81
Other phase current input connection schemes 82
Other residual current input connection schemes 83
Voltage inputs 85
Sepam series 20 85
Sepam series 40 86
Sepam series 60 89
Sepam series 80 139
Order form 275
51
Sepam series 20 Selection table
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 20
Substation Transformer Motor Busbar

Protection ANSI code S20 S24 (4) T20 T24 (4) M20 B21 (3) B22
Phase overcurrent 50/51 4 4 4 4 4
Phase overcurrent cold load pick-up/blocking CLPU 50/51 1 1
Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault 50N/51N 4 4 4 4 4
50G/51G
Earth fault cold load pick-up/blocking CLPU 50/51N 1 1
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 1 1 1 1 1
Thermal overload 49RMS 2 2 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1
2 Excessive starting time, locked rotor

Starts per hour
Positive sequence undervoltage
48/51LR/14
66
27D/47
1
1
2 2
Phase-to-phase undervoltage 27 2 2
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage 27S 1 1
Phase-to-phase overvoltage 59 2 2
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 1 1
Underfrequency 81L 2 2
Recloser (4 cycles) 79 v v
Thermostat / Buchholz 26/63 v v
Temperature monitoring (8 RTDs) 38/49T v v v
Metering
Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS, residual current I0 b b b b b
Demand current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 b b b b b
Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, residual voltage V0 b b
Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction b b
Frequency b b
Temperature v v v
Network and machine diagnosis
Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 b b b b b
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii b b b b b
Disturbance recording b b b b b b b
Thermal capacity used b b b
Remaining operating time before overload tripping b b b
Waiting time after overload tripping b b b
Running hours counter / operating time b b b
Starting current and time b
Start inhibit time
b
Number of starts before inhibition
Cable arcing fault detection b b b b b b b
Switchgear diagnosis
Cumulative breaking current b b b b b
Trip circuit supervision v v v v v v v
Number of operations, operating time, charging time v v v v v
Control and monitoring ANSI code
Circuit breaker / contactor control (1) 94/69 v v v v v v v
Latching / acknowledgement 86 b b b b b b b
Logic discrimination 68 v v v v v
Switching of groups of settings b (2) b (2) b (2) b (2) b (2)
Annunciation 30 b b b b b b b
Additional modules
8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module v v v
1 low level analog output - MSA141 module v v v v v v v
Logic inputs/outputs -
v v v v v v v
MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module
Communication interface -
v v v v v v v
ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP-2, ACE969FO-2
b standard, v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET148-2 input/output module options.
(1) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit.
(2) Exclusive choice between logic discrimination and switching from one 2-relay group of settings to another 2-relay group.
(3) Performs Sepam B20 functions.
52
Sepam series 20 Selection table
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 40
Substation Transformer Motor Generator

Protection ANSI code S40 S50 S41 S51 S42 S52 S43 S53 S44 S54 T40 T50 T42 T52 M40 M41 G40
Phase overcurrent 50/51 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Phase overcurrent cold CLPU 50/51 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
load pick-up / blocking
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V 1
Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault 50N/51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
50G/51G
Earth fault cold load pick-up / CLPU 50/51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
blocking
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Directional phase overcurrent 67 2 2 2 2
Directional earth fault 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2
Directional active overpower 32P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Directional reactive overpower 32Q/40 1 1
Thermal overload 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1 1
Excessive starting time, 1 1
48/51LR/14
locked rotor
Starts per hour 66 1 1
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2
Undervoltage (3) 27/27S 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overvoltage (3) 59 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Recloser (4 cycles) 79 v v v v v v v v v v
Temperature monitoring 38/49T v v v v v v v
(8 or 16 RTDs)
Thermostat / Buchholz 26/63 v v
Broken conductor 46BC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Metering
Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS, residual current I0 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Demand current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
IM1, IM2, IM3
Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3,
residual voltage V0
Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction
Negative sequence voltage Vi
Frequency b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Active, reactive and apparent power P, Q, S
Peak demand power PM, QM, power factor
Calculated active and reactive energy
(±W.h, ±var.h)
Active and reactive energy by pulse counting
v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
(±W.h, ±.varh)
Temperature v v v v v v v
Tripping context b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Disturbance recording b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Thermal capacity used b b b b b b b
Remaining operating time before overload tripping b b b b b b b
Waiting time after overload tripping b b b b b b b
Running hours counter / operating time b b b b b b b
Starting current and time b b
Cable arcing fault detection b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Fault locator 21FL b b b b b
Start inhibit time, number of starts before inhibition b b
Switchgear diagnosis
Cumulative breaking current b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Trip circuit supervision v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Number of operations, operating time, charging time v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
CT / VT supervision 60FL b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Control and ANSI code
monitoring
Circuit breaker / contactor control (1) 94/69 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Latching / acknowledgement 86 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Logic discrimination 68 v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Switching of groups of settings b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Annunciation 30 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Logic equation editor b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Additional modules
8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module (2) v v v v v v v
1 low level analog output - MSA141 module v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Logic inputs/outputs -
v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module
Communication interface - ACE949-2, ACE959,
ACE937, ACE969TP-2, ACE969FO-2 , ACE850 v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
TP, ACE850FO
b standard, v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F (2) 2 modules possible.
or MET148-2 input/output module options. (3) Exclusive choice, phase-to-neutral voltage or phase-to-phase voltage for each
(1) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit. of the 2 relays.
53
Sepam series 20 Sensor inputs
Sepam series 40
Each Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 has analog inputs that are connected to
the measurement sensors required for the application.
Sepam series 20 sensor inputs

DE88090
S20, S24 T20, T24, M20 B21, B22

Phase current inputs 3 3 0
Residual current input 1 1 0
Phase voltage inputs 0 0 3
Residual voltage input 0 0 1
2
Temperature inputs 0 8 0
(on MET148-2 module)
Sepam T20 sensor inputs.
Sepam series 40 sensor inputs

DE88091
S40, S41, S42, S43, T40, T42, T50, T52,

S44, S50, S51, S52, M40, M41, G40
S53, S54
Phase current inputs 3 3
Residual current input 1 1
Phase voltage inputs 2 3 2 3
Residual voltage input 1 0 1 0
Temperature inputs 0 2x8
Sepam M41 sensor inputs.
54
Sepam series 20 General settings
Sepam series 40
The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors

connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection
functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software “General
Characteristics”, “CT-VT Sensors” and “Particular characteristics” tabs.
General settings Selection Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40

In Rated phase current 2 or 3 CT 1 A / 5 A 1 A to 6250 A 1 A to 6250 A
(sensor primary current) 3 LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A (1) 25 A to 3150 A (1)
Ib Base current, according to rated power of equipment 0.4 to 1.3 In 0.2 to 1.3 In
2
In0 Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents See In rated phase current See In rated phase current
CSH120 or CSH200 or 2 A or 20 A rating 2 A, 5 A or 20 A rating

CSH300 core balance CT
1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 1 A to 6250 A 1 A to 6250 A (In0 = In)
interposing ring CT
1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 - 1 A to 6250 A (In0 = In/10)
interposing ring CT
Sensitivity x10
Core balance CT + ACE990 According to current monitored According to current monitored
(the core balance CT ratio and use of ACE990 and use of ACE990
1/n must be such that
50 y n y 1500)
Unp Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage 220 V to 250 kV 220 V to 250 kV
(Vnp: rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage
Vnp = Unp/3)
Uns Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 90 V to 230 V in steps of 1 V 90 V to 230 V in steps of 1 V
2 VTs: U21, U32 90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V 90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V
1 VT: V1 90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V 90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V
Uns0 Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero Uns/3 or Uns/3 Uns/3 or Uns/3
sequence voltage Unp/3
Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Integration period (for demand current and peak 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 mn 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 mn
demand current and power)
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy - 0.1 kW.h to 5 MW.h
Increments reactive energy - 0.1 kvar.h to 5 Mvar.h
(1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
55
Sepam series 20 Metering and diagnosis
Sepam series 40 Description
Metering
Sepam is a precision metering unit.
All the metering and diagnosis data used for commissioning and required
for the operation and maintenance of your equipment are available locally
or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, etc.).
Phase current
RMS current for each phase, taking into account harmonics up to number 13.
Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current:
b 1 A or 5 A current transformers
b LPCT type current sensors.
2 Residual current
Two residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and
sensors connected to it:
b residual currents I0S, calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents
b measured residual current I0.
Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current:
b CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300 specific core balance CT
b conventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer
b any core balance CT with an ACE990 interface.
Demand current and peak demand currents

Demand current and peak demand currents are calculated according to the 3 phase
currents I1, I2 and I3:
b demand current is calculated over an adjustable period of 5 to 60 minutes
b peak demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current
drawn by peak loads.
Peak demand currents may be cleared.
Voltage and frequency

The following measurements are available according to the voltage sensors
connected:
b phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3
b phase-to-phase voltages U21, U32, U13
b residual voltage V0
b positive sequence voltage Vd and negative sequence voltage Vi
b frequency f.
Power
Powers are calculated according to the phase currents I1, I2 and I3:
b active power
b reactive power
b apparent power
b power factor (cos φ).
Power calculations is based on the 2 wattmeter method.
The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is no residual current and it is
not applicable if the neutral is distributed.
Peak demand powers

The greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same
period as the demand current.
The peak demand powers may be cleared.
Energy
b 4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2
and I3 measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions
b 1 to 4 additional accumulated energy meters for the acquisition of active or reactive
energy pulses from external meters.
Temperature
Accurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100
or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET148-2 module.
56
Machine diagnosis Network diagnosis assistance

assistance Sepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on
network disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes.
Sepam assists facility managers by providing:
b data on the operation of their machines Tripping context
b predictive data to optimize process management Storage of tripping currents and I0, Ii, U21, U32, U13, V0, Vi, Vd, f, P and Q values
b useful data to facilitate protection function setting when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored.
and implementation.
Tripping current
Thermal capacity used Storage of the 3 phase currents and earth fault current at the time of the last Sepam
Equivalent temperature buildup in the machine, trip order, to indicate fault current.
2
calculated by the thermal overload protection function. The values are stored in the tripping contexts.
Displayed as a percentage of rated thermal capacity.
Negative sequence / unbalance
Remaining operating time before Negative sequence component of phase currents I1, I2 and I3, indicating the degree
overload tripping of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment.
Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload
protection function. Phase displacement
The time is used by facility managers to optimize b phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages V1,
process management in real time by deciding to: V2, V3 respectively
b interrupt according to procedures b phase displacement φ0 between residual current and residual voltage.
b continue operation with inhibition of thermal
protection on overloaded machine. Disturbance recording
Recording triggered by user-set events:
Waiting time after overload tripping b all sampled values of measured currents and voltages
Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload b status of all logic inputs and outputs
protection function. b logic data: pick-up, …
Waiting time to avoid further tripping of thermal
overload protection by premature Characteristics Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40
re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment. Number of recordings in 2 Adjustable from 1 to 19
COMTRADE format
Running hours counter / operating time Total duration of a recording 86 periods Adjustable from 1 to 10 s.
(1.72 s at 50 Hz, The total of all the records plus
Equipment is considered to be running whenever a 1.43 s at 60 Hz) one must not be more than
phase current is over 0.1 Ib. 20 s at 50 Hz and 16 s at 60 Hz
Cumulative operating time is given in hours. Number of samples per period 12 12
Duration of recording prior to Adjustable from 0 to 86 Adjustable from 0 to
Motor starting / overload current and occurrence of the event periods 99 periods
time Recorded data b currents or voltages b currents and voltages
A motor is considered to be starting or overloaded b logic inputs b logic inputs
when a phase current is over b pick up b pick up
b logic output O1. b logic outputs O1 to O4.
1.2 Ib. For each start / overload, Sepam stores:
b maximum current drawn by the motor
b starting / overload time.
The values are stored until the following start / Fault location
overload. The network diagnosis function 21FL calculates the distance to a located fault in a
medium voltage network. It is associated with the following protection functions:
Number of starts before inhibition/start b Single-phase fault - 50N/51N or 67N,
inhibit time b Multi-phase fault - 50/51 or 67.
Indicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts
per hour protection function and, if the number is zero, Only units with protection functions configured for circuit breaker tripping activate
the waiting time before starting is allowed again. the Fault locator function.
The fault resistance is also calculated. The results of the calculation, as well as
information on the type of fault located and the faulty phases are displayed and
saved in the tripping context. The fault distance can be calculated in miles or
kilometers. The 21FL function is designed to operate on an incoming feeder on a
network with several feeders.
Data on the last five faults is saved.
57
Sepam self-diagnosis Switchgear diagnosis assistance

Sepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in the Switchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on:
base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the b mechanical condition of breaking device
self-tests is to: b Sepam auxiliaries
b detect internal failures that may cause nuisance and assist them for preventive and curative switchgear maintenance actions.
tripping or failed fault tripping The data are to be compared to switchgear manufacturer data.
b put Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any unwanted
operation
b alert the facility manager of the need for maintenance ANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervision
operations. Used to monitor the entire metering chain:
b CT and VT sensors
2 Internal failure
Two categories of internal failures are monitored:
b major failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe
b connection
b Sepam analog inputs.
Monitoring includes:
position). b consistency checking of currents and voltages measured
The protection functions are inhibited, the output relays b acquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown
are forced to drop out and the “Watchdog” output contacts.
indicates Sepam shutdown In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned
b minor failures: downgraded Sepam operation. protection functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping.
Sepam’s main functions are operational and equipment
protection is ensured. ANSI 74 - Trip circuit supervision
To detect trip circuit circuit failures, Sepam monitors:
Detection of plugged connectors b shunt trip coil connection
The system checks that the current or voltage sensors b matching of breaking device open/closed position contacts
are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure. b execution of breaking device open and close orders.
The trip circuit is only supervised when connected as shown below.
Configuration checking
The system checks that the optional modules
configured are present and working correctly.
DE88092
DE88093
The absence or failure of a remote module is a minor

failure, the absence or failure of a logic input/output
module is a major failure.
Connection for shunt trip coil Connection for undervoltage

monitoring. trip coil monitoring.
Cumulative breaking current

Six cumulative currents are proposed to assess breaking device pole condition:
b total cumulative breaking current
b cumulative breaking current between 0 and 2 In
b cumulative breaking current between 2 In and 5 In
b cumulative breaking current > 40 In.
Each time the breaking device opens, the breaking current is added to the cumulative
total and to the appropriate range of cumulative breaking current.
Cumulative breaking current is given in (kA)².
Number of operations
Cumulative number of opening operations performed by the breaking device.
Circuit breaker operating time and charging time

Used to assess the condition of the breaking device operating mechanism.
58
Sepam series 40 Characteristics
Functions Measurement Accuracy (1) Accuracy (1) MSA141 Saving

range Sepam series 20 Sepam series 40
Metering
Phase current 0.1 to 40 In (3) ±1 % ±0.5 % b
Residual current Calculated 0.1 to 40 In ±1 % ±1 % b
Measured 0.1 to 20 In0 ±1 % ±1 % b
Demand current 0.1 to 40 In ±1 % ±0.5 %
Peak demand current 0.1 to 40 In ±1 % ±0.5 % v
Phase-to-phase voltage 0.06 to 1.2 Unp ±1 % ±0.5 % b
Phase-to-neutral voltage 0.06 to 1.2 Vnp ±1 % ±0.5 % b
2
Residual voltage 0.04 to 3 Vnp ±1 % ±1 %
Positive sequence voltage 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp ±5 % ±2 %
Negative sequence voltage 0.05 to 1,2 Vnp - ±2 %
Frequency Sepam series 20 50 ±5 Hz or 60 ±5 Hz ±0.05 Hz - b
Frequency Sepam series 40 25 to 65 Hz - ±0.02 Hz b
Active power 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW - ±1 % b
Reactive power 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar - ±1 % b
Apparent power 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MVA - ±1 % b
Peak demand active power 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW - ±1 % v
Peak demand reactive power 0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar - ±1 % v
Power factor -1 to +1 (CAP/IND) - ±1 %
Calculated active energy 0 to 2.1.108 MW.h - ±1 % ±1 digit v
Calculated reactive energy 0 to 2.1.108 Mvar.h - ±1 % ±1 digit v
Temperature -30 to +200 °C ±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C ±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C
b
or -22 to +392 °F
Network diagnosis assistance
Tripping context v
Phase tripping current 0.1 to 40 In ±5 % ±5 % v
Earth fault tripping current 0.1 to 20 In0 ±5 % ±5 % v
Negative sequence / unbalance 10 to 500 % of Ib ±2 % ±2 %
Phase displacement α0 (between V0 and I0) 0 to 359° - ±2°
Phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 0 to 359° - ±2°
(between V and I)
Disturbance recording - - - v (4)
Machine operating assistance
Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 % ±1 % ±1 %
b v
(100 % for I phase = Ib)
Remaining operating time before overload 0 to 999 mn ±1 mn ±1 mn
tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping 0 to 999 mn ±1 mn ±1 mn
Running hours counter / operating time 0 to 65535 hours ±1 % or ±0.5 h ±1 % or ±0.5 h v
Starting current S20 : 0,5 Ib to 24 In ±5 % ±5 %
v
S40 : 1,2 Ib to 24 In
Starting time 0 to 300 s ±300 ms ±300 ms v
Number of starts before inhibition 0 to 60 1 1
Start inhibit time 0 to 360 mn ±1 mn ±1 mn
Cooling time constant 5 to 600 mn - ±5 mn
Switchgear diagnosis assistance
Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA² ±10 % ±10 % v
Number of operations 0 to 4.109 1 1 v
Operating time 20 to 100 ms ±1 ms ±1 ms v
Charging time 1 to 20 s ±0.5 s ±0.5 s v
b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup.
v saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at In or Unp, cos φ > 0.8.
(2) Sn: apparent power, = 3.Unp.In.
(3) Measurement up to 0.02 In for information purpose.
(4) Series 40 only.
59
Sepam series 20 Protection
Directional current protection

ANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrent
Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, with selective tripping according to fault
current direction.
It comprises a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection, and
picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is
activated for at least one of the 3 phases.
Characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
2 b choice of tripping direction

b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves)
b with voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to loss of polarization
voltage at the time of the fault
b with or without timer hold.
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault

Earth fault protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction.
3 types of operation:
DE88337
b type 1: the protection function uses the projection of the I0 vector

b type 2: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude with half-plane tripping
zone
b type 3: the protection function uses the I0 vector magnitude with angular sector
tripping zone
ANSI 67N/67NC type 1

Directional earth fault protection for impedant, isolated or compensated neutral
systems, based on the projection of measured residual current.
Type 1 characteristics
b definite time (DT) curve
b choice of tripping direction
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection
(characteristic angle θ0 ≠ 0°).
b characteristic projection angle
b no timer hold
b with voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to recurrent faults in
compensated neutral systems.
DE88338

Directional overcurrent protection for impedance and solidly earthed systems, based
on measured or calculated residual current.
It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection, and picks up
if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated.
b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves)
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection
(characteristic angle θ0 ≠ 0°). ANSI 67N/67NC type 3
Directional overcurrent protection for distribution networks in which the neutral
earthing system varies according to the operating mode, based on measured
residual current.
It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection (angular
DE88339
sector tripping zone defined by 2 adjustable angles), and picks up if the earth fault
function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated.
This protectionfunction complies with the CEI 0-16 Italian specification.
b no timer hold
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protection.
60
Current protection functions ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault

Earth fault protection based on measured or calculated residual current values:
ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent b ANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or measured by 3 phase current
Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, sensitive to the sensors
highest phase current measured. b ANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by a specific sensor.
Characteristics Characteristics
b 2 groups of settings b 2 groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping b Definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves)
b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 b with or without timer hold
standardized IDMT curves) b second harmonic restraint to ensure stability during transformer energizing,
b with or without timer hold. The protection activated by parameter setting.
incorporates a harmonic 2 restraint which can be used
to set the protection Is set point close to the CT rated
current In, including when a transformer closes.
ANSI CLPU 50N/51N- Earth fault cold load pick-up/blocking
(Cold Load Pick-Up I0)
2
This restraint can be activated by parameter setting. The Cold Load Pick-Up I0 or CLPU 50N/51N function avoids nuisance tripping of the
The harmonic 2 restraint is valid as long as the current earth fault protection (ANSI 50N/51N) during energization after a long outage.
is less than half the minimum short-circuit current Isc of Depending on the installation characteristics, such operations can actually generate
the network downstream of the protection. transient inrush currents. If the residual current measurement is based on the sum of
the 3 phase CTs, the aperiodic component of these transient currents can result in
With Sepam series 40, tripping can be confirmed or saturation of the phase CTs. This can lead to measurement of an incorrect residual
unconfirmed, according to parameter setting: current likely to exceed the protection set points.
b unconfirmed tripping: standard These transient currents are essentially due to:
b tripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage b the power transformer magnetizing currents,
protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant b the motor starting currents.
2-phase short-circuits In principle, the protection settings should be defined so as to avoid tripping due to
b tripping confirmed by undervoltage protection these transient currents. However, if these settings result in inadequate sensitivity
(ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for phase-to-phase short- levels or delays that are too long, the CLPU 50N/51N function is used to increase or
circuits in networks with low short-circuit power. inhibit set points temporarily after energization.
If the residual current is measured by a correctly installed CT, there is less risk of
ANSI CLPU 50/51 - Phase overcurrent measuring an incorrect residual current. In this case, there is no need to use the
CLPU 50N/51N function.
cold load pick-up/blocking (Cold Load
Pick-Up I) ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure
The Cold Load Pick-Up I or CLPU 50/51 function If a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping order, as detected by the non-extinction
avoids nuisance tripping of the phase overcurrent of the fault current, this backup protection sends a tripping order to the upstream or
protection (ANSI 50/51), during energization after a adjacent breakers.
long outage.
Depending on the installation characteristics, these ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance
operations can actually generate transient inrush Protection against phase unbalance, detected by the measurement of negative
currents likely to exceed the protection set points. sequence current:
These transient currents may be due to: b sensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ends of long lines
b the power transformer magnetizing currents, b protection of equipment against temperature build-up, caused by an unbalanced
b the motor starting currents, power supply, phase inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current
b the simultaneous resetting of all the loads in the unbalance.
installation (air conditioning, heating, etc.) Characteristics
b Sepam series 20:
In principle, the protection settings should be defined v 1 definite time (DT) curve
so as to avoid tripping due to these transient currents. v 1 specific Schneider IDMT curve.
However, if these settings result in inadequate b Sepam series 40:
sensitivity levels or delays that are too long, the CLPU v 1 definite time (DT) curve
50/51 function is used to increase or inhibit set points v 7 IDMT curves: 3 IEC curves, 3 IEEE curves and 1 specific Schneider curve.
temporarily after energization.
ANSI 46BC - Broken conductor detection
Broken conductor detection protection indicates an open phase condition on the
circuit in a medium voltage radial network.
This may be caused by one of the following:
b broken conductor in contact with the ground at the source side
b broken conductor in contact with the ground at the load side
b open circuit (conductor not in contact with the ground) caused by:
v broken conductor
v blown fuse
v circuit breaker pole failure.
61
Current protection functions ANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive overpower

Two-way protection based on calculated reactive power to detect field loss on
(continued) synchronous machines:
b reactive overpower protection for motors which consume more reactive power with
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload field loss
Protection against thermal damage caused by b reverse reactive overpower protection for generators which consume reactive
overloads on machines (transformers, motors or power with field loss.
generators).
The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a
mathematical model which takes into account: Machine protection functions
b current RMS values
ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent
2
b ambient temperature
b negative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor Protection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection
temperature rise. of motor no-load operation.
The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains stable during breaker
calculate predictive data for process control tripping and may be inhibited by a logic input.
assistance.
The protection may be inhibited by a logic input when ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Locked rotor / excessive starting time
required by process control conditions. Protection of motors against overheating caused by:
b excessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient
Characteristics
supply voltage.
The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be
b 1 adjustable alarm set point
considered as starting.
b 1 adjustable tripping set point
b locked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher):
b adjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to
v in normal operation, after a normal start
adapt protection characteristics to fit manufacturer’s
v directly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with
thermal withstand curves
detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by
b equipment heating and cooling time constants.
the underspeed function.
With Sepam series 40, the cooling time constant may
be calculated automatically based on measurement of ANSI 66 - Starts per hour
the equipment temperature by a sensor.
Protection against motor overheating caused by:
b too frequent starts: motor energizing is inhibited when the maximum allowable
Recloser number of starts is reached, after counting of:
v starts per hour (or adjustable period)
v consecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut
ANSI 79
down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start)
Automation device used to limit down time after tripping
b starts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only
due to transient or semi-permanent faults on overhead
allowed after an adjustable waiting time.
lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the
breaking device after the time delay required to restore ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrent
the insulation has elapsed. Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators. The current tripping set point
Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different is voltage-adjusted in order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator which
operating modes by parameter setting. cause voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit current.
Characteristics Characteristics
b 1 to 4 reclosing cycles, each cycle has an adjustable b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
dead time b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves)
b adjustable, independent reclaim time and safety time b with or without timer hold.
until recloser ready time delays
b cycle activation linked to instantaneous or time- ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/Buchholz
delayed short-circuit protection function (ANSI 50/51, Protection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs
50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting linked to devices integrated in the transformer.
b inhibition/locking out of recloser by logic input.
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring
Protection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the
Directional power protection temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors:
b transformer: protection of primary and secondary windings
functions b motor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings.
ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower Characteristics
b Sepam series 20: 8 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs
Two-way protection based on calculated active power,
b Sepam series 40: 16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs
for the following applications:
b 2 adjustable independent set points for each RTD (alarm and trip).
b active overpower protection to detect overloads and
allow load shedding
b reverse active power protection:
v against generators running like motors when the
generators consume active power
v against motors running like generators when the
motors supply active power.
62
Voltage protection functions Frequency protection functions

ANSI 27D - Positive sequence ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
undervoltage Detection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
Protection of motors against faulty operation due to power supply quality.
insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and
detection of reverse rotation direction. ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
Detection of abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage power supply quality.
Protection used to check that remanent voltage The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding.
sustained by rotating machines has been cleared Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and
before allowing the busbar supplying the machines to
be re-energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical
transients.
presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of
the frequency, which is activated by parameter setting. 2
ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage Protection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding
Protection of motors against voltage sags or detection control. Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to
of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic transient voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift
load shedding or source transfer. protection function.
Works with phase-to-phase voltage (Sepam series 20 Disconnection
and Sepam series 40) or phase-to-neutral voltage In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the “rate of
(Sepam series 40 only), each voltage being monitored change of frequency” protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in
separately. view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to:
b protect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage b avoid supplying loads outside the installation.
Detection of abnormally high network voltage or
Load shedding
checking for sufficient voltage to enable source
The “rate of change of frequency” protection function is used for load shedding in
transfer.
combination with the underfrequency protection to:
Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral
b either accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload
voltage, each voltage being monitored separately.
b or inhibit shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement should not be solved by shedding.
Detection of insulation faults by measuring residual
voltage in isolated neutral systems.
ANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage

Protection against phase unbalance resulting from
phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault,
detected by the measurement of negative sequence
voltage.
63
Sepam series 40 Main characteristics
Current IDMT tripping curves

Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications:
b IEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT)
b IEEE curves (MI, VI, EI)
b usual curves (UIT, RI, IAC).
The curve equations are given page 105.
Setting of IDMT tripping curves,

time delay T or TMS factor
2 The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI
curves) may be set as follows:
b time T, operating time at 10 x Is
b TMS factor, factor shown as T/b (see curve equation page 105).
Timer hold
DE50275
The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for:

b detection of restriking faults (DT curve)
b coordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve).
Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary.
2 groups of settings
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth short-circuit protection
Each unit has 2 groups of settings, A and B, to adapt the settings to suit the network
configuration.
The active group of settings (A or B) is set by a logic input or the communication link.
Example of use: normal / backup mode network
b group A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by
the utility
b group B for network protection in backup mode, when the network is supplied by a
backup generator.
Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold. Thermal overload for machines
Each unit has 2 groups of settings to protect equipment that has two operating
modes.
Examples of use:
b transformers: switching of groups of settings by logic input, according to
transformer ventilation operating mode, natural or forced ventilation (ONAN or
ONAF)
b motors: switching of groups of settings according to current set point, to take into
account the thermal withstand of motors with locked rotors.
Summary table
Characteristics Protection functions
2 groups of settings A and B 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC
2 groups of settings, operating modes 1 and 2 49RMS Machine
IEC IDMT curves 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2, 46
IEEE IDMT curves 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2, 46
Usual IDMT curves 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
Timer hold 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
64
Sepam series 40 Setting ranges
Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 21FL - Fault locator
Time to establish healthy state 1s to 99 mn 0,1 s to 300 s
Percentage of cable 0 to 30 %
Distance unit Km or mile Km or mile
Direct line resistance 0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km
Direct line reactance 0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km
Direct cable resistance 0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km
Direct cable reactance 0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km
Zero sequence line resistance 0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km
Zero sequence line reactance 0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km
Zero sequence cable resistance
Zero sequence cable reactance
0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km
0,001 Ω/Km to 10 Ω/Km 2
ANSI 27 - Phase-to-phase undervoltage
5 to 120 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage
5 to 60 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage
5 to 120 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27S - Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
5 to 120 % of Vnp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower
1 to 120 % of Sn (2) 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive overpower
5 to 120 % of Sn (2) 0.1 s to 300 s
0.15 to 1 Ib 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs)
Alarm and trip set points 0 to 180 °C (or 32 to 356 °F)
ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance
Definite time 0.1 to 5 Ib 0.1 s to 300 s
IDMT 0.1 to 0.5 Ib (Schneider Electric) 0.1 to 1 Ib (IEC, IEEE) 0.1 s to 1 s
Tripping curve Schneider Electric
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C (1)
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) (1)
ANSI 46BC - Broken Conductor
Ii/ld set point 10 to 100 % 0.15 s to 300 s
1 to 50 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Excessive starting time, locked rotor
0.5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time 0.5 s to 300 s
LT and LTS time delays 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload Rate 1 and Rate 2
Accounting for negative sequence component 0 - 2,25 - 4,5 - 9
Time constant Heating Sepam serie 20 T1: 1 to 120 mn
Sepam serie 40 T1: 1 to 600 mn
Cooling Sepam serie 20 T2: 1 to 600 mn
Sepam serie 40 T2: 5 to 600 mn
Alarm and tripping set points 50 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity
Cold curve modification factor 0 to 100 %
Switching of thermal settings conditions By logic input
By Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib
Maximum equipment temperature 60 to 200 °C (140 °F to 392 °F)
(1) Sepam series 40 only.
(2) Sn = 3.In.Unp.
65

ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent
Tripping time delay Timer hold
Tripping curve Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Is set point 0.1 to 24 In Definite time Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 2.4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
2 Timer hold
Confirming (2)
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
None
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
By negative sequence overvoltage

By phase-to-phase undervoltage
Second-harmonic set point 5 to 50 %
CLPU 50/51 - Phase overcurrent cold load pick-up/blocking
Time before activation Tcold 0,1 to 300 s
Pick-up threshold CLPUs 10 to 100 % of ln
Global action CLPU 50/51 Blocking or multiplication of the set point
Action on unit x ANSI 50/51 OFF or ON
Time delay T/x 100 ms to 999 mn
Multiplying factor M/x 100 to 999 % of ls
ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure
Presence of current 0.2 to 2 In
Operating time 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
Is0 set point 0.1 to 15 In0 Definite time Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 1 In0 IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Timer hold Definite time (DT ; timer hold) Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s
CLPU 50N/51N - Earth fault cold load pick-up/blocking
Time before activation Tcold 0,1 to 300 s
Pick-up threshold CLPUs 10 to 100 % of ln0
Global action CLPU 50N/51N Blocking or multiplication of the set point
Action on unit x ANSI 50N/51N OFF or ON
Time delay T0/x 100 ms to 999 mn
Multiplying factor M0/x 100 to 999 % of ls0
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrent
RI DT
0.5 to 2,4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
66

ANSI 59 - Overvoltage (L-L ou L-N)
50 to 150 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns < 208 V 0,05 s to 300 s
50 to 135 % of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns ≥ 208 V 0,05 s to 300 s
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
2 to 80 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 66 - Starts per hour
Starts per period 1 to 60 Period 1 to 6 hr
Consecutive starts 1 to 60 Time between starts 0 to 90 mn
Tripping curve
Tripping time delay
Definite time
Timer hold
DT 2
RI DT
0.1 to 2,4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Characteristic angle 30°, 45°, 60°
ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 projection
Characteristic angle -45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Is0 set point 0.1 to 15 In0 Definite time Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
Vs0 set point 2 to 80 % of Un
Memory time T0mem time 0 ; 0.05 s to 300 s
V0mem validity set point 0 ; 2 to 80 % of Unp
ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 magnitude with half-plan tripping zone
RI DT
Is0 set point 0.1 to 15 In0 Definite time Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 1 In0 IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Vs0 set point 2 to 80 % of Unp
ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 magnitude with angular sector tripping zone
Angle at start of tripping zone 0° to 359°
Angle at end of tripping zone 0° to 359°
Is0 set point CSH core balance CT 0.1 A to 30 A Definite time Inst ; 0.05 to 300 s
(2 A rating)
1 A CT 0.05 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
(sensitive, In0 = 0.1 CT In)
Core balance CT + ACE990 0.05 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
(range 1)
Vs0 set point Calculated V0 (sum of 3 voltages) 2 to 80 % of Unp
Measured V0 (external VT) 0.6 to 80 % of Unp
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
Sepam series 20 50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
0.1 to 10 Hz/s Inst ; 0.15 s to 300 s
67
Sepam series 20 Control and monitoring
Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical
network operation:
b the main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent
cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter
setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned.
b the predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular
needs using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
v customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
LEDs and annunciation messages
v logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring
functions (Sepam series 40 only)
2
v creation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only).
Operating principle
The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into
3 phases:
b acquisition of input data:
v results of protection function processing
v external logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input /
output module
v remote control orders (TC) received via the Modbus communication link
b actual processing of the control and monitoring function
b utilization of the processing results:
v activation of output relays to control a device
v information sent to the facility manager:
- by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software
- by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link.
DE60670
Logic inputs and outputs

The number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and
monitoring functions used.
The 4 outputs included in the Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) may be
extended by adding one MES114 modules with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays.
After selecting the MES114 type required by an application, the logic inputs must be
assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which covers the whole
range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs within the limits of
the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type
operation.
A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses.
68
Sepam series 40 Description of predefined functions
Each Sepam contains the appropriate predefined control and monitoring functions
for the chosen application.
ANSI 94/69 - Circuit breaker/contactor control

Control of breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils:
b circuit breakers with shunt or undervoltage trip coils
b latching contactors with shunt trip coils
The function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions, based on:
b protection functions
b breaking device status data
b remote control orders
2
b specific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser).
The function also inhibits breaking device closing, according to the operating
conditions.
With Sepam series 20, it is necessary to use an MES114 module in order to have all
the required logic inputs.
ANSI 86 - Latching / acknowledgement

The tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs can be
latched individually. The latched information is saved in the event of an auxiliary
power failure.
(The logic outputs cannot be latched.)
All the latched data may be acknowledged:

b locally, with the reset key
b remotely via a logic input
b or via the communication link.
The Latching/acknowledgement function, when combined with the circuit breaker/

contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 “Lockout relay”
function.
ANSI 68 - Logic discrimination

This function provides:
b perfect tripping discrimination with phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth short-
circuits, on all types of network
b faster tripping of the breakers closest to the source (solving the drawback of
conventional time discrimination).
Each Sepam is capable of:

b sending a blocking input when a fault is detected by the phase overcurrent and
earth fault protection functions, which may or may not be directional (ANSI 50/51,
50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC)
b and receiving blocking inputs which inhibit protection tripping. A saving mechanism
ensures continued operation of the protection in the event of a blocking link failure.
Output relay testing

Each output relay is activated for 5 seconds, to make it simpler to check output
connections and connected switchgear operation.
69
Sepam series 40 Description of predefined functions
ANSI 30 - Local annunciation

PE88028
LED indication on the Sepam front panel

b 2 LEDs indicate the unit operating status:
v green LED ON: Sepam on
v red “key” LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal
failure)
b 9 yellow LEDs:
v pre-assigned and identified by standard removable labels
v the SFT2841 software tool may be used to assign LEDs and personalize labels.
Local annunciation on Sepam’s advanced UMI
2 Events and alarms may be indicated locally on Sepam’s advanced UMI by:
b messages on the display unit, available in 2 languages:
v english, factory-set messages, not modifiable
Local indications on the Sepam front panel. v local language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen
when Sepam is set up)
b the lighting up of one of the 9 yellow LEDs, according to the LED assignment,
which is set using SFT2841.
Alarm processing
b when an alarm appears, the related message replaces the current display and the
related LED goes on.
The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages
are linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the
SFT2841 “Alarms” screen.
b to clear the message from the display, press the clear
key
b after the fault has disappeared, press the reset
key: the light goes off and Sepam is
reset
b the list of alarm messages remains accessible ( key) and may be cleared by
pressing the clear
key.
70
Sepam series 40 Adaptation of predefined functions using
the SFT2841 software
The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs
using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
b customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
b logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring
functions (Sepam series 40 only)
b creation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only).
Control matrix
The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from:
PE88029
2
b control and monitoring functions
b logic inputs
b logic equations
to the following output data:
b output relays
b 9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam
b messages for local annunciation
b triggering of disturbance recording.
SFT2841: control matrix.
Logic equation editor (Sepam series 40)

The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to:
b complete protection function processing:
v additional interlocking
v conditional inhibition/validation of functions
v etc.
b adapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control
sequences, etc.
A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from:

b logic inputs
using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such
as time delays, bistables and time programmer.
Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically.
The result of an equation may then be:

b assigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix
b transmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication
b utilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or inhibit
breaking device closing
b used to inhibit or reset a protection function.
Personalized alarm and operating messages (Sepam series 40)

The alarm and operating messages may be personalized using the SFT2841
software tool.
The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned
via the control matrix for display:
b on the Sepam display
b in the SFT2841 “Alarms” and “Alarm History” screens.
71
Characteristics Base unit
Sepam series 20 Presentation
Sepam series 40
Base units are defined according to the following

characteristics:
User-Machine Interface
Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam base units
b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI)
(series 20 or series 40):
b working language
b advanced UMI
b type of base unit connector
b basic UMI.
b type of current sensor connector.
The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the
cubicle. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions.
A Sepam (series 20 or series 40) with a remote advanced UMI is made up of :
b a base unit with basic UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment
PE88030
b a remote advanced UMI (DSM303)
2 v for flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for
the facility manager
v for connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cord.
The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented on
page  218 .
Advanced UMI
Comprehensive data for facility managers
All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand:
b display of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/
or in bar graphs
b display of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and Sepam
resetting
b display and setting of all the Sepam parameters
b display and setting of all the parameters of each protection function
b display of Sepam and remote module versions
Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with integrated
b output testing and logic input status display
advanced UMI.
b entry of 2 passwords to protect parameter and protection settings.
Ergonomic data presentation
b keypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation
PE88031
b menu-guided access to data.

b graphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol
b excellent display quality under all lighting conditions: automatic contrast setting
and backlit screen (user activated).
Basic UMI
A Sepam with basic UMI offers an economical solution suited to installations that do
not require local operation (managed by a remote monitoring and control system) or
to replace electromechanical or analog electronic protections units with no additional
operating needs.
The basic UMI includes:
b 2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status:
b 9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps equipped with a standard label
b reset button for clearing faults and resetting.
Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with basic UMI.
Working language
All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI are available in
PE88032
2 languages:
b english, the default working language
b and a second language, which may be
v french
v spanish
v another “local” language.
Please contact us regarding local language customization.
Setting and operating software

Customized Chinese advanced UMI.
SFT2841 setting and operating software can be used for easy setting of Sepam
parameters and protection functions.
A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the communication port on
the front of the unit or through the communication network.
72
Sepam series 40
Selection guide
Base unit With basic UMI With integrated With remote advanced
advanced UMI UMI
PE88031
PE88030
PE88033
2
Functions
Local indication
Metering and diagnosis data b b
Alarms and operating messages b b
Sepam parameter setting b b
Protection setting b b
Version of Sepam and remote modules b b
Status of logic inputs b b
Local control
Alarm acknowledgement b b b
Sepam reset b b b
Output testing b b
Characteristics
Screen
Size 128 x 64 pixels 128 x 64 pixels
Automatic contrast setting b b
Backlit screen b b
Keypad
Number of keys 1 9 9
LEDs
Sepam operating status 2 LEDs on front 2 LEDs on front b base unit: 2 LEDs on front
b remote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs
on front
Indication LEDs 9 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI
Mounting
Flush mounted on front of cubicle Flush mounted on front of cubicle b base unit with basic UMI,
mounted at the back of the
compartment using the AMT840
mounting plate
b DSM303 remote advanced
UMI module ,flush mounted
on the front of the cubicle and
connected to the base unit with
the CCA77x prefabricated cord
73
Sepam series 40
Hardware characteristics
Auxiliary power supply
Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 can be supplied by either of the following
voltages:
b 24 to 250 V DC
b 110 to 240 V AC.
Backup capacity
Sepam series 40 allows the following data to be stored in the event of an auxiliary
power outage for a minimum of 48 hours :
bb time-tagged event tables
2
bb disturbance recording data
bb peak demands, tripping context, etc.
bb date and time.
Four relay outputs

The 4 relay outputs O1 to O4 on the base unit must be connected to connector
A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841
software.
O1, O2 and O3 are 3 control outputs with one NO contact. O1 and O2 are used by
default for the switchgear control function:
b O1: switchgear tripping
b O2: switchgear closing inhibition.
O4 is an indication output with one NO contact and one NC contact.
It can be assigned to the watchdog function.
Main connector A
A choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 20-pin connectors:
b CCA620 screw-type connector
b CCA622 ring lug connector.
Phase current input connector

Current sensors connected to removable, screw-lockable connectors according to
type of sensors used:
b CCA630 or CCA634 connector for 1 A or 5 A current transformers
or
b CCA670 connector for LPCT sensors.
The presence of these connectors is monitored.
Voltage input connector

Sepam B21 and B22
Voltage sensors connected to the removable, screw-lockable CCT640 connector.
The presence of the CCT640 connector is monitored.
Sepam series 40
Voltage sensors connected to the 6-pin connector E .
bb CCA626 screw-type connector
or
bb CCA627 ring lug connector.
The presence of the E connector is monitored.
Mounting accessories
PE88034
AMT840 mounting plate

It is used to mount a Sepam with basic UMI inside the compartment with access to
connectors on the rear panel.
Mounting used with remote advanced UMI module (DSM303).
AMT852 lead sealing accessory

The AMT852 lead sealing accessory can be used to prevent unauthorized
modification of the settings of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with
integrated advanced UMIs.
The accessory includes:
b a lead-sealable cover plate
b the screws required to secure the cover plate to the integrated advanced UMI
of the Sepam unit.
Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs
of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with serial numbers higher than 0440000.
Sepam unit with integrated advanced UMI and lead sealing

accessory AMT852.
74
Sepam series 20 Dimensions
Sepam series 40
Dimensions
mm
in
DE88102
DE88342
DE88104
8.8
2
6.92
Front view of Sepam. Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114,
flush-mounted in front panel.
(1) With basic UMI: 23 mm (0.91 in).

Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114,
flush-mounted in front panel.
Clearance for Sepam assembly

and wiring.
Cut-out
Cut-out accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand.
For mounting plate between 1.5 mm For mounting plate

(0.059 in) and 3 mm (0.12 in) thick 3.17 mm (0.125 inch) thick
CAUTION mm
in
mm
in
DE88106
DE88107
HAZARD OF CUTS
Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove
any jagged edges.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause
serious injury.
7.95 7.95
2.91
0.47
0.08
6.38
Assembly with AMT840 mounting plate

Used to mount Sepam with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to
the connectors on the rear panel.
DE88109
Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI (DSM303).
DE88104
Sepam with basic UMI and MES114, mounted with AMT840 plate.
Mounting plate thickness: 2 mm (0.079 in).
AMT840 mounting plate.
75
Sepam series 20 Description
Sepam series 40
Front panel with advanced UMI

1 Green LED: Sepam on.
2 Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
DE88110
3 9 yellow indication LEDs.
4 Label identifying the indication LEDs.
5 Graphical LCD screen.
6 Display of measurements.
7 Display of switchgear, network and machine
diagnosis data.
8 Display of alarm messages.
9 Sepam reset (or confirm data entry).
2 10
11
Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms
(or move cursor up).
LED test (or move cursor down).
12 Access to protection settings.
13 Access to Sepam parameter setting.
14 Entry of 2 passwords.
15 PC connection port.
The " , r, " keys (9, 10, 11) are used to browse
r
through the menus and to scroll through and accept
the values displayed.
Front panel with basic UMI

DE88111

5 Acknowledgement / clearing of alarms and Sepam
reset.
76
Sepam series 40
Rear panel - Sepam series 20

1 Base unit.
DE88112
A 20-pin connector for:
b auxiliary power supply
b 4 relay outputs
b 1 residual current input (Sepam S20, S23, T20,
T23, M20 only).
B b Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23, M20:

connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs and
residual current
b Sepam B21 and B22:
connector for 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3 inputs and
2
1 residual voltage V0 input.
C Communication port.
D Remote module connection port.
2 Connector for MES114 input/output module.

3 2 mounting clips.
4 2 locating nibs in flush-mounted position.
Rear panel - Sepam series 40

1 Base unit.
DE88113

b auxiliary poxer supply
b 4 relay outputs
b 1 residual current input.
B Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs and

residual current
C Communication port.
D Remote module connection port .
E 6-pin connector for 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3

inputs.
2 Connector for MES114 input/output module.

3 2 mounting clips.
4 2 locating nibs in flush-mounted position.
77
Sepam series 20 Technical characteristics
Sepam series 40
Weight
Sepam series 20 Minimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114) 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114) 1.7 kg (3.7 lb)
Sepam series 40 Minimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114) 1.4 kg (3.1 lb)
Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114) 1.9 kg (4.2 lb)
Analog inputs
Current transformer Input impedance < 0.02 Ω
1 A or 5 A CT (with CCA630 or CCA634) Consumption < 0.02 VA at 1 A
1 A to 6250 A ratings < 0.5 VA at 5 A
Rated thermal withstand 4 In
2
1-second overload 100 In (y 500 A)
Voltage transformer Input impedance > 100 k Ω
220 V to 250 kV ratings Input voltage 100 to 230/√3 V
Rated thermal withstand 240 V
1-second overload 480 V
Temperature sensor input (MET148-2 module)
Type of sensor Pt 100 Ni 100 / 120
Isolation from earth None None
Current injected in sensor 4 mA 4 mA
Maximum distance between sensor and module 1 km (0.62 mi) -
Logic inputs MES114 MES114E MES114F
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 125 V DC 110 V AC 220 to 250 V DC 220 to 240 V AC
Range 19.2 to 275 V DC 88 to 150 V DC 88 to 132 V AC 176 to 275 V DC 176 to 264 V AC
Frequency - - 47 to 63 Hz - 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA
Typical switching threshold 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC
Input limit voltage At state 1 u 19 V DC u 88 V DC u 88 V AC u 176 V DC u 176 V AC
At state 0 y 6 V DC y 75 V DC y 22 V AC y 137 V DC y 48 V AC
Isolation of inputs in relation to other isolated groups Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
Relays outputs
Control relay outputs (O1, O2, O3, O11 contacts) (2)
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A 8A
Breaking capacity Resistive load 8 / 4A 0.7 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
L/R load < 20 ms 6 / 2A 0.5 A 0.2 A - -
L/R load < 40 ms 4 / 1A 0.2 A 0.1 A - -
Resistive load - - - - 8A
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 5A
Making capacity < 15 A for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Enhanced
Annunciation relay output (O4, O12, O13, O14 contacts)
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Breaking capacity Resistive load 2 / 1A 0.6 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
L/R load < 20 ms 2 / 1A 0.5 A 0.15 A 0.2 A (3) -
p.f. load > 0.3 - - - - 1A
Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups Enhanced
Power supply
Voltage 24 / 250 V DC 110 / 240 V AC
Range -20 % +10 % -20 % +10 % (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Deactivated consumption (1) Sepam series 20 < 4.5 W < 9 VA
Sepam series 40 <6W < 6 VA
Maximum consumption (1) Sepam series 20 <8W < 15 VA
Sepam series 40 < 11 W < 25 VA
Inrush current Sepam series 20, serie 40 < 10 A for 10 ms, < 28 A for 100 µs < 15 A for first half-period
Acceptable momentary outages Sepam series 20 10 ms 10 ms
Sepam series 40 20 ms 20 ms
Analog output (MSA141 module)
Current 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA, 0 - 1 mA
Load impedance < 600 Ω (wiring included)
Accuracy 0.50 % PE or 0,01 mA
(1) According to configuration.
(2) Relay outputs comply with clause 6.7 of standard C37.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations).
78
Sepam series 20 Environmental characteristics
Sepam series 40
Electromagnetic compatibility Standard Level / Class Value

Emission tests
Disturbing field emission IEC 60255-25
EN 55022 A
Conducted disturbance emission IEC 60255-25
EN 55022 B
Immunity tests – Radiated disturbances
Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255-22-3 10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3 III 10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 2 GHz
ANSI C37.90.2 (2004) 20 V/m ; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 8 kV air ; 6 kV contact
ANSI C37.90.3 8 kV air ; 4 kV contact
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency IEC 61000-4-8 IV 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (13 s)
Immunity tests – Conducted disturbances
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances
Immunity to conducted disturbances in common mode from 0 Hz
IEC 60255-22-6
IEC 61000-4-16 III
10 V 2
to 150 kHz
Fast transient bursts IEC 60255-22-4 A or B 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV ; 5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4 IV 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz
ANSI C37.90.1 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz
1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255-22-1 III 2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD
ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV MC and MD
100 kHz damped oscillating wave IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD
Surges IEC 61000-4-5 III 2 kV MC
Voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11 Series 20: 100 %, 10 ms
Series 40: 100 %, 20 ms
Mechanical robustness Standard Level / Class Value
In operation
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 1 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz - 13.2 Hz ; a = ±1 mm (±0.039 In)
IEC 60068-2-64 2M1
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 10 Gn / 11 ms
Earthquakes IEC 60255-21-3 2 2 Gn (horizontal axes)
1 Gn (vertical axes)
De-energized
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 2 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 30 Gn / 11 ms
Jolts IEC 60255-21-2 2 20 Gn / 16 ms
Climatic withstand Standard Level / Class Value
In operation
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Series 20: Ab -25 °C (-13 °F)
Series 40: Ad
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Series 20: Bb +70 °C (+158 °F)
Series 40: Bd
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-3 Ca 10 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 °C (104 °F)
Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068-2-14 Nb –25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
5 °C/min (41 °F/min)
Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Kb/2
Influence of corrosion/gaz test 2 IEC 60068-2-60 C 21 Days, 75% RH, 25°C, 500.10-9 vol/
vol H2S; 1000.10-9 vol/vol SO²
Influence of corrosion/gaz test 4 IEC 60068-2-60 Method 3 21 Days, 75% RH, 25°C,
10+/-5 H²S; 200+/-20 SO² ; 200+/-20
NO², 10+/-5 Cl² (10-9 vol/vol)
EIA 364-65A IIIA 42 days, 75% RH, 30°C,
100+/-20 H²S; 200+/-50 SO² ; 200+/-50
NO², 20+/-5 Cl² (10-9 vol/vol)
In storage (3)
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25 °C (-13 °F)
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bb +70 °C (+158 °F)
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-3 Ca 56 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 °C (104 °F)
Safety Standard Level / Class Value
Enclosure safety tests
Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels closed, except for rear
panel IP20
NEMA Type 12
Fire withstand IEC 60695-2-11 650 °C with glow wire (1562 °F)
Electrical safety tests
1.2/50 µs impulse wave IEC 60255-5 5 kV (1)
Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5 2 kV 1 mn (2)
Certification
e Harmonized standard: bb European Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMCD)
EN 50263 2004 / 108 / EC of 15 December 2004
bb European Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/CE
of 12 December 2006
UL - UL508 - CSA C22.2 n° 14-95 File E212533
CSA CSA C22.2 n° 14-95 / n° 94-M91 / n° 0.17-00 File 210625
(1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1kV in differential mode
(2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms
(3) Sepam must be stored in its original packing.
79
Connection diagrams Base unit
Sepam series 20 Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23 Sepam B21 and B22

and M20
DE88114
2 DE88115
(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage.
Connection
Dangerous voltages may be present on the terminal screws, whether the
terminals are used or not. To avoid all danger of electrical shock, tighten all
terminal screws so that they cannot be touched inadvertently.
Connector Type Reference Wiring

Screw type CCA620 b wiring with no fittings:
A v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (u AWG
24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm² wire
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires
v tube length: 8.2 mm
v stripped length: 8 mm
6.35 mm ring lugs CCA622 b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in)
b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(u AWG 24-12)
b stripped length: 6 mm
b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires
b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal
b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm
B For Sepam 4 mm ring lugs CCA630, CCA634 for b wire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
S20, S23, T20, T23 and connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 Ib-in)
M20 RJ45 plug CCA670, for connection of 3 Integrated with LPCT sensor
LPCT sensors
B For Sepam Screw type CCT640 Same as wiring for the CCA620
B21 and B22
C White RJ45 plug CCA612
D Black RJ45 plug CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)

CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)
80
Sepam series 40
DE88116
2
(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage.

(2) Accessory for bridging terminals 3 and 5 supplied with CCA626 and CCA627 connector.
Connection
Dangerous voltages may be present on the terminal screws, whether the
terminals are used or not. To avoid all danger of electrical shock, tighten all
terminal screws so that they cannot be touched inadvertently.

A Screw type CCA620 b wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
24-16)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires
v tube length: 8.2 mm
v stripped length: 8 mm
6.35 mm ring lugs CCA622 b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in)
(u AWG 24-12)
b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm
B 4 mm ring lugs CCA630, CCA634, for b wire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 Ib-in)
RJ45 plug CCA670, for connection of 3 Integrated with LPCT sensor
LPCT sensors
C White RJ45 plug CCA612
D Black RJ45 plug CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)

CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)
E Screw type CCA626 Same as wiring for the CCA620
6.35 mm ring lugs CCA627 Same as wiring for the CCA622
81
Sepam series 20 Other phase current input
Sepam series 40
connection schemes
Variant 1: phase current measurements by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)

Description
CCA630/ Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
DE88117
CCA634
The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Sensor type 5 A CT or 1 A CT
Number of CTs I1, I2, I3
Rated current (In) 1 A to 6250 A
2
Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs
Description
CCA630/ Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
DE88118
CCA634
The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the
phase current-based protection functions.
The phase current I2 is only assessed for metering functions, assuming that I0 = 0.
This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Number of CTs I1, I3
Variant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensors

Description
Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the
DE88119
CCA670 connector. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed
and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position.
Parameters
Sensor type LPCT
Rated current (In) 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000,
1600, 2000 or 3150 A
Note: Parameter In must be set 2 twice:
b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool
b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connector
82
Sepam series 20 Other residual current input
Sepam series 40
Variant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currents

Description
Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2
and I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors.
See current input connection diagrams.
Parameters
Residual current Rated residual current Measuring range
Sum of 3 Is In0 = In, CT primary current 0.1 to 40 In0
Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300 core

balance CT (standard connection) 2
Description
Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral
DE88120
systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected.
Parameters
2 A rating CSH In0 = 2 A 0.2 to 40 A
(Sepam series 40)
20 A rating CSH In0 = 20 A 2 to 400 A
Variant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634

Description
Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs.
DE88121
b Terminal 7: 1 A CT
Parameters
1 A CT In0 = In, CT primary current 0.1 to 20 In0
1 A CT sensitive In0 = In/10 (Sepam series 40) 0.1 to 20 In0
DE88122
83
Sepam series 20 Other residual current input
Sepam series 40
Variant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT

Description
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to
DE88343
measure residual current:

b connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH
primary
b connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH
primary.
b for Sepam series 40, the sensitivity can be mulitplied by 10 using the "sensitive"
setting with In0 = In/10.
2 turns
Parameters
Residual current
1 A CT
Rated residual current
In0 = In, CT primary current
Measuring range
0.1 to 20 In0
turns
DE88344
turns
turns
Variant 5: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)
Description
The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of
DE88125
1/n (50 < n < 1500) and the Sepam residual current input.
This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the
installation.
Parameters
ACE990 - range 1 In0 = Ik.n(1) 0.1 to 20 In0
(0.00578 y k y 0.04)
ACE990 - range 2 In0 = Ik.n(1) 0.1 to 20 In0
(0.0578 y k y 0.26316)
(1) n = number of core balance CT turns
k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range
used by Sepam
84
Connection diagrams Voltage inputs
Sepam series 40
  The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the
CCT640 connector (item B ) on Sepam series 20 type B units. The CCT640
connector contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching
of the VTs and Sepam input circuits.
Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs V1, V2, V3
DE88126
Residual voltage Sum of 3Vs
Functions available
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Measurements available
V1, V2, V3
U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, f
All
2
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All
Variant 2: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and residual voltage

Parameters
DE88127
Voltages measured by VTs V1, V2, V3

Residual voltage External VT
Functions available
Voltages measured V1, V2, V3, V0
Values calculated U21, U32, U13, Vd, f
Measurements available All
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All
Variant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages

Parameters
DE88128
Voltages measured by VTs U21, U32

Residual voltage None
Functions available
Voltages measured V1, V2, V3
Values calculated U13, Vd, f
Measurements available U21, U32, U13, Vd, f
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All except 59N, 27S
Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltage

Parameters
DE88129
Voltages measured by VTs U21

Residual voltage External VT
Functions available
Voltages measured U21, V0
Values calculated f
Measurements available U21, V0, f
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All except 47, 27D, 27S
Variant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage

Parameters
DE88130
Voltages measured by VTs U21

Residual voltage None
Functions available
Voltages measured U21
Values calculated f
Measurements available U21, f
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All except 47, 27D, 59N, 27S
85
Sepam series 40
  The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected
directly to the connector marked E .
The 3 impedance matching and isolation transformers are integrated in the
Sepam series 40 base unit.
Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting 3V
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting 3V sum
DE88131
Voltages measured V1, V2, V3

Values calculated U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, Vi, f
Measurements unavailable None
2 Protection functions unavailable

(according to type of Sepam)
None
Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltage

Phase voltage sensor parameter setting U21, U32
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting External VT
DE88132
Voltages measured U21, U32, V0

Values calculated U13, V1, V2, V3, Vd, Vi, f
Measurements unavailable None
Protection functions unavailable None
Variant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages

Phase voltage sensor parameter setting U21, U32
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting None
DE88133
Voltages measured U21, U32

Values calculated U13, Vd, Vi, f
Measurements unavailable V1, V2, V3, V0
Protection functions unavailable 67N/67NC, 59N
86
Sepam series 40
Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltage

Phase voltage sensor parameter setting U21
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting External VT
DE88134
Voltages measured U21, V0

Values calculated f
Measurements unavailable U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, Vd, Vi
Protection functions unavailable 67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40, 27S
Variant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage

2
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting U21
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting None
DE88135
Voltages measured U21

Values calculated f
Measurements unavailable U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vd, Vi
Protection functions unavailable 67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40, 67N/67NC,
(according to type of Sepam) 59N, 27S
87
TOOLS
schneider-electric.com Training
This international site allows you Training allows you to acquire

to access all the Schneider Electric the Schneider Electric expertise
products in just 2 clicks (installation design, work with power
via comprehensive range data- on, etc.) for increased efficiency
3 sheets, with direct links to:

ppcomplete library: technical
and a guarantee of improved
customer service.
documents, catalogs, FAQs, The training catalogue includes
brochures… beginner’s courses in electrical
pp selection guides from distribution, knowledge
the e-catalog. of MV and LV switchgear, operation
ppproduct discovery sites and and maintenance of installations,
their Flash animations. design of LV installations to give
You will also find illustrated but a few examples.
contacts…
88
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
Sepam series 80
Range description 5
Sepam series 60 89
Selection table 90
Functions Sepam series 60 92
Sensor inputs 92
General settings 93
Description 94
Characteristics 99
Protection 100
Description 101
Tripping curves 107
Main characteristics
Setting ranges
109
110 3
Description 114
Characteristics Sepam series 60 121

Base unit 121
Presentation 121
Description 125
Dimensions 129
Connection diagrams Sepam series 60 130

Base unit 130
Connection 131
Phase current inputs 132
Residual current inputs 133
Phase voltage inputs 135
Residual voltage input 135
Main channels 135
Available functions 137
Sepam series 80 139

Order form 275
89
Sepam series 60 Selection table
Substation Transformer Motor Generator Cap.

Protection ANSI code S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) 50N/51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
50G/51G
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Thermal overload for cables 49RMS 1
Thermal overload for machines (1) 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2
Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS 1
Restricted earth fault 64REF 2 2
Directional phase overcurrent (1)

67 2 2 2
Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2
Directional active overpower 32P 2 2 2 2 2

Directional reactive overpower 32Q 1 1 1
Directional active underpower 37P 2 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1
3
Excessive starting time, locked 48/51LR/14 1
rotor
Starts per hour 66 1
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 1 1 1
Overspeed (2 set points) (2) 12 v v v
Underspeed (2 set points) (2) 14 v v v
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V 1 1
Underimpedance 21B 1 1
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Positive sequence undervoltage 27D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Rate of change of frequency 81R 2 2 2 2
Recloser (4 cycles) (2) 79 v v

Thermostat / Buchholz (2) 26/63 v v v v v
Temperature monitoring 38/49T v v v v v v
(16 RTDs) (3)
Synchro-check (4) 25 v v v v v v
Control and monitoring
Circuit breaker / contactor control (2) 94/69 v v v v v v v v
Automatic transfer (AT) (2) v v v v v v
Load shedding / automatic restart (2) v
De-excitation (2) v v
Genset shutdown (2) v v
Logic discrimination (2) 68 v v v v v v v v
Latching / acknowledgement 86 b b b b b b b b
Annunciation 30 b b b b b b b b
Switching of groups of settings b b b b b b b b
Adaptation using logic equations b b b b b b b b
The figures indicate the number of relays available for each protection function.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules.
90
Substation Transformer Motor Generator Cap.

Metering S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60
Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS b b b b b b b b
Residual current Io, sum Io b b b b b b b b
Demand current I1, I2, I3 b b b b b b b b
Peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 b b b b b b b b
Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3 b b b b b b b b
Residual voltage V0 b b b b b b b b
Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction b b b b b b b b
Negative sequence voltage Vi b b b b b b b b
Frequency b b b b b b b b
Active power P, P1, P2, P3 b b b b b b b b
Reactive power Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 b b b b b b b b
Apparent power S, S1, S2, S3 b b b b b b b b
Peak demand power PM, QM b b b b b b b b
Power factor b b b b b b b b
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh) b b b b b b b b
Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (2) v v v v v v v v
(± Wh, ± VARh)
Temperature (16 RTDs) (3) v v v v v
Rotation speed (2) v v v
Tripping context b b b b b b b b
Tripping current Trip I1, Trip I2, Trip I3, Trip Io
Phase fault and earth fault trip counters
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
3
Harmonic distortion (THD) b b b b b b b b
Current and voltage Ithd, Uthd b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 b b b b b b b b
Disturbance recording recorded b b b b b b b b
Motor start report (MSR) b
Motor start trend (MST) b
Data log (DLG) b b b b b b b b
Thermal capacity used b b b b b b b
Remaining operating time before overload tripping b b b b b b b
Waiting time after overload tripping b b b b b b b
Running hours counter / operating time b b b b b b
Starting current and time b
Start inhibit time b
Number of starts before inhibition b
Cable arcing fault detection b b b b b b b b
Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd b b b b b b b b
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 b b b b b b b b
Third harmonic voltage, neutral point or residual b b
Difference in amplitude, frequency and phase of v v v v v v
voltages compared for synchro-check (4)
Switchgear diagnosis ANSI code
CT / VT supervision 60/60FL b b b b b b b b
Trip circuit supervision (2) 74 v v v v v v v v
Cumulative breaking current b b b b b b b b
Number of operations, operating time, charging time, v v v v v v v v
number of racking out operations (2)
Additional modules
8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module (2) v v v v v v
1 low level analog output - MSA141 module v v v v v v v v
Logic inputs/outputs - MES120/MES120G/MES120H v v v v v v v v
(14I/6O) module
Communication interface - ACE949-2, ACE959, v v v v v v v v
ACE937, ACE969TP-2, ACE969FO- 2, ACE850TP
or ACE850FO
91
Functions Sensor inputs
Sepam series 60
Sepam series 60 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors
required for applications:
DE60563
b main analog inputs, available on all types of Sepam series 60:

Sepam M61
v 3 phase current inputs l1, l2, l3
v 1 residual current input l0
v 3 phase voltage inputs V1, V2, V3 or 2 phase voltage and 1 residual voltage input
V0.
The table below lists the analog inputs available according to the type of Sepam
series 60.
lb M S60, S62 T60, T62, M61, G60,

G62, C60
Phase current inputs Main channel l1, l2, l3 l1, l2, l3
Residual current inputs Main channel l0 l0
Unbalance current I0
inputs for capacitor bank
Phase voltage inputs Main channel V1, V2, V3 V1, V2, V3
Sepam M61 sensor inputs. or U21, U32 (1) or U21, U32 (1)
Residual voltage inputs Main channel V0 V0
3 Temperature inputs
(1) See VT connections diagram for Sepam series 60.
T1 to T16
92
Functions General settings
Sepam series 60

General settings Selection Value

In Rated phase current 2 or 3 1 A / 5 A CTs 1 A to 6250 A
(sensor primary current) 3 LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A (1)
Unbalance current sensor rating (capacitor application) CT 1 A / 2 A / 5 A 1 A to 30 A
Ib Base current, according to rated power of equipment 0.2 to 1.3 In
Base current on additional channels Applications with transformer I’b = Ib x Un1/Un2
(not adjustable) Other applications I’b = Ib
In0 Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents See In(I’n) rated phase current
CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT 2 A or 20 A rating
1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A to 6250 A
Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT ratio According to current monitored
1/n must be such that 50 y n y 1500) and use of ACE990
Unp Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated 220 V to 250 kV
primary phase-to-neutral voltage Vnp = Unp/3)
Uns Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 90 to 230 V
2 VTs: U21, U32 90 to 120 V
Uns0 Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero

1 VT: U21
1 VT: V1
90 to 120 V
90 to 230 V
Uns/3 or Uns/3
3
sequence voltage Unp/3
Vntp Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage 220 V to 250 kV
(generator application)
Vnts Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage 57.7 V to 133 V
fn Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Phase rotation direction 1-2-3 or 1-3-2
Integration period (for demand current and peak 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy 0.1 kWh to 5 MWh
Increments reactive energy 0.1 kVARh to 5 MVARh
P Rated transformer power 100 kVA to 999 MVA
Ωn Rated speed (motor, generator) 100 to 3600 rpm
R Number of pulses per rotation (for speed acquisition) 1 to 1800 (Ωn x R/60 y 1500)
Zero speed set point 5 to 20 % of Ωn
93
Functions Metering and diagnosis
Metering
Sepam is a precision metering unit. Peak demand powers
All the metering and diagnosis data used for The greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same
commissioning and required period as the demand current. The peak demand powers may be cleared.
for the operation and maintenance of your equipment
are available locally Energy
or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, b 4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2
etc.). and I3 measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions
Phase current energy pulses from external meters.
RMS current for each phase, taking into account
harmonics up to number 13. Temperature
Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase Accurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100
current: or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET148-2 module.
Rotation speed
Calculated by the counting of pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor at each
Residual current passage of a cam driven by the rotation of the motor or generator shaft.
Two residual current values are available depending on Acquisition of pulses on a logic input.
the type of Sepam and sensors connected to it:
b residual current I0S, calculated by the vector sum of
Phasor diagram
3 the 3 phase currents

b measured residual current I0.
A phasor diagram is displayed by SFT2841 software and the mimic-based UMI to
check cabling and assist in the setting and commissioning of directional protection
functions.
Different types of sensors may be used to measure
residual current: According to the connected sensors, all current and voltage information can be
b CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300 specific core balance CT selected for display in vector form.
b conventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer
b any core balance CT with an ACE990 interface. Data log (DLG)
This function is used to record and back up a set of measurements (1 to 15) available
Demand current and peak demand in the Sepam relay. The number of backed-up files and the number of measurements
currents per file depend on the type of cartridge installed (extended cartrige available for
Demand current and peak demand currents are Sepam 80 only). The recording mode and selection of measurements can be
calculated according to the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and configured by the user via the SFT2841 software.
I3:
All trip of the function results from an external event (TC for example). The stop
b demand current is calculated over an adjustable
condition and file management differ according to which of the following 2 modes is
period of 5 to 60 minutes
used:
b peak demand current is the greatest demand current
a) Limited: the DLG function stops automatically when the end of recording time is
and indicates the current drawn by peak loads.
reached or on receipt of an external event (TC for example).
b) Circular: the file content is managed in a FIFO memory: when the file is full, the
Voltage and frequency write operation continues and starts again at the start of the file. Stopping the write
The following measurements are available according to operation only results from an external event (TC for example). In the absence of
the voltage sensors connected: the stop command, recording is continuous.
b phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 Using the DLG function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's active
b phase-to-phase voltages U21, U32, U13 protection functions.
b residual voltage V0 or neutral point voltage Vnt
b positive sequence voltage Vd and negative Characteristics
sequence voltage Vi
b frequency measured on the main voltage channels. Configuration parameters
Content of a COMTRADE file b Configuration file (*.CFG) :
Power date, variable characteristics, transformation
Powers are calculated according to the phase currents ratio of the selected variable values
I1, I2 and I3: b Samples file(*.DAT):
recorded variables
b active power
b reactive power Total file duration 1 s to 30 days
b apparent power Sampling period 1 s to 24 hours
b power factor (cos φ).
Variables available for recording See the table of available data p.99/100.
According to the sensors used, power calculations may
be based on the 2 or 3 wattmeter method. Number of files 1 à 20
The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is Number of variables per file 1 à 15
no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral
is distributed. Source of starting and stopping b SFT 2841 software
b Logic equation or Logipam
The 3 wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation b TC
of 3-phase and phase by phase powers in all cases, b Logic or GOOSE input
regardless of whether or not the neutral is distributed.
File format COMTRADE 9
Nota : These parameters are configured with the SFT2841 software.
94

Sepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on
network disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes.
Tripping context
Storage of tripping currents and I0, Ii, U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vi, Vd, F, P,
Q and Vnt values when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored.
Tripping current
Storage of the 3 phase currents and earth fault current at the time of the last Sepam
trip order, to indicate fault current.
The values are stored in the tripping contexts.
Number of trips
2 trip counters:
b number of phase fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50/51,
50V/51V and 67 protection functions
b number of earth fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50N/51 and
67N/67NC protection functions.

Negative sequence component of phase currents I1, I2 and I3, indicating the degree
of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment. 3
Total harmonic distortion
Two THD values calculated to assess network power quality, taking into account
harmonics up to number 13:
b current THD, calculated according to I1
b voltage THD, calculated according to V1 or U21.
Phase displacement
b phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages V1,
V2, V3 respectively
b phase displacement φ0 between residual current and residual voltage.
Disturbance recording
b all sampled values of measured currents and voltages
b status of all logic inputs and outputs logic data: pick-up, …
Recording characteristics
Number of recordings in COMTRADE format Adjustable from 1 to 19
Total duration of a recording Adjustable from 1 to 11 s
Number of samples per period 12 or 36
Duration of recording prior to occurrence of the event Adjustable from 0 to 99 periods
Maximum recording capability
Network frequency 12 samples 36 samples
per period per period
50 Hz 22 s 7s
60 Hz 18 s 6s
Voltage comparison for synchro-check

For the synchro-check function, the MCS025 module continuously measures the
amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages to be checked.
Out-of-sync context
Storage of amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages
measured by the MCS025 module when a closing order is inhibited by the synchro-
check function.
95
Machine diagnosis assistance

b data on the operation of their machines
b predictive data to optimize process management
b useful data to facilitate protection function setting and implementation.
b recording data during motor start (MSR) and create trend graphics (MST).
Thermal capacity used

Equivalent temperature buildup in the machine, calculated by the thermal overload
protection function.
Remaining operating time before overload tripping

Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function.
The time is used by facility managers to optimize process management in real time
by deciding to:
b interrupt according to procedures
b continue operation with inhibition of thermal protection on overloaded machine.
Waiting time after overload tripping

3 Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload protection function.
Waiting time to avoid further tripping of thermal overload protection by premature
re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.
Visualisation of 3 graphics MSR
via an integrated synoptic HMI. Running hours counter / operating time
Equipment is considered to be running whenever a phase current is over 0.1 Ib.
1 Cumulative operating time is given in hours.
DE81164
MSR 2001/01/01 00:59:00.364 Motor starting / overload current and time

447A 11.7kV A motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when a phase current is over
1.2 Ib. For each start / overload, Sepam stores:
2
Id fund <2s> Vd fund 3 The values are stored until the following start / overload.
4 0.00x1 0.00x1 Number of starts before inhibition/start inhibit time
Indicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts per hour protection function
and, if the number is zero, the waiting time before starting is allowed again.
Rotor temp <2s> C Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd

0.00rpm Value calculated to facilitate the implementation of the underimpedance field loss
447A
protection (ANSI 40).
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13

Values calculated to facilitate the implementation of the backup underimpedance
calc. speed <2s> Id fund
protection function (ANSI 21B).
5
Capacitance
Remote Measurement, for each phase, of the total capacitance of the connected capacitor
Local bank. This measurement is used to monitor the condition of the capacitors.
Test
Time tagging of the selected file and file

Motor Start Report (MSR)
1
selection zone This function, available only in motor applications, can stock during a configured
duration multiple files of 144 data samples selected.
2 Name of the 1st variable associated
with the Y-axis Read
Selection zone for the variable to be The files can be viewed:
3
associated with the Y-axis a) after downloading, on a PC screen, using the WaveWin software
b) on the Sepam display using the Diagnosis menu.
4 Maximum value observed for the recorded
variable
5 Duration of read time
96
Caractéristiques
Paramètres de configuration
Content of a COMTRADE file b Fichier de configuration (*.CFG): date, variable
characteristics, transformation ratio of the selected variable
values
b Samples file (*.DAT) : recorded variables
Total file duration 2 s to 144 s
Sampling frequency Depends on the configured duration (144 s maximum).
Example: For a duration of 144 s the frequency is 1 Hz,
for a duration of 2 s the frequency is 72 Hz.
Variables available for recording See the table of available data . p. 99 /100
Number of files b 1 to 5 with standard cartridge
b 1 to 20 with extended cartridge
Number of variables per file b 1 to 5 with standard cartridge
b 1 to 10 with extended cartridge
Source of starting and stopping b SFT 2841 software
b Logic equation or Logipam
b TC
b Logic or GOOSE input
File format COMTRADE 97
3
Motor Start Trend (MST)

Visualisation of 3 graphics MST This function, only available for motor applications, is related to the Motor start
via an integrated synoptic HMI. trend function. It is used to calculate and display in the form of curves the minimum,
demand and maximum values for each value.
DE81165EN
These recalculated values which are stored in a file of 144 samples covering a
MST 2001/01/01 00:00:10.036 1 30-day period. When the current 30-day period has ended, it is automatically
archived in COMTRADE format and will no longer be able to be viewed on the
2.56kA max Sepam display
moyenne
The number of files available varies between 12 and 18 depending on the type of
min memory cartridge (standard or extended) installed on Sepam
The trends are only recalculated at the end of each Motor start report.
2 Id fund <2s>
11.7kV
MSR
DM101139EN
Vd fund <2s> 4
3
0.00x1 MSR 1 10 ......
MSR 2 20 ......
Rotor temp <2s> MSR 3 90 ......
Remote
Local
Test Maximum 90 ......
Demand 50 ...... MST
1 Time tagging of the current file Minimum 10 ......
2 Selection of the variable to be associated
with the Y-axis 1 2 3 144 Samples
3 Name of the analyzed variable
Calculating an MST using the available MSRs.
4 Duration of read time for each file
97

Sepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in Switchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on:
the base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the b mechanical condition of breaking device
b put Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any
unwanted operation ANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervision
b alert the facility manager of the need for maintenance Used to monitor the entire metering chain:
operations. b CT and VT sensors
b connection
Internal failure b Sepam analog inputs.
Two categories of internal failures are monitored: Monitoring includes:
b major failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe b consistency checking of currents and voltages measured
position).
b acquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown
The protection functions are inhibited, the output relays
contacts.
are forced to drop out and the “Watchdog” output
In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned protection
indicates Sepam shutdown
functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping.
b minor failures: downgraded Sepam operation.
Sepam’s main functions are operational and equipment ANSI 74 - Trip/closing circuit supervision
3
protection is ensured. To detect trip circuit and closing circuit failures, Sepam monitors:
Battery monitoring b shunt trip coil connection
Monitoring of battery voltage to guarantee data is b closing coil connection
saved in the event of an outage. b matching of breaking device open/closed position contacts
A battery fault generates an alarm. b execution of breaking device open and close orders.
The trip and closing circuits are only supervised when connected as shown below.
Detection of plugged connectors
The system checks that the current or voltage sensors
are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure.
module is a major failure.
Connection for shunt trip coil Connection for undervoltage Connection for closing circuit
monitoring. trip coil monitoring. supervision
Cumulative breaking current monitoring

An alarm can be generated when the total cumulative breaking current exceeds a set
point.
Number of rackouts
98
Sepam series 60 Characteristics
Available data
Measurement Accuracy MSR/MST
Functions (1) MSA141 Saving
range
Designation Units
Metering
Phase current 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % b I1, I2, I3 A
Residual current Measured 0,005 to 20 In ±1 % b I0m A
Calculated 0,005 to 40 In ±1 % b I0c A
Demand current 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % I1moy, I2moy, I3moy A
Peak demand current 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % v I1max, I2max, I3max A
Voltage metering
Phase-to-phase voltage 0,06 to 1,2 Unp ±0,5 % b U21, U32, U31 V
Phase-to-neutral voltage 0,06 to 1,2 Vnp ±0,5 % b V1, V2, V3 V
Residual voltage 0,04 to 3 Vnp ±1 % V0 V
Neutral point voltage 0,04 to 3 Vntp ±1 % Vnt V
Positive sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vd V
Negative sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vi V
Frequency Main channels (f) 25 to 65 Hz ±0,02 Hz b F Hz
Power metering
Active power (total or per phase)
Active power per phase
0,015 Sn to 999 MW ±1 % b P
P1, P2, P3
MW
MW
3
Peak demand active power 0,015 Sn to 999 MW ±1 % v Pmax MW
Reactive power (total or per phase) 0,015 Sn to 999 Mvar ±1 % b Q Mvar
Reactive power per phase Q1, Q2, Q3 Mvar
Peak demand reactive power 0,015 Sn to 999 Mvar ±1 % v Qmax Mvar
Apparent power (total or per phase) 0,015 Sn to 999 MVA ±1 % b S MVA
Apparent power per phase S1, S2, S3 MVA
Peak demand apparent power Smax MVA
Power factor (cos φ) -1 to +1 (CAP/IND) ±0,01 b cosPhi MVA
Apparent power Measured (+ and -) Eam+, Eam- MW.h
Calculated (+ and -) 0 to 2,1.108 MW.h ±1 % ±1 digit vv Eac+, Eac- MW.h
Reactive power Measured (+ and -) Erm+, Erm- Mvar.h
Calculated (+ and -) 0 to 2,1.108 Mvar.h ±1 % ±1 digit vv Erc+, Erc- Mvar.h
Other metering
±1 °C
-30 to +200 °C
de +20 to +140 °C
Temperature or b T1 to T16 °C / °F
±1,8 °F
-22 to +392 °F
de +68 to +284 °F
Rotation speed 0 to 7200 tr/mn ±1 tr/mn Rot104 tr / mn
Tripping context v
Tripping current 0,02 to 40 In ±5 % v
Number of trips 0 to 65535 - vv
Negative sequence / unbalance 1 to 500 % Ib ±2 % li / lb % lb or % l'b
Total harmonic distortion, current 0 to 100 % ±1 % Ithd %
Total harmonic distortion, voltage 0 to 100 % ±1 % Uthd %
Phase displacement φ 0 (between V0 & I0) 0 to 359° ±2° φ0 °
Phase displacement φ 1, φ2, φ 3
0 to 359° ±2° φ 1, φ 2, φ 3 °
(between V & I)
Thermal capacity used Ech %
Running hours counter CH hours
Disturbance recording v
Amplitude difference 0 to 1,2 Usync1 ±1 %
Frequency difference 0 to 10 Hz ±0,5 Hz
Phase difference 0 to 359° ±2°
Out-of-sync contex v
b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup
v saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage, even without battery
v saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at In or Unp, cos φ > 0.8..
99
Available data
Measurement Accuracy
Functions (1) MSA141 Saving MSR/MST
range
Description Units
Phase-to-phase voltages U21, U22, U13 0,06 to 1,2 Unp ±0,5 % b U21 , U22 , U13 V
I1, I2, I3 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % b I1 , I2 , I3 A
±1 °C
-30 to +200 °C
de +20 to +140 °C
Temperature or T1 à T16 °C / °F
±1,8 °F
-22 to +392 °F
de +68 to +284 °F
Rotor speed of rotation caculated via
Rot49 tr / mn
49RMS motor
Rotor speed of rotation mesured via
0 to 7200 tr/mn ±1 tr/mn Rot104 tr / mn
I104 input
Motor thermal capacity used (2)
±1 % b vv M pu
0 to 800 % (100 % for I phase = Ib)
Rotor thermal capacity used (2)
W pu
Rotor resistance (2) Rr+
3
Stator thermal capacity used (2) E pu
Stator resistance (3) Rs
Positive-sequence current Id A
Negative-sequence current Ii A
Positive-sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vd V
Negative-sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vi V
Residual current Measured 0,005 to 20 In ±1 % I0 A
Calculated 0,005 to 40 In ±1 % I0_S A
Measured residual voltage V0 V
Motor torque (2) C pu
Slip (calculated via 49RMS motor) g pu
Frequency (4) F Hz
Remaining operating time before overload
0 à 999 mn ±1 mn
tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping 0 à 999 mn ±1 mn
Running hours counter / operating time 0 à 65535 heures ±1 % ou ±0,5 h vv
Starting current 1,2 Ib à 40 In ±5 % v
Starting time 0 à 300 s ±300 ms v
Number of starts before inhibition 0 à 60 -
Start inhibit time 0 à 360 mn ±1 mn
Phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3
0 à 359° ±2°
between I)
Apparent impedance Zd, Z21, Z32, Z13 0 à 200 kΩ ±5 %
Capacitance 0 à 30 F ±5 %
Cumulative breaking current 0 à 65535 kA² ±10 % vv
Number of operations 0 à 4.109 - vv
Operating time 20 à 100 ms ±1 ms vv
Charging time 1 à 20 ms ±0,5 s vv
Number of rackouts 0 à 65535 - vv
v saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage.
The value used is that provided by the 49RMS motor thermal overload protection if this has been activated. The value is 0 if the 49RMS generic thermal
(2)
overload protection has been activated.
(3) The value used is that for the active 49RMS protection: motor thermal overload or generic thermal overload.
(4) Only available for the main voltage channels.
100
Functions Protection
Current protection functions

ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload
Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection. Protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on
2 modes: b machines (transformers, motors or generators)
b overcurrent protection sensitive to the highest phase b cables
current measured b capacitors
b machine differential protection sensitive to the The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a mathematical model which
highest differential phase currents obtained in self- takes into account:
balancing schemes. b current RMS values
Characteristics b ambient temperature
b 2 groups of settings b negative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise.
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to calculate predictive data for
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized process control assistance.
IDMT curves) or customized curve The protection may be inhibited by a logic input when required by process control
b with or without timer hold conditions.
b tripping confirmed or unconfirmed, according to Thermal overload for machines - Characteristics
parameter setting: b 2 groups of settings
v unconfirmed tripping: standard b 1 adjustable alarm set point
v tripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage b 1 adjustable tripping set point
3
protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant b adjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics
2-phase short-circuits to fit manufacturer’s thermal withstand curves
v tripping confirmed by undervoltage protection b equipment heating and cooling time constants.
(ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for phase-to-phase The cooling time constant may be calculated automatically based on measurement
short-circuits in networks with low short-circuit power. of the equipment temperature by a sensor.
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault Thermal overload for cables - Characteristics
Earth fault protection based on measured or calculated b 1 group of settings
residual current values: b cable current carrying capacity, which determines alarm and trip set points
b ANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or b cable heating and cooling time constants.
measured by 3 phase current sensors Thermal overload for capacitors - Characteristics
b ANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by b 1 group of settings
a specific sensor. b alarm current, which determines the alarm set point
Characteristics b overload current, which determines the tripping set point
b 2 groups of settings b hot tripping time and current setting, which determine a point on the tripping curve.
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 17 standardized
IDMT curves) or customized curve
b with or without timer hold
b second harmonic restraint to ensure stability during
transformer energizing, activated by parameter setting.

If a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping order, as
detected by the non-extinction of the fault current, this
backup protection sends a tripping order to the
upstream or adjacent breakers.

Protection against phase unbalance, detected by the
measurement of negative sequence current.
b sensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the
ends of long lines
b protection of equipment against temperature build-
up, caused by an unbalanced power supply, phase
inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current
unbalance.
Characteristi cs
b 1 definite time (DT) curve
b 9 IDMT curves: 4 IEC curves and 3 IEEE curves, 1
ANSI curve in RI² and 1 specific Schneider curve
101
Recloser
ANSI 79
Automation device used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or semi-
permanent faults on overhead lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the
breaking device after the time delay required to restore the insulation has elapsed.
Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different operating modes by parameter
setting.
Characteristics
b 1 to 4 reclosing cycles, each cycle has an adjustable dead time
b adjustable, independent reclaim time and safety time until recloser ready time
delays
b cycle activation linked to instantaneous or time-delayed short-circuit protection
function (ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting
b inhibition/locking out of recloser by logic input.
Synchro-check
ANSI 25
3
This function checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit breaker and
allows closing when the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase are within
authorized limits.
Characteristics
b adjustable and independent set points for differences in voltage, frequency and
phase
b adjustable lead time to take into account the circuit-breaker closing time
b 5 possible operating modes to take no-voltage conditions into account.
102

current direction.
Characteristics
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized
curve

DE88140
3
b type 1, projection
b type 2, according to the magnitude of the residual current phasor.
b no timer hold
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection compensated neutral systems.

DE88141
It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection, and picks up
if the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated.
curve
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection

DE52064

residual current.
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protection. b choice of tripping direction
b no timer hold
103
Directional power protection Machine protection functions

functions
ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower Protection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection
Two-way protection based on calculated active power, of motor no-load operation.
for the following applications: It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains stable during breaker
b active overpower protection to detect overloads and tripping and may be inhibited by a logic input.
allow load shedding
b reverse active power protection: ANSI 48/51LR - Locked rotor / excessive starting time
v against generators running like motors when the Protection of motors against overheating caused by:
generators consume active power b excessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient
v against motors running like generators when the supply voltage.
motors supply active power. The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may
be considered as starting.
ANSI 32Q - Directional reactive b locked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher):
overpower v in normal operation, after a normal start
Two-way protection based on calculated reactive v directly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with
power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by
b reactive overpower protection for motors which the underspeed function.
consume more reactive power with field loss
3 b reverse reactive overpower protection for generators

which consume reactive power with field loss.
Protection against motor overheating caused by:
ANSI 37P - Directional active underpower number of starts is reached, after counting of:
Two-way protection based on calculated active power v starts per hour (or adjustable period)
Checking of active power flows: v consecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut
b to adapt the number of parallel sources to fit the down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start)
network load power demand b starts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only
b to create an isolated system in an installation with its allowed after an adjustable waiting time.
own generating unit.
ANSI 40 - Field loss (underimpedance)
Protection of synchronous machines against field loss, based on the calculation of
positive sequence impedance on the machine terminals or transformer terminals in
the case of transformer-machine units.
Characteristics
b 2 circular characteristics defined by reactances Xa, Xb and Xc
DE88142
2 circular tripping characteristics of ANSI 40 protection.
b tripping when the machine’s positive sequence impedance enters one of the
circular characteristics.
b definite (DT) time delay for each circular characteristic
b setting assistance function included in SFT2841 software to calculate the values
of Xa, Xb and Xc according to the electrical characteristics of the machine (and
transformer, when applicable).
104
ANSI 12 - Overspeed ANSI 21B - Underimpedance

Detection of machine overspeed, based on the speed Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators, based on the calculation of
calculated by pulse-counting, to detect synchronous apparent phase-to-phase impedance.
generator racing due to loss of synchronism, or for
process monitoring, for example. Z 21 = ----U21
------------
I2 – I1
ANSI 14 - Underspeed apparent impedance between phases 1 and 2.

Machine speed monitoring based on the speed b circular characteristic centered at origin defined by adjustable set point Zs
calculated by pulse-counting:
DE88143
b detection of machine underspeed after starting, for
process monitoring, for example
b zero speed data for detection of locked rotor upon
starting.
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained

overcurrent
Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators.
The current tripping set point is voltage-adjusted in
order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator
which cause voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit
current.
Characteristics
Circular tripping characteristic of ANSI 21B protection.
3
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized
IDMT curves) or customized curve b time-delayed definite time (DT) tripping when one of the three apparent
b with or without timer hold. impedances enters the circular tripping characteristic.
ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/Buchholz

Protection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic
inputs linked to devices integrated in the transformer.

Protection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the
temperature inside equipment fitted with sensors:
b motor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings.
Characteristics
b 16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs
105

ANSI 27D - Positive sequence ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
undervoltage Detection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
Protection of motors against faulty operation due to power supply quality.
insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and
detection of reverse rotation direction. ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage power supply quality.
Protection used to check that remanent voltage The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding.
sustained by rotating machines has been cleared Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and
before allowing the busbar supplying the machines to presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of
be re-energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical the frequency, which is activated by parameter setting.
transients.
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage Protection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding
Protection of motors against voltage sags or detection control. Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to
of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic transient voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift
load shedding or source transfer. protection function.
Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral Disconnection
voltage, each voltage being monitored separately. In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the "rate of
3 Characteristics
change of frequency" protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in
view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to:
b IDMT curve. b protect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization
b avoid supplying loads outside the installation.
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage Load shedding
Detection of abnormally high network voltage or The "rate of change of frequency" protection function is used for load shedding in
checking for sufficient voltage to enable source combination with the underfrequency protection to:
transfer. b either accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload
Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral b or inhibit shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that
voltage, each voltage being monitored separately. should not be solved by shedding.
voltage
b ANSI 59N: in isolated neutral systems
b ANSI 59N/64G1: in stator windings of generators
with earthed neutral. Protects the 85 % to 90 % of
the winding, terminal end, not protected by the ANSI
27TN/64G2 function, third harmonic undervoltage.
Characteristics
b IDMT curve.

phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault, 1
DM101140EN
detected by the measurement of negative sequence 0.9

voltage.
0.8
FRT (fault ride through) 0.7
Custom "Grid code" curve 0.6
U / Un
Production installations must stay connected to the 0.5

grid whenever the voltage is higher than that defined 0.4
by the "Grid code" curve. The custom curve is defined 0.3
point by point, with the disconnection time Tc in
0.2
seconds on the X-axis and the voltage U/Un in pu on
the Y-axis. 0.1
0
0 0.5 1 1.5
Tc in sec.
Custom "Grid code" curve
106
Sepam series 60 Tripping curves
Customized tripping curve

PE88107
Defined point by point using the SFT2841 setting and operating software tool, this
curve may be used to solve all special cases involving protection coordination or
revamping.
IDMT tripping curves

Current IDM T tripping curves
Customized tripping curve set using SFT2841 software.

IEC curves
Equation Curve type Coefficient values
k α β
3
Standard inverse / A 0.14 0.02 2.97
k
t d( I) = ------------ ×
T Very inverse / B 13.5 1 1.50
α--------- ---
 --I---  – 1 β Long time inverse / B 120 1 13.33
 Is 
Extremely inverse / C 80 2 0.808
Ultra inverse 315.2 2.5 1
RI curve
Equation: 1 T
td ( I ) = -------------------------------------------------------- × -------------------
I –1 3 ,1706
0 ,339 – 0,236 -----  
 Is 
IEEE curves
A B p β
Moderately inverse 0.010 0.023 0.02 0.241
 
 A----------- + B  T Very inverse 3.922 0.098 2 0.138
td ( I ) = -------------  × ---
 I  p  β Extremely inverse 5.64 0.0243 2 0.081
 -Is
---
 – 1 
IAC curves
A B C D E β
Inverse 0.208 0.863 0.800 -0.418 0.195 0.297
 
 B D E  T Very inverse 0.090 0.795 0.100 -1.288 7.958 0.165
td ( I ) = A + -------------------- + ----------------------2- + --------------------3--- x -----
 I
---- – C  ----- – C I ----- – C   β
I Extremely inverse 0.004 0.638 0.620 1.787 0.246 0.092
 Is  Is  Is 
107
Equation for EPATRB, EPATRC

DE88145
EPATRB
For 0,6 A y I0 y 6,4 A
td ( I0 ) = 85
------,--0-,386 T----
--------- x ----
I0 975 0, 8
For 6,4 A y Io y 200,0 A

140
td ( I0 ) = -- ,---213
---------
T
--------- x --------
I0 0, 975 0, 8
For I0 > 200,0 A

td (I0) = T
EPATR-C Standard curve (logarithmic scale).

EPATRC
For 0,6 A y I0 y 200,0 A
DE88146
td ( I0 ) = 72 × I0 – 2 /3 x ---T
--------
2 ,10
For I0 > 200,0 A
3 td (I0) = T
EPATR-B Standard curve (logarithmic scale).
Voltage IDMT tripping curves

Equation for ANSI 27 - undervoltage Equation for ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
td ( I ) = ------------T----------- td ( I ) = ------------T-----------
V  --V
-----  1
1 – -------   Vs  –
Vs 
Voltage/frequency ratio IDMT tripping curves

Equation for ANSI 27 - undervoltage Curve type P
With G = V/f or U/f A 0.5
B 1
td ( G ) = -------------1-------------- x T
 ---G p C 2
----- 1 
 Gs – 
108
Sepam series 60 Main characteristics
Setting of IDMT tripping curves,

Time delay T or TMS factor
The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI
b TMS factor, factor shown as T/b in the equations on the left.
Timer hold
DE88340

configuration.
Example of use: normal / backup mode network 3
b group A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the
utility
backup generator.
modes.
Examples of use:
ONAF)
Measurement origin
The measurement origin needs to be indicated for each unit of the protection
DE60607
functions that may use measurements of different origins.

The setting links a measurement to a protection unit and allows the protection units
to be distributed optimally among the measurements available according to the
sensors connected to the analog inputs.
Example: distribution of ANSI 50N/51N function units for transformer earth fault
protection:
b 2 units linked to measured I0 for transformer primary protection
b 2 units linked to I0S for protection upstream of the transformer.
Summary table
Measurement origin: example. Characteristics Protection functions
2 groups of settings A et B 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC
67N/67NC type 2, 46
67N/67NC type 2, 46
67N/67NC type 2
EPATR curves 50N/51N
Voltage IDMT curves 27, 59N
Customized curve 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2
Timer hold 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
109
Sepam series 60 Setting ranges

ANSI 12 - Overspeed
100 to 160 % of Wn 1 to 300 s
ANSI 14 - Underspeed
10 to 100 % of Wn 1 to 300 s
ANSI 21B - Underimpedance
Impedance Zs 0.05 to 2.00 Vn/Ib 0.2 to 300 s
ANSI 25 - Synchro-check
Measured voltages Phase-to-phase Phase-to-neutral
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage
Unp sync1 (Vnp sync1 = Unp sync1/3) 220 V to 250 kV 220 V to 250 kV
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage
Uns sync1 90 V to 120 V 90 V to 230 V
Synchro-check setpoints
dUs set point 3 % to 30 % of Unp sync1 3 % to 30 % of Vnp sync1
dfs set point 0.05 to 0.5 Hz 0,05 to 0,5 Hz
dPhi set point 5 to 80° 5 to 80°
3
Us high set point 70 % to 110 % Unp sync1 70 % to 110 % Vnp sync1
Us low set point 10 % to 70 % Unp sync1 10 % to 70 % Vnp sync1
Other settings
Lead time 0 to 0.5 s 0 to 0.5 s
Operating modes: no-voltage conditions Dead1 AND Live2 Dead1 AND Live2
for which coupling is allowed Live1 AND Dead2 Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2
Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2
Dead1 AND Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead2
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage (L-L) or (L-N)
Tripping curve Definite time
IDMT
Set point 5 to 100 % of Unp 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltage
Set point and time delay 15 to 60 % of Unp 0.05 to 300 s
1 to 120 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpower
5 to 120 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
0.05 to 1 Ib 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 37P - Directional active underpower
5 to 100 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
Alarm set point TS1 0 °C to 180 °C or 32 °F to 356 °F
Trip set point TS2 0 °C to 180 °C or 32 °F to 356 °F
Common point: Xa 0.02 Vn/Ib to 0.2 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ
Circle 1: Xb 0.2 Vn/Ib to 1.4 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ 0.05 to 300 s
Circle 2: Xc 0.6 Vn/Ib to 3 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ 0.1 s to 300 s
Schneider Electric
EC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
RI² (setting constant from 1 to 100)
Is set point 0.1 to 5 Ib Definite time 0.1 to 300 s
0.1 to 0.5 Ib (Schneider Electric) IDMT 0.1 to 1s
0.1 to 1 Ib (IEC, IEEE)
0.03 to 0.2 Ib (RI²)
(1) Sn = 3.In.Unp.
110

ANSI 48/51LR -Locked rotor / excessive starting time
Is set point 0.5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time 0.5 to 300 s
LT and LTS time delays 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for cables
Admissible current 1 to 1.73 Ib
Time constant T1 1 to 600 mn
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for capacitors
Alarm current 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib
Trip current 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib
Positioning of the hot tripping curve Current setting 1.02 x trip current to 2 Ib
Time setting 1 to 2000 minutes
(variable range depending on the trip current and current setting)
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for machines Mode 1 Mode 2
Accounting for negative sequence component 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9
Time constant Heating T1: 1 to 600 mn T1: 1 to 600 mn
Cooling T2: 5 to 600 mn T2: 5 to 600 mn
3
Alarm and tripping set points (Es1 and Es2) 0 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity
Initial thermal capacity used (Es0) 0 to 100 %
Switching of thermal settings condition by logic input
by Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib
Maximum equipement temperature 60 to 200 °C (140 °C to 392 °F)
ANSI 49RMS - Motor thermal overload
Measurement origin I1, I2, I3
Choice of thermal model 2 time constants/generic (see settings associated with generic thermal overload)
Current set point - change of thermal 1 to 10 pu of Ib (± 0,1 pu of Ib)
settings
Characteristic times Operating time accuracy ± 2 % or ±1 s
Stator thermal settings
Time constants Motor thermal capacity used ( long) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Stator thermal capacity used ( short) 1 to 60 mn ± 0,1 mn
Cooling ( cool) 5 to 600 mn ± 1 mn

Tripping current set point (K) 50 to 173 % of Ib (± 1 % of Ib)
Alarm current set point 50 to 173 % of Ib (± 1 % of Ib)
Thermal exchange coefficient between 0 to 1 (± 0,01)
the stator and the motor ( )
Current characterizing hot state 0,5 to 1 pu of Ib (± 0,1 pu of lb)
Accounting for ambient temperature yes / no
Maximum equipment temperature (Tmax) 70 to 250 °C (± 1 °C) or 158 to 482 °F (± 1 °F)
Rotor thermal settings
Locked rotor amperes (IL) 1 to 10 pu of Ib (± 0,01 pu of lb)
Locked rotor torque (LRT) 0,2 to 2 pu of nominal torque (+/- 0.01 pu of nominal torque)
Locked rotor cold limit time (Tc) 1 to 300 s (± 0.1 s)
Locked rotor hot limit time (Th) 1 to 300 s (± 0.1 s)
ANSI 49RMS - Transformer thermal overload
Choice of thermal model Dry-type transformer
Immersed transformer
Generic
Type of dry-type transformer Natural ventilation (AN) / Forced ventilation (AF)
Type of oil-filled transformere Distribution ONAN / Power ONAN / ONAF / OF / OD
Alarm set point ( alarme) Immersed transformer: 98 to 160 °C (± 1 °C) or 208 to 320 °F (± 1 °F)
Dry-type transformer: 95 to 245 °C (± 1 °C) or 203 to 473 °F (± 1 °F)
Tripping set point ( trip) Immersed transformer: 98 to 160 °C (± 1 °C) or 208 to 320 °F (± 1 °F)
Time constant for dry-type transfo ( ) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Time constant for oil-filled transfo winding ( wdg) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
oil ( oil) 5 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
111

RI DT
IA : I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Customized DT
Is set point 0.05 to 24 In Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
Timer hold Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s
Confirmation None
3
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth faultt
RI DT
IEC : SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE : MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC : I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
EPATR-B, EPATR-C DT 0.5 to 1 s
Customized DT 0.1 to 3s
0.5 to 2.4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
ANSI 50V/51V or 50G/51G - Voltage-restrained overcurrent
RI DT
Customized DT
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage (L-L) or (L-N)
Set point and time delay 50 to 150 % of Unp or Vnp 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT
Set point 2 to 80 % of Unp Definite time 0.05 to 300 s
2 to 10 % of Unp IDMT 0.1 to 100 s
ANSI 64REF - Restricted earth fault differential
Is0 set point 0.05 to 0.8 In (In u 20 A)
0.1 to 0.8 In (In < 20 A)
Measurement origin Channels (I, I0)
Total number of starts 1 to 60 Period 1 to 6 h
Number of consecutive starts 1 to 60 T time delay stop/start 0 to 90 mn
112
Functions Settings Time

Tripping time delay Timer hold delay
RI DT
Customized DT
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, projection (type 1)
Is0 set point 0.01 to 15 In0 (mini. 0,1 A) Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
Memory time T0mem time 0; 0.05 s to 300 s
Measurment origin
V0mem validity set point
I0 input or sum of phase currents I0S
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude (type 2)
0; 2 to 80 % of Unp
3
RI DT
Customized DT
Is0 set point 0.1 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A) Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.01 to 1 In0 (min. 0.1 A) IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Measurment origin I0 input
ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude directionalized on a tripping sector
Tripping sector start angle 0° to 359°
Tripping sector end angle 0° to 359°
Is0 set point CSH core balance CT (2 A rating) 0.1 A to 30 A Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
1 A CT 0.005 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT + ACE990 (range 1) 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Time between 2 power swings 1 to 300 s
Measurment origin I0 input
Set point and time delay 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz 0.1 to 300 s
Setting range Main channels (U)
Setting range Main channels (U)
0.1 to 10 Hz/s 0.15 to 300 s
113
Functions Control and monitoring
network operation:
functions
v creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
v creation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
LEDs and annunciation messages.
Operating principle
3 phases:
output module
3 v local control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI

v activation of outputs to control a device
- by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link
- by real-time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram.

PE60303
The 4 outputs included in the Sepam series 60 base unit may be extended by adding
1 or 2 MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6 output relays.
After the number of MES120 modules required for the needs of an application is set,
the logic inputs are assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which
covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs
within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for
undervoltage type operation.
Maximum Sepam series 60 configuration with 2 MES120 Logic inputs and outputs GOOSE
modules: 28 inputs and 16 outputs.
GOOSE logic inputs are used with the IEC61850 communication protocol.
The GOOSE inputs are divided between the 2 GSE virtual modules with 16 logic
inputs.
114
Sepam series 60 Description of predefined functions

Control of breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping
coils:
b contactors with latched orders.
The function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions, based
on:
b specific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser, synchro-check).
conditions.
Automatic transfer (AT)

This function transfers busbar supply from one source to another. It concerns
substations with two incomers, with or without coupling.
The function carries out:

b automatic transfer with a break if there is a loss of voltage or a fault
3
b manual transfer and return to normal operation without a break, with or without
synchro-check
DE?????
b control of the coupling circuit breaker (optional)

b selection of the normal operating mode
b the necessary logic to ensure that at the end of the sequence, only 1 circuit breaker
out of 2 or 2 out of 3 are closed.
The function is distributed between the two Sepam units protecting the two
incomers. The synchro-check function (ANSI 25) is carried out by the optional
MCS025 module, in conjunction with one of the two Sepam units.
Load shedding - Automatic restart

Automatic load regulation on electrical networks by load shedding followed by
automatic restarting of motors connected to the network
Automatic transfer with synchro-check controlled by
Sepam series 60. Load shedding
The breaking device opens to stop motors in case of:
b detection of a network voltage sag by the positive sequence undervoltage
b protection function ANSI 27D
b receipt of a load shedding order on a logic input.
Automatic restart
The motors disconnected as a result of the network voltage sag are automatically
restarted:
b after the return of network voltage is detected by the positive sequence
undervoltage protection function ANSI 27D
b and a time delay has run out, so as to stagger motor restarts.
De-excitation
Interruption of a synchronous generator’s excitation supply and tripping of the
generator breaking device in case of:
b detection of an internal generator fault
b detection of an excitation system fault
b receipt of a de-excitation order on a logic input or via the communication link.
115
Genset shutdown
Shutdown of the driving machine, tripping of the breaking device and interruption of
the generator excitation supply in case of:
b receipt of a genset shutdown order on a logic input or via the communication link.


50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC)

3 The tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs lx can be
power failure.

b locally, with the key reset

contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 "Lockout relay"
function.

116

PE88028
LED indication
b 2 LEDs, on the front and back of Sepam, indicate the unit operating status, and
are visible when a Sepam without a UMI is mounted inside the LV compartment, with
access to connectors:
v red "key" LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal
failure)
b 9 yellow LEDs on the Sepam front panel:
Local annunciation on Sepam display

Events and alarms may be indicated locally on Sepam’s advanced UMI or on the
Local indications on the Sepam front panel. mimic-based UMI by:
v English, factory-set messages, not modifiable
v local language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen
PE88108_SE

b the lighting up of one of the 9 LEDs, according to the LED assignment, which is set
using SFT2841.
Alarm processing
3
The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages
are linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in
the SFT2841 "Alarms" screen.
b to clear the message from the display, press the key
clear
b after the fault has disappeared, press the key reset : the light goes off and Sepam is
reset
SFT2841: alarm history. b the list of alarm messages remains accessible ( key) and may be cleared by
pressing the clear key from 'Alarm" screen, but can not be cleared from "Alarm history"
screen.
117
Local control using the mimic-based UMI

PE88038
Sepam control mode

A key-switch on the mimic-based UMI is used to select the Sepam control mode.
Three modes are available : Remote, Local or Test.
In Remote mode:
b remote control orders are taken into account
b local control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open
order.
In Local mode:
b remote control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open
order
b local control orders are enabled.
Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventive-
maintenance operations:
b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode
b no remote indications (TS) are sent via the communication link.
Local control using the mimic-based UMI.

View device status on the animated mimic diagram
For safe local control of devices, all information required by operators can be
displayed simultaneously on the mimic-based UMI:
3 b single-line diagram of the equipment controlled by Sepam, with an animated,

graphic indication of device status in real time
b the desired current, voltage and power measurements.
The local-control mimic diagram can be customized by adapting one of the supplied,
predefined diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch.
Local control of devices

All the devices for which opening and closing are controlled by Sepam can be
controlled locally using the mimic-based UMI.
The most common interlock conditions can be defined be logic equations.
The sure and simple operating procedure is the following:

b select the device to be controlled by moving the selection window using the keys
or . Sepam checks whether local control of the selected device is authorized
and informs the operator (selection window with a solid line)
b selection confirmation for the device to be controlled by pressing the key (the
selection window flashes)
b device control by pressing:
v key : open order
v or key : close order.
118
Sepam series 60 Adaptation of predefined functions using
functions
b creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
b creation of custom mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
Operating principle
DE60671
Logic equation editor

PE88111_SE
v etc.
sequences, etc.

b logic inputs
b local control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such
as time delays, bistables and time programmer.
SFT2841: logic equation editor.
b assigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix
119
Personalized alarm and operating messages

software tool.
b in the SFT2841 "Alarms" and "Alarm History" screens.
Local-control mimic diagram

PE88109_SE
The mimic-diagram editor in the SFT2841 software can be used to create a

single-line diagram corresponding exactly to the equipment controlled by Sepam.
Two procedures are available:
b rework a diagram taken from the library of standard diagrams in the SFT2841
software
b creation of an original diagram : graphic creation of the single-line diagram,
positioning of symbols for the animated devices, insertion of measurements, text,
etc.
Creation of a customized mimic diagram is made easy:

b library of predefined symbols: circuit breakers, earthing switch, etc.
b creation of personalized symbols.
3
Control matrix
SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor. b protection functions
b logic inputs
PE88110_SE
b logic equations
b output relays
120

characteristics:
b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI) Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam series 60 base
b working language units:
b type of base unit connector b mimic-based UMI
b advanced UMI.
b type of current sensor connector
The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the
b type of voltage sensor connector.
A Sepam series 60 with a remote advanced UMI is made up of:

b a bare base unit without any UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment
v for flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for
The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented
on page 218.

PE60304
3
or in bar graphs
resetting
b display of the list of activated protection functions and the main settings of major
protection functions
b adaptation of activated protection function set points or time delays in response to
new operating constraints
Sepam series 60 base unit with integrated advanced UMI.
Local control of devices using the mimic-based UMI

PE60305
The mimic-based UMI provides the same functions as the advanced UMI as well as
local control of devices:
b selection of the Sepam control mode
b view device status on the animated mimic diagram
b local opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam.

b menu-guided access to data
b excellent display quality under all lighting conditions: automatic contrast adjusted
Sepam series 60 base unit with mimic-based UMI.
Working language
PE88042
All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI or on the mimic-based
UMI are available in 2 languages:
b English, the default working language
v French
v Spanish
v another "local" language.
Connection of Sepam to the parameter setting tool

The SFT2841 parameter setting tool is required for Sepam protection and parameter
setting.
A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the RS 232 communication
port on the front of the unit or trough the communication network.
121
Selection guide
Base unit With remote With integrated With mimic-based
advanced UMI advanced UMI UMI
PE60306
PE60307
PE60308
Functions
3
Local indication
Metering and diagnosis data b b b
Alarms and operating messages b b b
List of activated protection functions b b b
Main protection settings b b b
Version of Sepam and remote
b b b
modules
Status of logic inputs b b b
Switchgear status on the animated
b
mimic diagram
Phasor diagram of currents or
b
voltages
Local control
Sepam reset b b b
Output testing b b b
Selection of Sepam control mode b
Device open/close order b
Characteristics
Screen
Size 128 x 64 pixels 128 x 64 pixels 128 x 240 pixels
Automatic contrast setting b b b
Backlit screen b b b
Keypad
Control-mode switch Remote / Local / Test
LEDs
Sepam operating status b base unit: 2 LEDs visible on back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back
visible on front
Indication LEDs 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI 9 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front
Mounting
b bare base unit, mounted at the Flush mounted on front of cubicle Flush mounted on front of cubicle
back of the compartment using
the AMT880 mounting plate
UMI module , flush mounted
122
PE60309
Removable memory cartridge

The cartridge contains all the Sepam characteristics:
b all Sepam protection and parameter settings
b all the metering and protection functions required for the application
b predefined control functions
b functions customized by control matrix or logic equations
b personalized local-control mimic diagram
b accumulated energies and switchgear diagnosis values
b working languages, customized and otherwise.
It may be made tamper-proof by lead sealing.
It is removable and easy to access on the front panel of Sepam to reduce
maintenance time.
If a base unit fails, simply:
b switch off Sepam and unplug connectors
b retrieve original cartridge
b replace the faulty base unit by a spare base unit (without cartridge)
b load the original cartridge into the new base unit
Sepam series 60 memory cartridge and backup battery. b plug in the connectors and switch Sepam on again:
Sepam is operational, with all its standard and customized functions, without
requiring any reloading of protection and parameter settings.
Backup battery
3
Standard lithium battery, 1/2 AA format, 3.6 Volts.
It allows the following data to be stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage:
b time-tagged event tables
b disturbance recording data
b peak demands, tripping context, etc
b date and time.
The battery presence and charge are monitored by Sepam.
The main data (e.g. protection and parameter settings) are saved in the event of an
auxiliary power outage, regardless of the state of the battery.

DC power supply voltage from 24 to 250 V DC.
Four relay outputs

The 4 relay outputs O1, O2, O3 and O5 on the base unit must be connected
to connector A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using
the SFT2841 software.
O1 to O3 are 3 control outputs with one NO contact, used by default for the
switchgear control function:
b O2: switchgear closing inhibition
b O3: switchgear closing
O5 is an indication output used by default for the watchdog function and has two
contacts, one NC and one NO.
123
Main connector and voltage and residual current input

PE60310
connector
b CCA620 screw-type connectors
b or CCA622 ring lug connectors.
The presence of the connector is monitored.
Phase current input connectors

b or CCA671 connector for LPCT sensors.
Spring clips
8 spring clips are supplied with the base unit to flush-mount Sepam in mounting
plates 1.5 to 6 mm thick.
Simple, tool-free installation.
3 AMT880 mounting plate

It is used to mount a Sepam without UMI inside the compartment with access to
AMT820 blanking plate

It fills in the space left when a standard model Sepam 2000 is replaced by a
Sepam series 60.
Spare base units

The following spares are available to replace faulty base units:
b base units with or without UMI, without cartridge or connectors
b all types of standard cartridges.

modification of the settings of Sepam series 60 units with integrated advanced UMIs.
of the Sepam unit.
Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs of
Sepam series 60 units.
124

DE88156

diagnosis data.
10 Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms (or move
cursor up).
11 LED test (or move cursor down).
12 Display and adaptation of activated protection
settings.
13 Display of Sepam.
15 RS 232 PC connection port.
16 Backup battery.
17 Memory cartridge.
3
18 Door.
Front panel with mimic-based UMI

DE60677

4 Local close order.
5 Local open order.
6 Label identifying the indication LEDs. G62
7 7 yellow indication LEDs, 1 red LED (I), 1 green LED (o).

8 Move cursor up.
9 Confirm data entry.
10 Move cursor down.
12 Transparent door.
14 Mimic-based UMI display.
15 Sepam reset.
17 Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms.
18 Display of switchgear and network diagnosis data
(or LED test).
settings.
21 Display of Sepam.
22 Three-position key switch to select Sepam control
mode.
23 Backup battery.
25 Door.
125
Rear panel
1 Base unit.
2 8 fixing points for 4 spring clips.
DE60678
5 Gasket.
bb 24 V DC to 250 V DC auxiliary supply
bb 4 relay outputs.
B1 Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs.
C1 Modbus communication port.
D1 Remote module connection port.
E 20-pin connector for:

bb 3 phase voltage V1, V2, V3/V0 inputs
bb 1 residual current I0 input.
3
F Communication port 2 for ACE850 modules only.
H1 Connector for 1st MES120 input/output module.
H2 Connector for 2nd MES120 input/output module.

t Functional earth.
126
Weight
Base unit with advanced UMI Base unit with mimic-based UMI
Minimum weight (base unit without MES120) 2.4 kg (5.29 lb) 3.0 kg (6.61 lb)
Maximum weight (base unit with 2 MES120) 3.4 kg (7.5 lb) 4.0 kg (8.82 lb)
Sensor inputs
Phase current inputs 1 A or 5 A CT
Input impedance < 0.02 Ω
Consumption < 0.02 VA (1 A CT)
< 0.5 VA (5 A CT)
Continuous thermal withstand 4 In
1 second overload 100 In
Voltage inputs Phase Residual
Input impedance > 100 k Ω > 100 k Ω
Consommation < 0.015 VA (100 V VT) < 0.015 VA (100 V VT)
Continuous thermal withstand 240 V 240 V
1-second overload 480 V 480 V
Isolation of inputs in relation to Enhanced Enhanced
other isolated groups
Relay outputs
Control relay outputs (O1, O2, O3; and O101, O102)
Voltage
Continuous current
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
24/48 V DC
8A
127 V DC
8A
220 V DC
8A
100 to 240 V AC
8A
3
Breaking capacity Resistive load 8A/ 4A 0.7 A 0.3 A
Load L/R < 20 ms 6A/ 2A 0.5 A 0.2 A
Load L/R < 40 ms 4A/ 1A 0.2 A 0.1 A
Resistive load 8A
Load p.f. > 0.3 5A
Isolation of outputs in relation to Enhanced
Annunciation relay output (O5, O102 to O106, O202 to O206)
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A
Breaking capacity Load L/R < 20 ms 2A/ 1A 0.5 A 0.15 A
Load p.f. > 0.3 1A
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC -20 % / +10 %
Maximum consumption < 16 W
Inrush current < 10 A 10 ms
Acceptable ripple content 12 %
Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms
Battery
Format 1/2 AA lithium 3.6 V
Service life 10 years Sepam energized
3 years minimum, typically 6 years Sepam not energized
(1) Relay outputs complying with clause 6.7 of standard C 97.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations)
127

Emission tests
EN 55022 A
EN 55022 A
Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255-22-3 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3 III 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 2 GHz
ANSI C37.90.2 (2004) 20 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 8 kV air; 6 kV contact
ANSI C37.90.3 8 kV air; 4 kV contact
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency IEC 61000-4-8 4 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (1-3 s) (4)
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255-22-6 III 10 V
Electrical fast transients/burst IEC 60255-22-4 A and B 4 kV; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV; 5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4 IV  4 kV; 2.5 kHz
ANSI C37.90.1 4 kV; 2.5 kHz
1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255-22-1 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM
ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV CM; 2.5 kV DM
100 kHz damped sine wave IEC 61000-4-12 III 2 kV CM
Slow damped oscillating wave (100 kHz to 1 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III 2 kV CM
Fast damped oscillating wave (3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III
3
Impulse wave IEC 61000-4-5 III 2 kV CM; 1 kV DM
Immunity to conducted disturbances in common mode from IEC 61000-4-16 III
0 Hz to 150 kHz
Voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11 100 % during 20 ms
In operation
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 1 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz - 13.2 Hz; a = ±1 mm
IEC 60068-2-64 2M1
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 10 Gn / 11 ms
De-energized
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 27 Gn / 11 ms
Jolts IEC 60255-21-2 2 20 Gn / 16 ms
In operation
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ad -25 °C
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bd +70 °C
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-78 Cab 10 days; 93 % RH ; 40 °C
Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Kb/2 6 days
Influence of corrosion/Gas test 2 IEC 60068-2-60 C 21 Days, 75% RH, 25°C, 500.10-9 vol/
vol H2S; 1000.10-9 vol/vol SO²
Influence of corrosion/Gas test 4 IEC 60068-2-60 Method 3 21 Days, 75% RH, 25°C,
10+/-5 H²S; 200+/-20 SO² ; 200+/-20
NO², 10+/-5 Cl² (10-9 vol/vol)
100+/-20 H²S; 200+/-50 SO² ; 200+/-50
NO², 20+/-5 Cl² (10-9 vol/vol)
In storage (3)
Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068-2-14 Nb -25 °C at +70 °C; 5 °C/min
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25 °C
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bb +70 °C
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-78 Cab 56 days; 93 % RH; 40 °C
IEC 60068-2-30 Db 6 days; 95 % RH; 55 °C
Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels IP20
NEMA Type 12
Fire withstand IEC 60695-2-11 650 °C with glow wire
Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5 2 kV 1mn (2)
ANSI C37.90 1 kV 1 mn (indication output)
1.5 kV 1 mn (control output)
Certification
e EN 50263 harmonized bb European Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMCD)
standard 2004 / 108 / EC of 15 December 2004
bb European Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 2006/95/CE
of 12 December 2006
UL UL508 - CSA C22.2 n° 14-95 File E212533
CSA CSA C22.2 n° 14-95 / n° 94-M91 / n° 0.17-00 File 210625
(1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode.
(2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms.
(4) Iso > 0.1 Ino for the 50n/51n and 67n protection functions, with I0 calculated as the sum of the phase currents.
128
Dimensions
mm
in
DE88159
DE88160
8.74
10.4
Front view of Sepam.
Side view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 In) to 6 mm (0.23 In) thick. 3
Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.
249
mm 9.8
DE88161
DE80798
in
185
7.28
112
64,2 4.41
2.53
25,5
1
264
Cut-out. 10.4
Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Front panel: 1.5 mm (0.05 In) to 6 mm (0.23 In) thick.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS
any jagged edges.
serious injury.

mm
in
DE88163
DE80799
214
8.43
141
5.55
Top view of Sepam with MES120, mounted with AMT880 and spring clips.
Mounting plate: 3 mm (0.11 In) thick.
129
DE60565
130
Sepam series 60 Connection
Connection characteristics
Screw type CCA620 b wiring with no fittings :
A, E v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
24-16)
- DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm² wire (AWG 16)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires (AWG 18)
v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in)
6.35 mm ring lugs CCA622 b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4”)
(u AWG 24-12)
b tightening torque: 1.2 (13.27 lb-in)
White RJ45 plug CCA612
C1
D1
Black RJ45 plug CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)
CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
3
CCA774: L = 4 m (13.1 ft)
CCA785 for MCS025 module: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
Blue RJ45 plug CCA614
F
Ring lug Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding:
DE88166
b flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mm²

Functional earth b maximum length: 300 mm (11.8 in)
4 mm ring lugs CCA630, CCA634 for b wire cross-section 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
B1 connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 lb-in)
LPCT sensors
CAUTION CAUTION
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
NUISANCE TRIPPING b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are b NEVER work alone.
no longer active and all the Sepam output relays b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
are dropped out. Check that this operating mode Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
your installation. is off.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in b Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional
equipment damage and unwanted shutdown earth.
of the electrical installation. b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
131
Sepam series 60 Phase current inputs
Variant 1: phase current measurement by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)

Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector.
CCA630/
DE60566
CCA634
Parameters
Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs

DE60567
Measurement of phase 1 and 3 currents is sufficient for all protection functions
3
based on phase current.
Parameters

Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA671
connector. It is necessary to connect 3 sensors; if only one or two sensors are
DE60568
connected, Sepam goes into fail-safe position.
Measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
The In parameter, primary rated current measured by an LPCT, is to be chosen from

the following values, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630,
666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
Parameter to be set using the SFT2841 software tool, to be completed by hardware
setting of the microswitches on the CCA671 connector.
Parameters
Sensor type LPCT
Rated current (In) 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000,
1600, 2000 or 3150 A
Note: Parameter In must be set twice:
132
Sepam series 60 Residual current inputs

Description
CCA630/
Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3,
DE60566
CCA634
measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors.
Parameters
Residual current rated residual current Measuring range
Sum of 3 Is In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 40 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120, CSH200 or CS300 core balance CT (standard connection)
Description
DE60569
Parameters
Residual current
2 A rating CSH
20 A rating CSH
rated residual current
In0 = 2 A
In0 = 20 A
Measuring range
0.1 to 40 A
0.2 to 400 A
3
Description
Residual current measurment by 1 A or 5 A CTs
DE60570
Parameters
1 A CT In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
DE60571
133

Description
DE60572

b CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH
primary
primary.
Parameters
DE60573
Description
The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of
DE60574
1/n (50 y n y 1500) and the Sepam residual current input.

installation.
Parameters
ACE990 - range 1 In0 = Ik.n (1) 0.01 to 20 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
(0.00578 y k y 0.04)
(0.00578 y k y 0.26316)
k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam
134
Connection diagrams Phase voltage inputs
Sepam series 60 Residual voltage input
Main channels
Phase voltage input connection variants

Variant 1: measurement of Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 U)
3 phase-to-neutral voltages
(3 V, standard connection)
DE60575
DE60576
Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage, but V0 or Vnt
3
allows the calculation of residual voltage, V0Σ. measurment could be added as variant 5 or 6.
Variant 3: measurement of Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 V)

1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 U)
DE60577
DE60578
This variant does not allow the calculation of residual This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.
voltage.
135
Main channels
Residual voltage input connection variants

Variant 5: measurement of Variant 6 : measurement of the residual voltage Vnt at the
residual voltage V0 neutral point of a generator
DE60579
DE60585
136
Available functions
The availability of certain protection and metering functions depend on the phase
and residual voltages measured by Sepam.
The table below gives the voltage input connection variants for which for each
protection and metering function dependent on measured voltages is available.
Example:
The directional overcurrent protection function (ANSI 67N/67NC) uses residual
voltage V0 as a polarization value.
It is therefore operational in the following cases:
b measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages or calculation of V0Σ
b measurement of residual voltage V0 (variant 3,5).
The protection and metering functions which do not appear in the table below are
available regardless of the voltages measured.
Phase voltages measured 3V 2U 1U 1V

(connection variant) (var. 1) (var. 2) (var. 3) (var. 4)
Residual voltage measured – V0 Sum – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt
(connection variant) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6)
Protection functions dependent on voltages measured
Directional phase overcurrent
Directional earth fault
Directional active overpower
67
67N/67NC
32P
bb
bb
bb
bb
bb
bb
bb bb
bb
bb bb
b
b
bb bb 3
Directional reactive active overpower 32Q bb bb bb bb b
Directional active underpower 37P bb bb bb bb b
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 bb bb bb bb b
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V bb bb bb bb b
Underimpedance 21B bb bb bb bb b
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D bb bb bb bb b
Remanent undervoltage 27R bb bb bb bb b bb bb bb bb bb bb
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 bb bb bb bb b bb bb bb bb bb bb
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 bb bb bb bb b bb bb bb bb bb bb
Neutral voltage displacement 59N bb bb bb b bb bb bb bb
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 bb bb bb bb b bb
Overfrequency 81H bb bb bb bb b bb bb bb bb bb bb
Underfrequency 81L bb bb bb bb b bb bb bb bb bb bb
Rate of change of frequency 81R bb bb bb bb b
Measurements dependent on voltages measured
Phase-to-phase voltage U21, U32, U13 bb bb bb bb bb U21, U21 U21
Phase-to-neutral voltage V1, V2, V3 bb bb bb V1 V1 V1
Residual voltage V0 bb bb bb bb bb
Neutral point voltage Vnt bb bb bb
Positive sequence voltage Vd bb bb bb bb bb
negative sequence voltage Vi
Frequency bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb
Active / reactive / apparent power: P, Q, S bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb
Peak demand power PM, QM bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb
Active / reactive / apparent power per phase : bb (1)
bb (1)
bb (1)
P1/ P1/ P1/
P1/P2/P3, Q1/Q2/Q3, S1/S2/S3 Q1/S1 Q1/S1 Q1/S1
Power factor bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh) bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb
Total harmonic distortion, voltage Uthd bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb
Phase displacement φ0 bb bb bb bb bb
Phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 bb bb bb bb bb
Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd bb bb bb bb bb
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 bb bb bb bb bb
b Function available on main voltage channels.
(1) If all three phase currents are measured.
137
TOOLS
schneider-electric.com Training
This international site allows you Training allows you to acquire

to access all the Schneider Electric the Schneider Electric expertise
products in just 2 clicks (installation design, work with power
via comprehensive range data- on, etc.) for increased efficiency
sheets, with direct links to: and a guarantee of improved
ppcomplete library: technical customer service.
documents, catalogs, FAQs, The training catalogue includes
brochures… beginner’s courses in electrical
ppselection guides from distribution, knowledge
the e-catalog. of MV and LV switchgear, operation
4 ppproduct discovery sites and

their Flash animations.
and maintenance of installations,
design of LV installations.
You will also find illustrated
contacts…
138
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
Sepam series 80
Range description 5
Sepam series 60 89
Sepam series 80 139

Selection table 140
Functions Sepam series 80 142

Sensor inputs 142
General settings 143
Description 144
Characteristics 149
Protection 151
Description 151
Tripping curves 157
Main characteristics 159
Setting ranges 160

Description 165
Customized functions using Logipam 172
4
Characteristics 173
Base unit 173
Presentation 173
Description 177
Dimensions 182
Connection diagrams 184

Base unit 184
Connection 184
Sepam B83 185
Sepam C86 186
Phase current inputs 187
Residual current inputs 188
Phase voltage inputs 190

Main channels 190
Additional channels for Sepam B83 191
Additional channel for Sepam B80 192
Available functions 193

Order form 275
139
Substation Transformer Motor Generator Busbar Cap.

Protection ANSI code S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83 C86
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault (1) 50N/51N 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
50G/51G
Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Thermal overload for cables 49RMS 1 1 1
Thermal overload for machines (1) 49RMS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Thermal overload for capacitors 49RMS 1
Capacitor bank unbalance 51C 8
Restricted earth fault 64REF 2 2 2 2 2

Two-winding transformer 87T 1 1 1
differential
Machine differential 87M 1 1
Directional phase overcurrent (1)

67 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Directional earth fault (1) 67N/67NC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Directional active overpower 32P 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Directional reactive overpower 32Q 1 1 1 1 1 1
Directional active underpower 37P 2 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1 1 1
Excessive starting time, 48/51LR 1 1 1
locked rotor
Starts per hour 66 1 1 1
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pole slip 78PS 1 1 1 1 1 1
v v v v v v
4
Overspeed (2 set points) (2) 12
Underspeed (2 set points) (2) 14 v v v v v v
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V 2 2 2
Underimpedance 21B 1 1 1
Inadvertent energization 50/27 1 1 1
Third harmonic undervoltage / 27TN/64G2 2 2 2
100 % stator earth fault 64G
Overfluxing (V / Hz) 24 2 2 2 2
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Positive sequence undercurrent 27D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Neutral voltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Recloser (4 cycles) (2) 79 v v v v

Thermostat / Buchholz (2) 26/63 v v v v v v v
Temperature monitoring 38/49T v v v v v v v v v v
(16 RTDs) (3)
Synchro-check (4) 25 v v v v v v v v v v v v
Control and monitoring

Circuit breaker / contactor control 94/69 v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Automatic transfer (AT) (2) v v v v v v v v v v v v
Load shedding / automatic restart b b b
De-excitation b b b
Genset shutdown b b b
Capacitor step control (2) v
Logic discrimination (2) 68 v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Latching / acknowledgement 86 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Annunciation 30 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Switching of groups of settings b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Adaptation using logic equations b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Logipam programming (Ladder language) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
The figures indicate the number of relays available for each protection function. (5) With ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP-2,
b standard, v options. ACE969FO-2 or ECI850 communication interface.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings. (6) With ACE850TP or ACE850FO communication interface.
140
Substation Transformer Motor Generator Busbar Cap.

Metering S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83 C86
Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Measured residual current I0, calculated I0Σ b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Demand current I1, I2, I3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Measured residual current I’0 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Residual voltage V0 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Positive sequence voltage Vd / rotation direction b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Negative sequence voltage Vi b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Frequency b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Active power P, P1, P2, P3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Reactive power Q, Q1, Q2, Q3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Apparent power S, S1, S2, S3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Peak demand power PM, QM b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Power factor b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh) b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (2)
(± Wh, ± VARh) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Phase current I’1, I’2, I’3 RMS b b b b b
Calculated residual current I’0Σ b b b b b
Voltage U’21, V’1 and frequency b
Voltage U’21, U’32, U’13, V’1, V’2, V’3, V’d, V’i and b
frequency
Residual voltage V’0 b
Temperature (16 RTDs) (3) v v v v v v v v v v
Rotation speed (2) v v v v v v
Neutral point voltage Vnt b b b b b b
Tripping context b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Phase fault and earth fault trip counters b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
4
Harmonic distortion (THD),
current and voltage Ithd, Uthd b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement φ0, φ’0, φ0Σ b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Disturbance recording b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Motor start report (MSR) b b b
Motor start trend (MST) b b b
Datalog (DLG) b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Thermal capacity used b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Remaining operating time before overload tripping b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Waiting time after overload tripping b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Running hours counter / operating time b b b b b b b b b b
Starting current and time b b b
Start inhibit time b b b
Number of starts before inhibition b b b
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current I’i b b b b b
Differential current Idiff1, Idiff2, Idiff3 b b b b b
Through current It1, It2, It3 b b b b b
Current phase displacement θ b b b b b
Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Third harmonic voltage, neutral point or residual b b b
Difference in amplitude, frequency and phase of v v v v v v v v v v v v
voltages compared for synchro-check (4)
Capacitor unbalance current and capacitance b
Switchgear diagnosis ANSI code
CT / VT supervision 60/60FL b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Trip circuit supervision (2) 74 v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Auxiliary power supply monitoring b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Cumulative breaking current b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
Number of operations, operating time, charging time,
v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
number of racking out operations (2)
Additional modules
8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module (2) v v v v v v v v v v v v
1 low level analog output - MSA141 module v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Logic inputs/outputs - MES120/MES120G/
MES120H (14I/6O) module v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Communication interface - ACE949-2, ACE959,

ACE937, ACE969-2 TP, FO, ACE850 TP or FO v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Modbus communication, IEC 60 870-5-103, DNP3 or IEC 61850

Measurement readout (5) (6) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Remote indication and time tagging of events (5) (6) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Remote control orders (5) (6) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Remote protection setting (5) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
Transfer of disturbance recording data (5) (6) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
GOOSE message IEC 61850 (6) v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v v
141
Functions Sensor inputs
Sepam series 80
Sepam series 80 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors
required for applications:
DE88137
b main analog inputs, available on all types of Sepam series 80:

v 3 phase current inputs l1, l2, l3
v 1 residual current input l0
v 3 phase voltage inputs V1, V2, V3
v 1 residual voltage input V0
b additional analog inputs, dependent on the type of Sepam:
v 3 additional phase current inputs l’1, l’2, l’3
v 1 additional residual current input l’0
v 3 additional phase voltage inputs V’1, V’2, V’3
v 1 additional residual voltage input V’0
The table below lists the analog inputs available according to the type of Sepam
series 80.
Sepam G88 sensor inputs.
S80, S81, T81, T82, T87, M87, B80 B83 C86

S82, S84 M81, G82 M88, G87,
4 Phase current inputs Main channel l1, l2, l3 l1, l2, l3
G88
l1, l2, l3 l1, l2, l3 l1, l2, l3 l1, l2, l3
Additional channels l’1, l’2, l’3
Residual current inputs Main channel l0 l0 l0 l0 l0 l0
Additional channels l’0 l’0 l’0 l’0
Unbalance current l’1, l’2, l’3, l’0
inputs for capacitor steps
Phase voltage inputs Main channel V1, V2, V3 V1, V2, V3 V1, V2, V3 V1, V2, V3 V1, V2, V3 V1, V2, V3
or U21, U32 or U21, U32 or U21, U32 or U21, U32 or U21, U32 or U21, U32
Additional channels V’1 or U’21 V’1, V’2, V’3

or U’21, U’32
Residual voltage inputs Main channel V0 V0 V0 V0 (1) V0 V0
Additional channel V’0
Temperature inputs T1 to T16 T1 to T16 T1 to T16
Note: by extension, an additional measurement (current or voltage) is a value measured via an additional analog channel.
(1) Available with phase voltage U21, U32.
142
Functions General settings
Sepam series 80

General settings Selection Value

In, I’n Rated phase current 2 or 3 1 A / 5 A CTs 1 A to 6250 A
(sensor primary current) 3 LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A (1)
I’n Unbalance current sensor rating (capacitor application) CT 1 A / 2 A / 5 A 1 A to 30 A
Ib Base current, according to rated power of equipment 0.2 to 1.3 In
I’b Base current on additional channels Applications with transformer I’b = Ib x Un1/Un2
(not adjustable) Other applications I’b = Ib
In0, I’n0 Rated residual current Sum of 3 phase currents See In(I’n) rated phase current
CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT 2 A or 20 A rating
1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A to 6250 A
Core balance CT + ACE990 (the core balance CT According to current monitored
ratio 1/n must be such that 50 y n y 1500) and use of ACE990
Unp, Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Vnp: rated 220 V to 250 kV
U’np primary phase-to-neutral voltage Vnp = Unp/3)
Uns, Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 90 to 230 V
U’ns 2 VTs: U21, U32 90 to 120 V
1 VT: U21 90 to 120 V
1 VT: V1 90 to 230 V
Uns0, Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero Uns/3 or Uns/3
U’nso sequence voltage Unp/3
Vntp Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage 220 V to 250 kV
Vnts Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage 57.7 V to 133 V
fn Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
4
Phase rotation direction 1-2-3 or 1-3-2
Integration period (for demand current and peak 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy 0.1 kWh to 5 MWh
Increments reactive energy 0.1 kVARh to 5 MVARh
P Rated transformer power 100 kVA to 999 MVA
Un1 Rated winding 1 voltage 220 V to 220 kV
(main channels: I)
Un2 Rated winding 2 voltage 220 V to 400 kV
(additional channels: I’)
In1 Rated winding 1 current (not adjustable) In1 = P/(3 Un1)
In2 Rated winding 2 current (not adjustable) In2 = P/(3 Un2)
Transformer vector shift 0 to 11
Ωn Rated speed (motor, generator) 100 to 3600 rpm
R Number of pulses per rotation (for speed acquisition) 1 to 1800 (Ωn x R/60 y 1500)
Zero speed set point 5 to 20 % of Ωn
Number of capacitor steps 1 to 4
Connection of capacitor steps Star / Delta
Capacitor step ratio Step 1 1
Step 2 1, 2
Step 3 1, 2, 3, 4
Step 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8
143
Metering
Sepam is a precision metering unit. Peak demand powers
All the metering and diagnosis data used for The greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same
commissioning and required period as the demand current. The peak demand powers may be cleared.
for the operation and maintenance of your equipment
are available locally Energy
or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, b 4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents I1, I2
etc.). and I3 measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions
Phase current energy pulses from external meters.
RMS current for each phase, taking into account
harmonics up to number 13. Temperature
Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase Accurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100
current: or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET148-2 module.
Rotation speed
Calculated by the counting of pulses transmitted by a proximity sensor at each
Residual current passage of a cam driven by the rotation of the motor or generator shaft.
Four types of residual current values are available Acquisition of pulses on a logic input.
depending on the type of Sepam and sensors
connected to it:
Phasor diagram
b 2 residual currents I0Σ and I’0Σ, calculated by the A phasor diagram is displayed by SFT2841 software and the mimic-based UMI
vector sum of the 3 phase currents to check cabling and assist in the setting and commissioning of directional and
b 2 measured residual currents I0 and I’0. differential protection functions.
Different types of sensors may be used to measure According to the connected sensors, all current and voltage information can be
residual current: selected for display in vector form.
b CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300 specific core
balance CT Datalog (DLG)
b conventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer with This function is used to record and back up a set of measurements (1 to 15) available
CSH30 interposing ring CT
4
in the Sepam relay. The number of backed-up files and the number of measurements
b any core balance CT with an ACE990 interface. per file depend on the type of cartridge installed (extended cartrige available for
Sepam 80 only). The recording mode and selection of measurements can be
Demand current and peak demand configured by the user via the SFT2841 software.
currents
All trip of the function results from an external event (TC for example). The stop
Demand current and peak demand currents are
condition and file management differ according to which of the following 2 modes is
calculated according to the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and
used:
I3:
a) Limited: the DLG function stops automatically when the end of recording time is
b demand current is calculated over an adjustable
reached or on receipt of an external event (TC for example).
period of 5 to 60 minutes
b) Circular: the file content is managed in a FIFO memory: when the file is full, the
b peak demand current is the greatest demand current
write operation continues and starts again at the start of the file. Stopping the write
and indicates the current drawn by peak loads.
operation only results from an external event (TC for example). In the absence of
the stop command, recording is continuous.
Voltage and frequency Using the DLG function does not affect the quality of service of Sepam's active
The following measurements are available according to protection functions.
the voltage sensors connected:
b phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 and V’1, V’2, Characteristics
V’3 Configuration parameters
b phase-to-phase voltages U21, U32, U13 and U’21,
U’32, U’13 Content of a COMTRADE file b Configuration file (*.CFG) :
date, variable characteristics, transformation
b residual voltage V0, V’0 or neutral point voltage Vnt b ratio of the selected variable values
positive sequence voltage Vd, V’d and negative b Samples file(*.DAT):
sequence voltage Vi, V’i recorded variables
b frequency measured on the main and additional Total file duration 1 s to 30 days
voltage channels.
Sampling period 1 s to 24 hours
Power Variables available for recording See the table of available data p.149/150.
Powers are calculated according to the phase currents
Number of files 1 to 20
I1, I2 and I3:
b active power Number of variables per file 1 to 15
b reactive power Source of starting and stopping b SFT 2841 software
b apparent power b Logic equation or Logipam
b power factor (cos φ). b TC
According to the sensors used, power calculations may b Logic or GOOSE input
be based on the 2 or 3 wattmeter method. File format COMTRADE 97
The 2 wattmeter method is only accurate when there is
no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral
is distributed.
The 3 wattmeter method gives an accurate calculation
of 3-phase and phase by phase powers in all cases,
regardless of whether or not the neutral is distributed.
144

Sepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on network
disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes.
Tripping context
Storage of tripping currents and I0, Ii, U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vi, Vd, F, P, Q, Idiff,
It and Vnt values when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored.
Tripping current
Storage of the 3 phase currents and earth fault current at the time of the last Sepam trip
order, to indicate fault current.
The values are stored in the tripping contexts.
Number of trips
2 trip counters:
b number of phase fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50/51,
50V/51V and 67 protection functions
b number of earth fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50N/51 and
67N/67NC protection functions.

Negative sequence component of phase currents I1, I2 and I3 (and I’1, I’2 and I’3),
indicating the degree of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment.
Total harmonic distortion

Two THD values calculated to assess network power quality, taking into account
harmonics up to number 13:
b current THD, calculated according to I1
b voltage THD, calculated according to V1 or U21.
Phase displacement
b phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages V1, V2,
V3 respectively
4
b phase displacement φ0 between residual current and residual voltage.
Disturbance recording
b all sampled values of measured currents and voltages
b status of all logic inputs and outputs logic data: pick-up, …
Recording characteristics
Number of recordings in COMTRADE format Adjustable from 1 to 19
Total duration of a recording 1 s to 20 s
if using a standard cartridge
1 s to 32 s
if using an extended cartridge
Number of samples per period 12 or 36
Duration of recording prior to occurrence of the event Adjustable from 0 to 99 periods
Maximum recording capability

12 samples per period 36 samples per period
Network frequency Cartridge Cartridge
Standard Extended Standard Extended
50 Hz 22 s 35 s 7s 11 s
60 Hz 18 s 11 s 6s 9s
Voltage comparison for synchro-check

For the synchro-check function, the MCS025 module continuously measures the
amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages to be checked.
Out-of-sync context
Storage of amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages measured
by the MCS025 module when a closing order is inhibited by the synchro-check function.
145
Machine diagnosis assistance

b data on the operation of their machines
b predictive data to optimize process management
b useful data to facilitate protection function setting and implementation.
b recording data during motor start (MSR) and create trend graphics (MST).
Thermal capacity used

Equivalent temperature buildup in the machine, calculated by the thermal overload
Remaining operating time before overload tripping

The time is used by facility managers to optimize process management in real time
by deciding to:
b interrupt according to procedures
b continue operation with inhibition of thermal protection on overloaded machine.
Waiting time after overload tripping

Waiting time to avoid further tripping of thermal overload protection by premature
re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.
Running hours counter / operating time

Equipment is considered to be running whenever a phase current is over 0.1 Ib.
Cumulative operating time is given in hours.
Motor starting / overload current and time

A motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when a phase current is over
4 1.2 Ib. For each start / overload, Sepam stores:

The values are stored until the following start / overload.
Number of starts before inhibition/start inhibit time

Indicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts per hour protection function
and, if the number is zero, the waiting time before starting is allowed again.
Differential and through current

Values calculated to facilitate the implementation of ANSI 87T and 87M differential
protection functions.
Current phase displacement

Phase shift between the main phase currents and additional phase currents to
facilitate implementation of ANSI 87T differential protection function.
Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd

Value calculated to facilitate the implementation of the underimpedance field loss
protection (ANSI 40).
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13

Values calculated to facilitate the implementation of the backup underimpedance
protection function (ANSI 21B).
Third harmonic neutral point or residual voltage

Values measured to facilitate the implementation of the third harmonic undervoltage /
100 % stator earth fault protection function (ANSI 27TN/64G2).
Capacitance
Measurement, for each phase, of the total capacitance of the connected capacitor
bank steps. This measurement is used to monitor the condition of the capacitors.
Capacitor unbalance current

Measurement of the unbalance current for each capacitor bank step. This
measurement is possible when the steps are connected in a double star
arrangement.
146
Visualisation of 3 graphics MSR

via an integrated synoptic HMI. Motor Start Report (MSR)
This function, available only in motor applications, can stock during a configured
1 duration multiple files of 144 data samples selected.
DE81164
MSR 2001/01/01 00:59:00.364 Read

447A 11.7kV The files can be viewed:
a) after downloading, on a PC screen, using the WaveWin software
b) on the Sepam display using the Diagnosis menu.
Id fund <2s> Vd fund 3

2 Caractéristiques
4 0.00x1 0.00x1
Paramètres de configuration
Content of a COMTRADE file b Fichier de configuration (*.CFG): date, variable
characteristics, transformation ratio of the selected variable
values
Rotor temp <2s> C
b Samples file (*.DAT) : recorded variables
0.00rpm 447A Total file duration 2 s to 144 s
Sampling frequency Depends on the configured duration (144 s maximum).
Example: For a duration of 144 s the frequency is 1 Hz,
for a duration of 2 s the frequency is 72 Hz.
calc. speed <2s> Id fund
5 Variables available for recording See the table of available data . p. 149 /150
Number of files b 1 to 5 with standard cartridge
Remote b 1 to 20 with extended cartridge
Local Number of variables per file b 1 to 5 with standard cartridge
Test b 1 to 10 with extended cartridge
Source of starting and stopping b SFT 2841 software
1 Time tagging of the selected file and file b Logic equation or Logipam
selection zone b TC
4
b Logic or GOOSE input
2 Name of the 1st variable associated
with the Y-axis File format COMTRADE 97
3 Selection zone for the variable to be Nota : These parameters are configured with the SFT2841 software.
associated with the Y-axis
4 Maximum value observed for the recorded
variable
5 Duration of read time Motor Start Trend (MST)
Visualisation of 3 graphics MST This function, only available for motor applications, is related to the Motor start
via an integrated synoptic HMI. trend function. It is used to calculate and display in the form of curves the minimum,
demand and maximum values for each value.
These recalculated values which are stored in a file of 144 samples covering a 30-
DE81165EN
MST 2001/01/01 00:00:10.036 1 day period. When the current 30-day period has ended, it is automatically archived in
COMTRADE format and will no longer be able to be viewed on the Sepam display
2.56kA max
moyenne The number of files available varies between 12 and 18 depending on the type of
memory cartridge (standard or extended) installed on Sepam
min
The trends are only recalculated at the end of each Motor start report.
2 Id fund <2s>
MSR
11.7kV
Vd fund <2s> 4 MSR 1 10 ......

3
0.00x1
MSR 2 20 ......
MSR 3 90 ......
Rotor temp <2s>
Remote
Local
Test
Maximum 90 ......
Demand 50 ...... MST
1 Time tagging of the current file Minimum 10 ......
2 Selection of the variable to be associated
with the Y-axis 1 2 3 144 Samples
3 Name of the analyzed variable
Calculating an MST using the available MSRs.
4 Duration of read time for each file
147

Sepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in Switchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on:
the base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the b mechanical condition of breaking device
b put Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any
unwanted operation ANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervision
b alert the facility manager of the need for maintenance Used to monitor the entire metering chain:
operations. b CT and VT sensors
b connection
Internal failure b Sepam analog inputs.
Two categories of internal failures are monitored: Monitoring includes:
b major failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe b consistency checking of currents and voltages measured
position). b acquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown
The protection functions are inhibited, the output relays contacts.
are forced to drop out and the “Watchdog” output
indicates Sepam shutdown In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned protection
b minor failures: downgraded Sepam operation. functions may be inhibited to avoid nuisance tripping
Sepam’s main functions are operational and equipment
ANSI 74 - Trip/closing circuit supervision
protection is ensured.
To detect trip circuit and closing circuit failures, Sepam monitors:
Battery monitoring b shunt trip coil connection
Monitoring of battery voltage to guarantee data is b closing coil connection
saved in the event of an outage. b matching of breaking device open/closed position contacts
A battery fault generates an alarm. b execution of breaking device open and close orders.
The trip and closing circuits are only supervised when connected as shown below.
Detection of plugged connectors
The system checks that the current or voltage sensors
4
DE88138
are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure.
module is a major failure
Connection for shunt trip coil Connection for undervoltage Connection for closing circuit
monitoring. trip coil monitoring. supervision
Auxiliary power supply monitoring

The voltage rating of Sepam’s auxiliary supply should be set between 24 V DC and
250 V DC.
If the auxiliary supply drifts, 2 alarms may be triggered:
b high set point alarm, adjustable from 105 % to 150 % of rated supply (maximum
275 V)
b low set point alarm, adjustable from 60 % to 95 % of rated supply (minimum 20 V).
Cumulative breaking current monitoring

An alarm can be generated when the total cumulative breaking current exceeds a set
point.

Number of rackouts
148
Available data
Measurement MSR/MST
Functions Accuracy (1) MSA141 Saving
range
Designation Units
Metering
Phase current 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % b
Main channels I1, I2, I3 A
Additional channels I’1, I’2, I’3 A
Residual current Measured 0,005 to 20 In ±1 % b I0m, I’0m A
Calculated 0,005 to 40 In ±1 % b I0c, I’0c A
Demand current 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % I1moy, I2moy, I3moy A
Peak demand current 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % v I1max, I2max, I3max A
Voltage metering
Phase-to-phase Main channels (U) 0,06 to 1,2 Unp ±0,5 % b U21, U32, U31 V
voltage Additional channels. U’21, U’32, U’31 V
Phase-to-neutral Main channels (V) 0,06 to 1,2 Vnp ±0,5 % b V1, V2, V3 V
voltagee Additional channels V’1, V’2, V’3 V
Residual voltage 0,04 to 3 Vnp ±1 % V0, V’0 V
Neutral point voltage 0,04 to 3 Vntp ±1 % Vnt V
Positive sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vd, V’d V
Negative sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vi, V’i V
Frequency Main channels (f) 25 to 65 Hz ±0,02 Hz b F, F’ Hz
Power metering
Active power (total or per phase) 0,015 Sn to 999 MW ±1 % b P MW
Active power per phase P1, P2, P3 MW
Peak demand active power 0,015 Sn to 999 MW ±1 % v Pmax MW
4
Reactive power (total or per phase) 0,015 Sn to 999 Mvar ±1 % b Q Mvar
Reactive power per phase Q1, Q2, Q3 Mvar
Peak demand reactive power 0,015 Sn to 999 Mvar ±1 % v Qmax Mvar
Apparent power (total or per phase) 0,015 Sn to 999 MVA ±1 % b S MVA
Apparent power per phase S1, S2, S3 MVA
Peak demand apparent power Smax MVA
Power factor (cos φ) -1 to +1 (CAP/IND) ±0,01 b cosPhi MVA
Apparent power Measured (+ and -) Eam+, Eam- MW.h
Calculated (+ and -) 0 to 2,1.108 MW.h ±1 % ±1 digit vv Eac+, Eac- MW.h
Reactive power Measured (+ and -) Erm+, Erm- Mvar.h
Calculated (+ and -) 0 to 2,1.108 Mvar.h ±1 % ±1 digit vv Erc+, Erc- Mvar.h
Other metering
±1 °C
-30 to +200 °C de +20 to +140
Temperature or °C b T1 to T16 °C / °F
-22 to +392 °F ±1,8 °F
de +68 to +284 °F
Rotation speed 0 to 7200 tr/mn ±1 tr/mn Rot104 tr / mn
Tripping context v
Tripping current 0,02 to 40 In ±5 % v
Number of trips 0 to 65535 - vv
Negative sequence / unbalance 1 to 500 % Ib ±2 % li / lb % lb or % l'b
Total harmonic distortion, current 0 to 100 % ±1 % Ithd %
Total harmonic distortion, voltage 0 to 100 % ±1 % Uthd %
Phase displacement φ 0 (between V0 & I0) 0 to 359° ±2°
Phase displacement φ 0, φ'0, φ'0 φ 0, φ’0, φ’0 °
Phase displacement φ 1, φ2, φ 3
0 to 359° ±2° φ 1, φ 2, φ 3 °
(between V & I)
Thermal capacity used Ech %
Running hours counter CH hours
Phase differential current Idiff1, Idif2, Idiff3 A
Disturbance recording v
Amplitude difference 0 to 1,2 Usync1 ±1 %
Frequency difference 0 to 10 Hz ±0,5 Hz
Phase difference 0 to 359° ±2°
Out-of-sync contex v
v saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage
149
Available data
Measurement Accuracy
Functions (1) MSA141 Saving MSR/MST
range
Description Units
Phase-to-phase voltages U21, U22, U13 0,06 to 1,2 Unp ±0,5 % b U21 , U22 , U13 V
I1, I2, I3 0,02 to 40 In ±0,5 % b I1 , I2 , I3 A
±1 °C
-30 to +200 °C
de +20 to +140 °C
Temperature or T1 à T16 °C / °F
±1,8 °F
-22 to +392 °F
de +68 to +284 °F
Rotor speed of rotation caculated via
Rot49 tr / mn
49RMS motor
Rotor speed of rotation mesured via
0 to 7200 tr/mn ±1 tr/mn Rot104 tr / mn
I104 input
Motor thermal capacity used (2)
±1 % b vv M pu
0 to 800 % (100 % for I phase = Ib)
Rotor thermal capacity used (2)
W pu
Rotor resistance (2) Rr+
Stator thermal capacity used (2) E pu
Stator resistance (3) Rs
Positive-sequence current Id A
Negative-sequence current Ii A
Positive-sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vd V
Negative-sequence voltage 0,05 to 1,2 Vnp ±2 % Vi V
Residual current Measured 0,005 to 20 In ±1 % I0 A
Calculated 0,005 to 40 In ±1 % I0_S A
Measured residual voltage V0 V
4
Motor torque (2) C pu
Slip (calculated via 49RMS motor) g pu
Frequency (4) F Hz
Remaining operating time before overload
0 à 999 mn ±1 mn
tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping 0 à 999 mn ±1 mn
Running hours counter / operating time 0 à 65535 heures ±1 % ou ±0,5 h vv
Starting current 1,2 Ib à 40 In ±5 % v
Starting time 0 à 300 s ±300 ms v
Number of starts before inhibition 0 à 60 -
Start inhibit time 0 à 360 mn ±1 mn
Phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3
0 à 359° ±2°
(between I)
Apparent impedance Zd, Z21, Z32, Z13 0 à 200 kΩ ±5 %
Capacitance 0 à 30 F ±5 %
Cumulative breaking current 0 à 65535 kA² ±10 % vv
Number of operations 0 à 4.109 - vv
Operating time 20 à 100 ms ±1 ms vv
Charging time 1 à 20 ms ±0,5 s vv
Number of rackouts 0 à 65535 - vv
v saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage.
The value used is that provided by the 49RMS motor thermal overload protection if this has been activated. The value is 0 if the 49RMS generic thermal
(2)
overload protection has been activated.
(3) The value used is that for the active 49RMS protection: motor thermal overload or generic thermal overload.
(4) Only available for the main voltage channels.
150
Current protection functions

ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload
Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection. Protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on
2 modes: b machines (transformers, motors or generators)
b overcurrent protection sensitive to the highest phase b cables
current measured b capacitors
b machine differential protection sensitive to the The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a mathematical model which
highest differential phase currents obtained in self- takes into account:
balancing schemes. b current RMS values
Characteristics b ambient temperature
b 2 groups of settings b negative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise.
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to calculate predictive data for
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized process control assistance.
IDMT curves) or customized curve The protection may be inhibited by a logic input when required by process control
b with or without timer hold conditions.
b tripping confirmed or unconfirmed, according to Thermal overload for machines - Characteristics
parameter setting: b 2 groups of settings
v unconfirmed tripping: standard b 1 adjustable alarm set point
v tripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage b 1 adjustable tripping set point
protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant b adjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics
2-phase short-circuits to fit manufacturer’s thermal withstand curves
v tripping confirmed by undervoltage protection b equipment heating and cooling time constants.
(ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for phase-to-phase short- The cooling time constant may be calculated automatically based on measurement
circuits in networks with low short-circuit power. of the equipment temperature by a sensor.
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault Thermal overload for cables - Characteristics
Earth fault protection based on measured or calculated b 1 group of settings
residual current values: b cable current carrying capacity, which determines alarm and trip set points
b cable heating and cooling time constants.
4
b ANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or
measured by 3 phase current sensors Thermal overload for capacitors - Characteristics
b ANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by b 1 group of settings
a specific sensor. b alarm current, which determines the alarm set point
Characteristics b overload current, which determines the tripping set point
b 2 groups of settings b hot tripping time and current setting, which determine a point on the tripping curve.
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 17 standardized Thermal overload for transformers - Characteristics
IDMT curves) or customized curve This function is used to protect a transformer against overloads, based on the
b with or without timer hold measurement of the current taken. IEC standard 60076-2 proposes 2 thermal
b second harmonic restraint to ensure stability during models for evaluating the winding thermal capacity used during an overload,
transformer energizing, activated by parameter setting. depending on whether the transformer is dry-type or immersed.
b Taking account of harmonics
ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure The equivalent current Ieq measured by the transformer thermal overload protection
If a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping order,
is the highest of the phase rms currents (the rms current takes account of harmonic
as detected by the non-extinction of the fault current,
numbers up to 13).
this backup protection sends a tripping order to the
upstream or adjacent breakers. b Taking account of 2 operating conditions
The choice between thermal sets 1 and 2 is made by the "switching of thermal
ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance settings" logic input. This means you can have thermal set 1 for normal transformer
Protection against phase unbalance, detected by the operation and thermal set 2 for unusual transformer operation.
measurement of negative sequence current.
b sensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ANSI 51C - Capacitor bank unbalance
ends of long lines Detection of capacitor step internal faults by measuring the unbalance current
b protection of equipment against temperature build- flowing between the two neutral points of a step connected in a double star
up, caused by an unbalanced power supply, phase arrangement. Four unbalance currents can be measured to protect up to 4 steps.
inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current Characteristics
unbalance. b 2 set points per step
Characteristi cs b definite time (DT) curve.
b 1 definite time (DT) curve
b 9 IDMT curves: 4 IEC curves and 3 IEEE curves, 1
ANSI curve in RI² and 1 specific Schneider curve
151
Recloser Differential protection functions

ANSI 79
Automation device used to limit down time after tripping
Detection of phase-to-earth faults on 3-phase windings with earthed neutral, by
due to transient or semi-permanent faults on overhead
comparison of residual current calculated from the 3 phase currents and residual
lines. The recloser orders automatic reclosing of the
current measured at the neutral point.
breaking device after the time delay required to restore
the insulation has elapsed.
DE88139
Recloser operation is easy to adapt for different
operating modes by parameter setting.
Characteristics
b 1 to 4 reclosing cycles, each cycle has an adjustable
dead time
b adjustable, independent reclaim time and safety time
until recloser ready time delays
b cycle activation linked to instantaneous or time-
delayed short-circuit protection function (ANSI 50/51,
50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting Characteristics
b inhibition/locking out of recloser by logic input. b instantaneous tripping
b percentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point
b more sensitive than transformer or machine differential protection.
Synchro-check ANSI 87T - Transformer and transformer-machine unit
ANSI 25 differential (2 windings)
This function checks the voltages upstream and Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection of two-winding transformers or transformer-
downstream of a circuit breaker and allows closing machine units.
when the differences in amplitude, frequency and Protection based on phase by phase comparison of the primary and secondary
phase are within authorized limits. currents with:
Characteristics b amplitude and phase correction of the currents in each winding according to the
transformer vector shift and the voltage values set
4
b adjustable and independent set points for differences
in voltage, frequency and phase b clearance of zero sequence current from the primary and secondary windings
b adjustable lead time to take into account the circuit- (suitable for all earthing systems).
breaker closing time Characteristics
b 5 possible operating modes to take no-voltage b instantaneous tripping
conditions into account. b adjustable high set point for fast tripping for violent faults, with no restraint
b percentage-based characteristic with two adjustable slopes and adjustable low set
point
b restraint based on percentage of harmonics. These restraints prevent nuisance
tripping during transformer energizing, during faults outside the zone that provoke
saturation of the current transformers and during operation of a transformer supplied
with excessive voltage (overfluxing).
v self-adapting neural network restraint: this restraint analyzes the percentage of
harmonics 2 and 5 as well as differential and through currents
v restraint based on the percentage of harmonic 2 per phase or total
v restraint based on the percentage of harmonic 5 per phase or total.
Self-adapting restraint is exclusive with respect to restraints on the percentage of
harmonic 2 or on the percentage of harmonic 5.
b restraint on energization. This restraint, based on the magnetizing current of the
transformer or on a logic equation or Logipam, ensures stability of transformers that
have low harmonic percentages on energization
b fast restraint upon loss of sensor.
ANSI 87M - Machine differential

Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, based on phase by phase comparison of the
currents on motor and generator windings.
Characteristics
b instantaneous tripping
b fixed high set point for fast tripping for violent faults, with no restraint
b percentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point
b tripping restraint according to percentage characteristic activated by detection of:
v external fault or machine starting
v sensor saturation or disconnection
v transformer energizing (harmonic 2 restraint)
152

current direction.
Characteristics
curve

DE88140
b type 1, projection
b type 2, according to the magnitude of the residual current phasor.
4
b no timer hold
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection compensated neutral systems.

DE88141
It comprises an earth fault function associated with direction detection, and picks up if
the earth fault function in the chosen direction (line or busbar) is activated.
curve
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection

DE52064

residual current.
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protection. b choice of tripping direction
b no timer hold
153
Directional power protection Machine protection functions

functions
ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower Protection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection
Two-way protection based on calculated active power, of motor no-load operation.
for the following applications: It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains stable during breaker
b active overpower protection to detect overloads and tripping and may be inhibited by a logic input.
allow load shedding
b reverse active power protection: ANSI 48/51LR - Locked rotor / excessive starting time
v against generators running like motors when the Protection of motors against overheating caused by:
generators consume active power b excessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient
v against motors running like generators when the supply voltage.
motors supply active power. The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be
considered as starting.
ANSI 32Q - Directional reactive b locked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher):
overpower v in normal operation, after a normal start
Two-way protection based on calculated reactive v directly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with
power to detect field loss on synchronous machines: detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by
b reactive overpower protection for motors which the underspeed function.
consume more reactive power with field loss
b reverse reactive overpower protection for generators ANSI 66 - Starts per hour
which consume reactive power with field loss. Protection against motor overheating caused by:
ANSI 37P - Directional active underpower number of starts is reached, after counting of:
Two-way protection based on calculated active power v starts per hour (or adjustable period)
Checking of active power flows: v consecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut
b to adapt the number of parallel sources to fit the down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start)
network load power demand b starts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only
b to create an isolated system in an installation with its allowed after an adjustable waiting time.
4 own generating unit.

Protection of synchronous machines against field loss, based on the calculation of
positive sequence impedance on the machine terminals or transformer terminals in
the case of transformer-machine units.
Characteristics
b 2 circular characteristics defined by reactances Xa, Xb and Xc
DE88142
2 circular tripping characteristics of ANSI 40 protection.
b tripping when the machine’s positive sequence impedance enters one of the
circular characteristics.
b definite (DT) time delay for each circular characteristic
b setting assistance function included in SFT2841 software to calculate the values
of Xa, Xb and Xc according to the electrical characteristics of the machine (and
transformer, when applicable).
154
ANSI 78PS - Pole slip Characteristics

Protection against loss of synchronism on synchronous b circular characteristic centered at origin defined by adjustable set point Zs
machines, based on calculated active power.
DE88143
b tripping according to the equal-area criterion,
time-delayed
b tripping according to power swing (number of active
power swings):
v suitable for generators capable of withstanding high
electrical and mechanical constraints
v to be set as a number of rotations.
The 2 types of operation may be used independently or
at the same time.
ANSI 12 - Overspeed
Detection of machine overspeed, based on the speed
calculated by pulse-counting, to detect synchronous
generator racing due to loss of synchronism, or for Circular tripping characteristic of ANSI 21B protection.
process monitoring, for example.
b time-delayed definite time (DT) tripping when one of the three apparent
ANSI 14 - Underspeed impedances enters the circular tripping characteristic.
Machine speed monitoring based on the speed
calculated by pulse-counting: ANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent energization
b detection of machine underspeed after starting, for Checking of generator starting sequence to detect inadvertent energization of
process monitoring, for example generators that are shut down (a generator which is energized when shut down runs
b zero speed data for detection of locked rotor upon like a motor).
starting. Consists of an instantaneous phase overcurrent protection confirmed by a time-
delayed undervoltage protection function.
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained
overcurrent ANSI 64G - 100 % stator earth fault
Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators.
The current tripping set point is voltage-adjusted in
order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator
Protection of generators with earthed neutral against phase-to-earth insulation faults
in stator windings. This function may be used to protect generators connected to
step-up transformers
4
which cause voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit 100 % stator earth fault is a combination of two protection functions:
current. b ANSI 59N/64G1: neutral voltage displacement, protection of 85 % to 90 % of the
Characteristics stator winding, terminal end.
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping b ANSI 27TN/64G2: thrid harmonic undervoltage, protection of 10 % to 20 % of the
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized stator winding, neutral point end.
IDMT curves) or customized curve
DE88144

Phase-to-phase short-circuit protection, for generators,
based on the calculation of apparent phase-to-phase
impedance. Stator winding of a generator protected 100 % by the combination of ANSI 59N and ANSI 27TN
U21 protection functions.
Z 21 = ----------------
I2 – I1
apparent impedance between phases 1 and 2.

ANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third harmonic undervoltage
Protection of generators with earthed neutral against phase-to-earth insulation faults,
by the detection of a reduction of third harmonic residual voltage.
Protects the 10 to 20 % of the stator winding, neutral point end, not protected by the
ANSI 59N/64G1 function, neutral voltage displacement.
Characteristics
b choice of 2 tripping principles, according to the sensors used:
v fixed third harmonic undervoltage set point
v adaptive neutral and terminal third harmonic voltage comparator set point
b time-delayed definite time (DT) tripping.
ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/Buchholz

Protection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs
linked to devices integrated in the transformer.

Protection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the temperature
inside equipment fitted with sensors:
b motor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings.
Characteristics
b 16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs
155

ANSI 24 - Overfluxing (V/Hz) ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
Protection which detects overfluxing of transformer Detection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
or generator magnetic circuits by calculating the ratio power supply quality.
between the greatest phase-to-neutral or phase-to-
phase voltage divided by the frequency. ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
Characteristics
power supply quality.
b machine coupling to be set up
The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding.
b definite time (DT) or IDMT time delays (choice of
Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and
3 curves).
presence of remanent voltage by a restraint in the event of a continuous decrease of
ANSI 27D - Positive sequence the frequency, which is activated by parameter setting.
undervoltage ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
Protection of motors against faulty operation due Protection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding
to insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and control. Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to
detection of reverse rotation direction. transient voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift
Protection used to check that remanent voltage Disconnection
sustained by rotating machines has been cleared In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the "rate of
before allowing the busbar supplying the machines to change of frequency" protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in
be re-energized, to avoid electrical and mechanical view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to:
transients. b protect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization
b avoid supplying loads outside the installation.
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage Load shedding
Protection of motors against voltage sags or detection The "rate of change of frequency" protection function is used for load shedding in
of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic combination with the underfrequency protection to:
load shedding or source transfer. b either accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload
4
Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral b or inhibit shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that
voltage, each voltage being monitored separately. should not be solved by shedding.
Characteristics
b IDMT curve.
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage
Detection of abnormally high network voltage or
checking for sufficient voltage to enable source
transfer.
Works with phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral
voltage, each voltage being monitored separately.

voltage
b ANSI 59N: in isolated neutral systems
b ANSI 59N/64G1: in stator windings of generators
with earthed neutral. Protects the 85 % to 90 % of
the winding, terminal end, not protected by the ANSI
27TN/64G2 function, third harmonic undervoltage.
Characteristics
b definite time (DT) curve 1
b IDMT curve. 0.9
0.8
0.7
phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault, 0.6
U / Un
detected by the measurement of negative sequence 0.5

voltage. 0.4
FRT (fault ride through) 0.3
Custom "Grid code" curve 0.2
Production installations must stay connected to the grid 0.1
whenever the voltage is higher than that defined by the 0
"Grid code" curve. The custom curve is defined point by 0 0.5 1 1.5
point, with the disconnection time Tc in seconds on the Tc in sec.
X-axis and the voltage U/Un in pu on the Y-axis.
Custom "Grid code" curve
156
Customized tripping curve

PE88107
Defined point by point using the SFT2841 setting and operating software tool, this
curve may be used to solve all special cases involving protection coordination or
revamping.
IDMT tripping curves

Current IDM T tripping curves
Customized tripping curve set using SFT2841 software.

IEC curves
k α β
Standard inverse / A 0.14 0.02 2.97
k
t d( I) = --------------------- × ---
T Very inverse / B 13.5 1 1.50
 --I---  – 1 β
α
Long time inverse / B 120 1 13.33
 Is 
Extremely inverse / C 80 2 0.808
Ultra inverse 315.2 2.5 1
RI curve
4
Equation: 1 T
td ( I ) = -------------------------------------------------------- × -------------------
I –1 3 ,1706
0 ,339 – 0,236 -----  
 Is 
IEEE curves
A B p β
Moderately inverse 0.010 0.023 0.02 0.241
 
 A  T Very inverse 3.922 0.098 2 0.138
----------- + B  × ---
td ( I ) = -------------
 I  p  β Extremely inverse 5.64 0.0243 2 0.081
 -Is
---
 –
1 
IAC curves
A B C D E β
Inverse 0.208 0.863 0.800 -0.418 0.195 0.297
 
 B D E  T Very inverse 0.090 0.795 0.100 -1.288 7.958 0.165
td ( I ) = A + -------------------- + ----------------------2- + --------------------3--- x -----
 I
---- – C  ----- – C I ----- – C   β
I Extremely inverse 0.004 0.638 0.620 1.787 0.246 0.092
 Is  Is  Is 
157
Equation for EPATRB, EPATRC

DE88145
EPATRB
For 0,6 A y I0 y 6,4 A
td ( I0 ) = 85
------,---386 T----
--------- x ----
I0 0, 975 0, 8
For 6,4 A y Io y 200,0 A

140
---------,---213
td ( I0 ) = -- T----
--------- x ----
I0 0, 975 0, 8
For I0 > 200,0 A

td (I0) = T
EPATR-C Standard curve (logarithmic scale).

EPATRC
For 0,6 A y I0 y 200,0 A
DE88146
td ( I0 ) = 72 × I0 – 2 /3 x ---T
--------
2 ,10
For I0 > 200,0 A

td (I0) = T
4 EPATR-B Standard curve (logarithmic scale).
Voltage IDMT tripping curves

Equation for ANSI 27 - undervoltage Equation for ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
td ( I ) = ------------T----------- td ( I ) = ------------T-----------
V  --V
-----  1
1 – -------   Vs  –
Vs 
Voltage/frequency ratio IDMT tripping curves

Equation for ANSI 27 - undervoltage Curve type P
With G = V/f or U/f A 0.5
B 1
td ( G ) = -------------1-------------- x T
 ---G p C 2
----- 1 
 Gs – 
158
Sepam series 80 Main characteristics
Setting of IDMT tripping curves

Time delay T or TMS factor
The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI
b TMS factor, factor shown as T/b in the equations on the left.
Timer hold
DE88340

configuration.
Example of use: normal / backup mode network
b group A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the
utility
backup generator.
4
modes.
Examples of use:
ONAF)
Measurement origin
The measurement origin needs to be indicated for each unit of the protection
DE88147
functions that may use measurements of different origins.

The setting links a measurement to a protection unit and allows the protection units to
be distributed optimally among the measurements available according to the sensors
connected to the analog inputs.
Example: distribution of ANSI 50N/51N function units for transformer earth fault
protection:
b 2 units linked to measured I0 for transformer primary protection
b 2 units linked to measured I'0 for transformer secondary protection
b 2 units linked to I0S for protection upstream of the transformer
b 2 units linked to I'0S for protection downstream of the transformer.
Summary table
Measurement origin: example. Characteristics Protection functions
2 groups of settings A et B 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC
67N/67NC type 2, 46
67N/67NC type 2, 46
67N/67NC type 2
EPATR curves 50N/51N
Voltage IDMT curves 27, 59N, 24
Customized curve 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2
Timer hold 50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
159

ANSI 12 - Overspeed
100 to 160 % of Wn 1 to 300 s
ANSI 14 - Underspeed
10 to 100 % of Wn 1 to 300 s
Impedance Zs 0.05 to 2.00 Vn/Ib
ANSI 24 - Overfluxing (V/Hz)
IDMT type A, B or C
Gs set point 1.03 to 2 pu Definite time 0.1 to 20000 s
IDMT 0.1 to 1250 s
ANSI 25 - Synchro-check
Measured voltages Phase-to-phase Phase-to-neutral
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage
Synchro-check setpoints
dUs set point 3 % to 30 % of Unp sync1 3 % to 30 % of Vnp sync1
dfs set point 0.05 to 0.5 Hz 0,05 to 0,5 Hz
dPhi set point 5 to 80° 5 to 80°
Us high set point 70 % to 110 % Unp sync1 70 % to 110 % Vnp sync1
Us low set point 10 % to 70 % Unp sync1 10 % to 70 % Vnp sync1
Other settings
Lead time 0 to 0.5 s 0 to 0.5 s
4 Operating modes: no-voltage conditions Dead1 AND Live2

for which coupling is allowed Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 AND Live2
Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 XOR Dead2 Dead1 XOR Dead2
Dead1 OR Dead2 Dead1 OR Dead2
Dead1 AND Dead2 Dead1 AND Dead2
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage (L-L) or (L-N)
IDMT
Set point 5 to 100 % of Unp 0.05 to 300 s
Measurement origin Main channels (U) or additional channels (U’)
ANSI 27D - Positive sequence undervoltage
ANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third harmonic undervoltage
Vs set point (fixed) 0.2 to 20 % of Vntp 0.05 to 300 s
K set point (adaptive) 0.1 to 0.2 0.05 to 300 s
Positive sequence undervoltage 50 to 100 % of Unp
Minimum apparent power 1 to 90 % of Sb (Sb = 3.Un.Ib)
1 to 120 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 32Q - Directional reactive overpower
5 to 120 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
0.05 to 1 Ib 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 37P - Directional active underpower
5 to 100 % of Sn (1) 0.1 s to 300 s
Alarm set point TS1 0 °C to 180 °C or 32 °F to 356 °F
Trip set point TS2 0 °C to 180 °C or 32 °F to 356 °F
Common point: Xa 0.02 Vn/Ib to 0.2 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ
Circle 1: Xb 0.2 Vn/Ib to 1.4 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ 0.05 to 300 s
Circle 2: Xc 0.6 Vn/Ib to 3 Vn/Ib + 187.5 kΩ 0.1 s to 300 s
(1) Sn = 3.In.Unp.
160

Schneider Electric
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
RI² (setting constant from 1 to 100)
Is set point 0.1 to 5 Ib Definite time 0.1 to 300 s
0.1 to 5 Ib (Schneider Electric) IDMT 0.1 to 1s
0.1 to 1 Ib (IEC, IEEE)
0.03 to 0.2 Ib (RI²)
Measurement origin Main channels (I) or additional channels (I’)
ANSI 48/51LR -Locked rotor / excessive starting time
Is set point 0.5 Ib to 5 Ib ST starting time 0.5 to 300 s
LT and LTS time delays 0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for cables
Admissible current 1 to 1.73 Ib
Time constant T1 1 to 600 mn
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for capacitors
Alarm current 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib
Trip current 1.05 Ib to 1.70 Ib
Positioning of the hot tripping curve Current setting 1.02 x trip current to 2 Ib
Time setting 1 to 2000 minutes
(variable range depending on the trip current and current setting)
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload for machines Mode 1 Mode 2
Accounting for negative sequence component
Time constant Heating
Cooling
0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9
T1: 1 to 600 mn
T2: 5 to 600 mn
T1: 1 to 600 mn
T2: 5 to 600 mn
4
Alarm and tripping set points (Es1 and Es2) 0 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity
Initial thermal capacity used (Es0) 0 to 100 %
Switching of thermal settings condition by logic input
by Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib
Maximum equipment temperature 60 to 200 °C (140 °F to 392 °F)
ANSI 49RMS - Motor thermal overload
Choice of thermal model 2 time constants/generic (see settings associated with generic thermal overload)
Current set point - change of thermal 1 to 10 pu of lb (± 0.1 pu of lb)
settings
Characteristic times Operating time accuracy ± 2 % or ±1 s
Stator thermal settings
Time constants Motor thermal capacity used ( long) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Stator thermal capacity used ( short 1 to 60 mn ± 0.1 mn
Cooling ( cool) 5 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Tripping current set point (K) 50 to 173 % of Ib (± 1 % of Ib)
Alarm current set point 50 to 173 % of Ib (± 1 % of Ib)
Thermal exchange coefficient between 0 to 1 (± 0.01)
the stator and the motor ( )
Current characterizing hot state 0.5 to 1 pu of Ib (± 0.1 pu of lb)
Accounting for ambient temperature yes / no
Maximum equipment temperature (Tmax) 70 to 250 °C (± 1 °C) or 158 to 482 °F (± 1 °F)
Rotor thermal settings
Locked rotor amperes (IL) 1 to 10 pu of Ib (± 0.01 pu of lb)
Locked rotor torque (LRT) 0.2 to 2 pu of nominal torque (+/- 0.01 pu of nominal torque)
Locked rotor cold limit time (Tc) 1 to 300 s (± 0.1 s)
Locked rotor hot limit time (Th) 1 to 300 s (± 0.1 s)
161

ANSI 49RMS - Transformer thermal overload
Measurement origin I1, I2, I3 / I'1, I'2, I'3
Choice of thermal model Dry-type transformer
Immersed transformer
Generic
Type of dry-type transformer Natural ventilation (AN) / Forced ventilation (AF)
Type of oil-filled transformer Distribution ONAN / Power ONAN / ONAF / OF / OD
Alarm set point ( alarm) Immersed transformer: 98 to 160 °C (± 1 °C) or 208 to 320 °F (± 1 °F)
Tripping set point ( trip) Immersed transformer: 98 to 160 °C (± 1 °C) or 208 to 320 °F (± 1 °F)
Time constant for dry-type transfo ( ) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
Time constant for oil-filled transfo winding ( wdg) 1 to 600 mn ± 1 mn
oil ( oil) 5 to 600 mn ± 1 mn

ANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent energization
Is set point 0.05 to 4 In
Vs set point 10 to 100 % Unp T1: 0 to 10 s
T2: 0 to 10 s
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
DT
4
RI DT
IA : I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Customized DT
Confirmation None
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault
RI DT
EPATR-B, EPATR-C DT
Customized DT
0.6 to 5 A EPATR-B 0.5 to 1 s
0.6 to 5 A EPATR-C 0.1 to 3 s
Measurement origin I0 input, I’0 input, sum of phase currents I0Σ or sum of phase currents I’0Σ
162

ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrent
RI DT
Customized DT
ANSI 51C - Capacitor bank unbalance
Is set point 0.05 A to 2 I’n Definite time 0.1 to 300 s
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage (L-L) or (L-N)
Set point and time delay 50 to 150 % of Unp or Vnp 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT
Set point 2 to 80 % of Unp Definite time 0.05 to 300 s
2 to 10 % of Unp IDMT 0.1 to 100 s
Measurement origin Main channels (U), additional channels (U’) or neutral-point voltage Vnt
Is0 set point 0.05 to 0.8 In (In u 20 A)
0.1 to 0.8 In (In < 20 A) 4
Measurement origin Main channels (I, I0) or additional channels (I’, I’0)
Permitted number of consecutive cold starts (Nc) 1 to 5 Delay between consecutive starts 1 to 90 mn
Permitted number of consecutive hot starts (Nh) 1 to (Nc - 1) Delay between stop/start 0 to 90 mn
RI DT
Customized DT
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, projection (type 1)
Is0 set point 0.01 to 15 In0 (mini. 0,1 A) Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
Memory time T0mem time 0; 0.05 s to 300 s
V0mem validity set point 0; 2 to 80 % of Unp
Measurement origin I0 input, I’0 input
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is
163

ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude (type 2)
RI DT
Customized DT
Measurement origin I0 input, I’0 input or sum of phase currents I0S
ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional earth fault, according to I0 vector magnitude directionalized on a tripping sector
Tripping sector start angle 0° to 359°
Tripping sector end angle 0° to 359°
Is0 set point CSH core balance CT (2 A rating) 0.1 A to 30 A Definite time Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
1 A CT 0.005 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT + ACE990 (range 1) 0.01 to 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Measurement origin I0 input or I’0 input
ANSI 78PS - Pole slip
Stabilization delay 1 to 300 s
Maximum variation of internal angle 100 to 1000 °
4 Confirmation delay
Equal-area criterion
Confirmation delay
0 to 300 ms
0,1 to 300 s
Power swings
Number of turns 1 to 30
Maximum time between 2 turns 1 to 300 s
0.1 to 10 Hz/s 0.15 to 300 s
ANSI 87M - Machine différential
Ids set point 0.05 to 0.5 In (In u 20 A)
0.1 to 0.5 In (In < 20 A)
ANSI 87T - Transformer differential
High set point 3 to 18 In1
Percentage-based curve
Ids set point 30 to 100 % In1
Slope Id/It 15 to 50 %
Slope Id/It2 without, 50 to 100 %
Slope change point 1 to 18 In1
Restraint on energization
Current threshold 1 to 10 %
Delay 0 to 300 s
Restraint on CT loss
Activity On / Off
Retenues sur taux d'harmoniques Classic Self-adapting
Choice of restraint Classic Self-adapting
High set point On On / Off
Harmonic 2 percentage set point off, 5 to 40 %
Harmonic 2 restraint per phase / total
Harmonic 5 percentage set point off, 5 to 40 %
Harmonic 5 restraint per phase / total
164
network operation:
functions
v creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
v creation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
b with the Logipam option, Sepam can provide the most varied control and
monitoring functions, programmed using the SFT2885 programming software that
implements the Logipam ladder language.
Operating principle
3 phases:
output module
v local control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
v activation of outputs to control a device
- by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link
- by real-time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram.
4
PE88037
The 5 outputs included in the Sepam series 80 base unit may be extended by adding
1, 2 or 3 MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6 output relays.
After the number of MES120 modules required for the needs of an application is set,
the logic inputs are assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which
covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs
within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for
undervoltage type operation.
Maximum Sepam series 80 configuration with 3 MES120 Logic inputs and outputs GOOSE
modules: 42 inputs and 23 outputs.
GOOSE logic inputs are used with the IEC61850 communication protocol.
The GOOSE inputs are divided between the 2 GSE virtual modules with 16 logic
inputs.
165

Control of breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils:
b contactors with latched orders.
The function processes all breaking device closing and tripping conditions, based on:
b specific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser, synchro-check).
conditions.
Automatic transfer (AT)

This function transfers busbar supply from one source to another. It concerns
substations with two incomers, with or without coupling.
The function carries out:

b automatic transfer with a break if there is a loss of voltage or a fault
b manual transfer and return to normal operation without a break, with or without
synchro-check
b control of the coupling circuit breaker (optional)
b selection of the normal operating mode
DE88327
b the necessary logic to ensure that at the end of the sequence, only 1 circuit breaker
out of 2 or 2 out of 3 are closed.
The function is distributed between the two Sepam units protecting the two incomers.
4
The synchro-check function (ANSI 25) is carried out by the optional MCS025 module,
in conjunction with one of the two Sepam units.
Load shedding - Automatic restart

Automatic load regulation on electrical networks by load shedding followed by
automatic restarting of motors connected to the network
Load shedding
Automatic transfer with synchro-check controlled by
The breaking device opens to stop motors in case of:
Sepam series 80.
b detection of a network voltage sag by the positive sequence undervoltage
b protection function ANSI 27D
b receipt of a load shedding order on a logic input.
Automatic restart
The motors disconnected as a result of the network voltage sag are automatically
restarted:
b after the return of network voltage is detected by the positive sequence
undervoltage protection function ANSI 27D
b and a time delay has run out, so as to stagger motor restarts.
De-excitation
Interruption of a synchronous generator’s excitation supply and tripping of the
generator breaking device in case of:
b detection of an excitation system fault
b receipt of a de-excitation order on a logic input or via the communication link.
166
Genset shutdown
Shutdown of the driving machine, tripping of the breaking device and interruption of
the generator excitation supply in case of:
b receipt of a genset shutdown order on a logic input or via the communication link.
Control of capacitor banks

This function controls 1 to 4 switches for capacitor steps, taking into account all the
closing and tripping conditions determined by the ANSI 94/69 function for control of
the switchgear.
Manual or automatic control, controlled by an external reactive-energy regulator.


50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC)

The tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs lx can be
power failure.

4
b locally, with the key reset

contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 "Lockout relay"
function.

167

PE88028
LED indication
b 2 LEDs, on the front and back of Sepam, indicate the unit operating status, and
are visible when a Sepam without a UMI is mounted inside the LV compartment, with
access to connectors:
v red "key" LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal
failure)
b 9 yellow LEDs on the Sepam front panel:
Local annunciation on Sepam display

Events and alarms may be indicated locally on Sepam’s advanced UMI or on the
Local indications on the Sepam front panel. mimic-based UMI by:
v English, factory-set messages, not modifiable
v local language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen
PE88108_SE

b the lighting up of one of the 9 yellow LEDs, according to the LED assignment,
which is set using SFT2841.
Alarm processing
The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages are
linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the
SFT2841 "Alarms" screen.
b to clear the message from the display, press the key
4 b after the fault has disappeared, press the key: the light goes off and Sepam is reset
b the list of alarm messages remains accessible ( key) and may be cleared by
SFT2841: alarm history. pressing the clear key from “Alarms” screen, but can not be cleared from “Alarm
history” screen.
168
Local control using the mimic-based UMI

PE88038
Sepam control mode

A key-switch on the mimic-based UMI is used to select the Sepam control mode.
Three modes are available : Remote, Local or Test.
In Remote mode:
b remote control orders are taken into account
b local control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open
order.
In Local mode:
b remote control orders are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open
order
b local control orders are enabled.
Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventive-
maintenance operations:
b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode
b no remote indications (TS) are sent via the communication link.
Local control using the mimic-based UMI. The Logipam programming software can be used to customize control-mode
processing.
View device status on the animated mimic diagram

For safe local control of devices, all information required by operators can be
displayed simultaneously on the mimic-based UMI:
b single-line diagram of the equipment controlled by Sepam, with an animated,
graphic indication of device status in real time
b the desired current, voltage and power measurements.
The local-control mimic diagram can be customized by adapting one of the supplied,
predefined diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch.
Local control of devices

All the devices for which opening and closing are controlled by Sepam can be
controlled locally using the mimic-based UMI.
4
The most common interlock conditions can be defined be logic equations or by
Logipam.
The sure and simple operating procedure is the following:

b select the device to be controlled by moving the selection window using the keys
or . Sepam checks whether local control of the selected device is authorized
and informs the operator (selection window with a solid line)
b selection confirmation for the device to be controlled by pressing the key (the
selection window flashes)
b device control by pressing:
v key : open order
v or key : close order.
169
functions
b creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
b creation of custom mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
Operating principle
DE60679
4
Logic equation editor
PE88111
v etc.
sequences, etc.
Note that the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the
Logipam programming software.

b logic inputs
using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as
time delays, bistables and time programmer.

SFT2841: logic equation editor. b assigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix
170
Personalized alarm and operating messages

software tool.
b in the SFT2841 "Alarms" and "Alarm History" screens.
Local-control mimic diagram

PE88109
The mimic-diagram editor in the SFT2841 software can be used to create a single-
line diagram corresponding exactly to the equipment controlled by Sepam.
Two procedures are available:
b rework a diagram taken from the library of standard diagrams in the SFT2841
software
b creation of an original diagram : graphic creation of the single-line diagram,
positioning of symbols for the animated devices, insertion of measurements, text,
etc.
Creation of a customized mimic diagram is made easy:

b library of predefined symbols: circuit breakers, earthing switch, etc.
b creation of personalized symbols.
SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.
Control matrix
PE88110

b logic inputs
b logic equations or Logipam program to the following output data:
b output relays
4
171
Sepam series 80 Customized functions using Logipam
The SFT2885 programming software (Logipam) can be used to enhance Sepam by

programming specific control and monitoring functions.
Only the Sepam series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080
option can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by Logipam.
Operating principle
DE88347
4 Logipam programming software

PE88036
The Logipam SFT2885 programming software can be used to:

b adapt predefined control and monitoring functions
b program specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined
versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required
by the application.
It is made up of:
b a ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program
complex control functions
b a simulator for complete program debugging
b a code generator to run the program on Sepam.
The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete
file can be printed.
Offering more possibilities than the logic-equation editor, Logipam can be used to
create the following functions :
b specific automatic transfer functions
SFT2885: Logipam programming software.
b motor starting sequences.
It is not possible to combine the functions programmed by Logipam with functions
adapted by the logic-equation editor in a given Sepam.
The Logipam program uses the input data from:

b logic inputs
b local control orders transmitted by the mimic-based UMI.
The result of Logipam processing may then be:

b assigned to a logic output, directly or via the control matrix
b assigned to a LED or message via the control matrix
b used by the predefined control and monitoring functions
172

characteristics:
b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI) Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam series 80 base
b working language units:
b type of base unit connector b mimic-based UMI
b type of current sensor connector b advanced UMI.
b type of voltage sensor connector. The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the
A Sepam series 80 with a remote advanced UMI is made up of:

b a bare base unit without any UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment
v for flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for
The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented on
page 221.

PE88040
or in bar graphs
resetting
b display of the list of activated protection functions and the main settings of major
protection functions
b adaptation of activated protection function set points or time delays in response to
new operating constraints
4
b display of Logipam data: status of variables, timers
Sepam series 80 base unit with integrated advanced UMI.
Local control of devices using the mimic-based UMI

PE88041
The mimic-based UMI provides the same functions as the advanced UMI as well as
local control of devices:
b selection of the Sepam control mode
b view device status on the animated mimic diagram
b local opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam.

b menu-guided access to data
b excellent display quality under all lighting conditions : automatic contrast setting
Sepam series 80 base unit with mimic-based UMI.
Working language
PE88042
All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI or on the mimic-based
UMI are available in 2 languages:
b English, the default working language
v French
v Spanish
v another "local" language.
Connection of Sepam to the parameter setting tool

The SFT2841 parameter setting tool is required for Sepam protection and parameter
setting.
A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the RS 232 communication
port on the front of the unit or through the communication network.
173
Selection guide
Base unit With remote With integrated With mimic-based
advanced UMI advanced UMI UMI
PE88043
PE88040
PE88041
Functions
Local indication
Metering and diagnosis data b b b
Alarms and operating messages b b b
List of activated protection functions b b b
Main protection settings b b b
Version of Sepam and remote
b b b
modules
Status of logic inputs b b b
Logipam data b b b
4 Switchgear status on the animated

mimic diagram
Phasor diagram of currents or
b
b
voltages
Local control
Sepam reset b b b
Output testing b b b
Selection of Sepam control mode b
Device open/close order b
Characteristics
Screen
Size 128 x 64 pixels 128 x 64 pixels 128 x 240 pixels
Automatic contrast setting b b b
Backlit screen b b b
Keypad
Control-mode switch Remote / Local / Test
LEDs
Sepam operating status b base unit: 2 LEDs visible on back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back 2 LEDs, visible from front and back
visible on front
Indication LEDs 9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI 9 LEDs on front 9 LEDs on front
Mounting
b bare base unit, mounted at the Flush mounted on front of cubicle Flush mounted on front of cubicle
back of the compartment using
the AMT880 mounting plate
UMI module , flush mounted
174
PE88044
Standard removable memory cartridge

The cartridge contains all the Sepam characteristics:
b all Sepam protection and parameter settings
b all the metering and protection functions required for the application
b predefined control functions
b functions customized by control matrix or logic equations
b functions programmed by Logipam (optional)
b personalized local-control mimic diagram
b accumulated energies and switchgear diagnosis values
b working languages, customized and otherwise.
It may be made tamper-proof by lead sealing.
It is removable and easy to access on the front panel of Sepam to reduce
maintenance time.
If a base unit fails, simply:
b switch off Sepam and unplug connectors
b retrieve original cartridge
b replace the faulty base unit by a spare base unit (without cartridge)
Sepam series 80 memory cartridge and backup battery. b load the original cartridge into the new base unit
b plug in the connectors and switch Sepam on again:
Sepam is operational, with all its standard and customized functions, without
requiring any reloading of protection and parameter settings.
Extended removable memory cartridge

It offers the same functions as the standard cartridge with extended storage capacity.
DM101141EN
Disturbance recording Datalog Motor report

Cartridge
All applications Motor Others appl. Start Trend 4
Standard 20 s 3 records. 4 records 5 records 12 months
Extended 32 s 7 records 10 records 20 records 18 months
Backup battery
Standard lithium battery, 1/2 AA format, 3.6 Volts.
It allows the following data to be stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage:
b time-tagged event tables
b disturbance recording data
b peak demands, tripping context, etc
b date and time.
The battery presence and charge are monitored by Sepam.
The main data (e.g. protection and parameter settings) are saved in the event of an
auxiliary power outage, regardless of the state of the battery.

DC power supply voltage from 24 to 250 V DC.
Five relay outputs

The 5 relay outputs O1 to O5 on the base unit must be connected to connector
A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841
software.
O1 to O4 are 4 control outputs with one NO contact, used by default for the
switchgear control function:
b O2: switchgear closing inhibition
b O3: switchgear closing
b O4: available.
O5 is an indication output used by default for the watchdog function and has two
contacts, one NC and one NO.
175
Main connector and voltage and residual current input

PE88045
connector
b CCA620 screw-type connectors
b or CCA622 ring lug connectors.
The presence of the connector is monitored.
Connector for additional voltage inputs (Sepam B83)

CCT640 connector, removable and screw-lockable.
The presence of the CCT640 connector is monitored.
Phase current input connectors

b or CCA671 connector for LPCT sensors.
Spring clips
8 spring clips are supplied with the base unit to flush-mount Sepam in mounting
plates 1.5 to 6 mm thick.
Simple, tool-free installation.
AMT880 mounting plate

It is used to mount a Sepam without UMI inside the compartment with access to
4 AMT820 blanking plate

It fills in the space left when a standard model Sepam 2000 is replaced by a
Sepam series 80.
Spare base units

The following spares are available to replace faulty base units:
b base units with or without UMI, without cartridge or connectors
b all types of standard cartridges, with or without the Logipam option.

modification of the settings of Sepam series 80 units with integrated advanced UMIs.
of the Sepam unit.
Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs of
Sepam series 80 units Contact us to determine the serial number of the device on wich you can fit
the lead sealing accessory.
176

DE88156

diagnosis data.
10 Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms (or move
cursor up).
settings.
13 Display of Sepam and Logipam data.
16 Backup battery.
18 Door.
Front panel with mimic-based UMI

DE60682

4 Local close order.
5 Local open order.
6 Label identifying the indication LEDs. G82
7 7 yellow indication LEDs, 1 red LED (I), 1 green LED (o).

8 Move cursor up.
9 Confirm data entry.
10 Move cursor down.
12 Transparent door.
14 Mimic-based UMI display.
15 Sepam reset.
17 Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms.
18 Display of switchgear and network diagnosis data
(or LED test).
settings.
21 Display of Sepam and Logipam data.
22 Three-position key switch to select Sepam control
mode.
23 Backup battery.
25 Door.
177
Rear panel
1 Base unit.
2 8 fixing points for 4 spring clips.
DE88158
5 Gasket.
A
20-pin connector for:
b 24 V DC to 250 V DC auxiliary supply
b 5 relay outputs.
B1 Connector for 3 phase current I1, I2, I3 inputs.
B2 b Sepam T87, M87, M88, G87, G88:
connector for 3 phase current I'1, I'2, I'3 inputs
b Sepam B83: connector for
v 3 phase voltage V'1, V'2, V'3 inputs
v 1 residual voltage V’0 input.
b Sepam C86: connector for capacitor unbalance
current inputs.
C1 Modbus communication port 1.
C2 Modbus communication port 2.
D1 Remote module connection port 1.
D2 Remote module connection port 2.
E 20-pin connector for:

b phase voltage V1, V2, V3 inputs
4
b 1 residual voltage V0 input.
b 2 residual current I0, I'0 inputs.
F Communication port 3 for ACE850 modules only.
H1 Connector for 1st MES120 input/output module.
H2 Connector for 2nd MES120 input/output module.

H3 Connector for 3rd MES120 input/output module.
t Functional earth.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF DEFECTIVE COMMUNICATION
b Never use both communication ports C2 and F on
a Sepam series 80 at the same time.
b The only communication ports that can be used
simultaneously on a Sepam series 80 unit are
ports C1 and C2 or ports C1 and F .
equipement damage.
178
Weight
Base unit with advanced UMI Base unit with mimic-based UMI
Minimum weight (base unit without MES120) 2.4 kg (5.29 lb) 3.0 kg (6.61 lb)
Maximum weight (base unit with 3 MES120) 4.0 kg (8.82 lb) 4.6 kg (10.1 lb)
Sensor inputs
Phase current inputs 1 A or 5 A CT
Input impedance < 0.02 Ω
Consumption < 0.02 VA (1 A CT)
< 0.5 VA (5 A CT)
Continuous thermal withstand 4 In
1 second overload 100 In
Voltage inputs Phase Residual
Input impedance > 100 k Ω > 100 k Ω
Consommation < 0.015 VA (100 V VT) < 0.015 VA (100 V VT)
Continuous thermal withstand 240 V 240 V
1-second overload 480 V 480 V
Isolation of inputs in relation to Enhanced Enhanced
Relay outputs
Control relay outputs O101, O201 and O301
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Load L/R < 20 ms 6A/ 2A 0.5 A 0.2 A
Load L/R < 40 ms 4A/ 1A 0.2 A 0.1 A
Resistive load 8A
Load p.f. > 0.3 5A
Isolation of outputs in relation to
Enhanced
Annunciation relay output O5, O102 to O106, O202 to O206 and O302 to O306
4
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Load p.f. > 0.3 1A
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC -20 % / +10 %
Maximum consumption < 16 W
Inrush current < 10 A 10 ms
Battery
Format 1/2 AA lithium 3.6 V
Service life 10 years Sepam energized
Standard cartridge: 3 years minimum, typically 6 years Sepam not energized
Extended cartridge: 1.5 years minimum, typically 3 years Sepam not energized
179

Emission tests
EN 55022 A
EN 55022 A
Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255-22-3 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
IEC 61000-4-3 III 10 V/m; 80 MHz - 2 GHz
30 V/m non-modulated; 800MHz - 2GHz (1)
ANSI C37.90.2 (2004) 20 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 (1) IV 15 kV air ; 8 kV contact
IEC 60255-22-2 8 kV air; 6 kV contact
ANSI C37.90.3 8 kV air; 4 kV contact
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency (1) IEC 61000-4-8 4 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (1-3 s)
Immunity to pulsed magnetic fields (1) IEC 61000-4-9 IV 600 A/m
Immunity to magnetic fields with damped oscillating waves (1) IEC 61000-4-10 5 100 A/m
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255-22-6 III 10 V
Electrical fast transients/burst IEC 60255-22-4 A and B 4 kV; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV; 5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4 IV  4 kV; 2.5 kHz
ANSI C37.90.1 4 kV; 2.5 kHz
1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255-22-1 2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM
ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV CM; 2.5 kV DM
100 kHz damped sine wave IEC 61000-4-12 III 2 kV CM
IV (1) 4 kVCM ; 2,5 kV DM
10Mhz, 50Mhz damped oscillating wave CEI 61000-4-12 2,5KV CM; 2,5KV DM
Shell DEP 33.64.10.17
Slow damped oscillating wave (100 kHz to 1 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III 2 kV CM
Fast damped oscillating wave (3 MHz, 10 MHz, 30 MHz) IEC 61000-4-18 III
Surges IEC 61000-4-5 III 2 kV CM; 1 kV DM
4
GOST R 50746-2000 (1) IV 200 A
Immunity to conducted disturbances in common mode from IEC 61000-4-16 III
0 Hz to 150 kHz
Voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11 100 % during 100 ms
In operation
IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz - 13.2 Hz; a = ±1 mm
IEC 60068-2-64 2M1
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 10 Gn / 11 ms
De-energized
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 27 Gn / 11 ms
Jolts IEC 60255-21-2 2 20 Gn / 16 ms
During operation
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ad -25 °C
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bd +70 °C
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-78 Cab 10 days; 93 % RH ; 40 °C
Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Kb/2 6 days
Influence of corrosion/Gas test 2 IEC 60068-2-60 C 21 Days, 75% RH, 25°C, 500.10-9 vol/vol
H2S; 1000.10-9 vol/vol SO²
Influence of corrosion/Gas test 4 IEC 60068-2-60 Method 3 21 Days, 75% RH, 25°C,
10+/-5 H²S; 200+/-20 SO² ; 200+/-20 NO²,
10+/-5 Cl² (10-9 vol/vol)
100+/-20 H²S; 200+/-50 SO² ; 200+/-50
NO², 20+/-5 Cl² (10-9 vol/vol)
In storage (2)
Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068-2-14 Nb -25 °C at +70 °C; 5 °C/min
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25 °C
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bb +70 °C
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-78 Cab 56 days; 93 % RH; 40 °C
IEC 60068-2-30 Db 6 days; 95 % RH; 55 °C
(1) Test conducted with a mimic-based HMI in the case of GOST performance testing.
.
180

Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels IP20
NEMA Type 12
Fire withstand IEC 60695-2-11 650 °C with glow wire
P ower frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5 2 kV 1mn (2)
ANSI C37.90 1 kV 1 mn (indication output)
1.5 kV 1 mn (control output)
Functional safety
Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic IEC 61508, EN 61508 SIL2 Architecture, hardware and firmware
safety-related systems assessment
Certification
IEC60255-26 European directives:
harmonized standard
EMC European Directive CEM 2014/30/EU
Low Voltage European Directive 2014/35/EU
ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU (1)
UL
CSA
UL508-CSA C22.2 no. 14-95
CSA C22.2 no. 14-95/no. 0.17-00
File E212533
File 210625 4
(1) Sepam must be stored in its original packaging.

(2) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode.
(3) Except for communication: 1 kVrms.
(4) See the appendix in “Installation and operation” manual SEPED303003EN, “Functional Safety” section
181
Dimensions
mm
in
DE88159
DE88160
8.74
10.4
Front view of Sepam.
Side view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.
DE88161
DE88162
Cut-out. Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS
any jagged edges.
serious injury.

mm
in
DE88163
DE88164
8.43
5.55
Top view of Sepam with MES120, mounted with AMT880 and spring clips.
Mounting plate: 3 mm (0.11 In) thick.
182
DE88348 Sepam series 80 Sepam series 80
183
Sepam series 80 Connection
Screw type CCA620 b wiring with no fittings :
A , E v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
24-16)
v recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fittings:
6.35 mm ring lugs CCA622 b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4”)
(u AWG 24-12)
b tightening torque: 1.2 (13.27 lb-in)
White RJ45 plug CCA612
C1 , C2
Black RJ45 plug CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)
D1 , D2 CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
CCA774: L = 4 m (13.1 ft)
CCA785 for MCS025 module: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
Blue RJ45 plug CCA614
F
Ring lug Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding:
DE88166
4
Functional earth b maximum length: 500 mm (19.7 in)
4 mm ring lugs CCA630, CCA634 for b wire cross-section 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
B1 , B2 connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 lb-in)
LPCT sensors
CAUTION CAUTION
184
DE88349 Sepam series 80 Sepam B83
4 mm ring lugs CCA630, for connection of 1 A 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
B1 or 5 A CTs
Screw type CCT640 VT wiring: same as wiring for the CCA620
B2 Earthing connection: by 4 mm ring lug
For connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 , : see page 180 .
CAUTION CAUTION
185
Sepam series 80 Sepam C86
DE88360

4 mm ring lugs CCA630, for connection of 1 A 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
B1 or 5 A CTs
LPCT sensors
4 mm ring lugs CCA630, for connection of 1 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
B2 A, 2A or 5 A CTs
Functional earth Ring lugs Earthing braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding:
DE88166

b maximum length: 500 mm
For connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 , : see page 180.
186
Sepam series 80 Phase current inputs
Variant 1: phase current measurement by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)

CCA630/
DE88170
CCA634
Parameters
Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs

DE88171
Measurement of phase 1 and 3 currents is sufficient for all protection functions based
on phase current.
This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current, nor use of
ANSI 87T and 87M differential protection functions on the Sepam T87, M87, M88,
G87 and G88.
Parameters
4
Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA671
connector. It is necessary to connect 3 sensors; if only one or two sensors are
DE88172
connected, Sepam goes into fail-safe position.
Measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
The In parameter, primary rated current measured by an LPCT, is to be chosen from

the following values, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630,
666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
Parameter to be set using the SFT2841 software tool, to be completed by hardware
setting of the microswitches on the CCA671 connector.
It is not possible to use LPCT sensors for the following measurements:
b phase-current measurements for Sepam T87, M88 and G88 with ANSI 87T
transformer differential protection (connectors B1 and B2 )
b phase-current measurements for Sepam B83 (connector B1 )
b unbalance-current measurements for Sepam C86 (connector B2 ).
Parameters
Sensor type LPCT
Rated current (In) 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000,
1600, 2000 or 3150 A
Note: Parameter In must be set twice:
187

Description
Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3,
measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors.
Parameters
Sum of 3 Is In0 = In, CT primary current 0.01 to 40 In0 (minimum 0.1 A)
Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120, CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT (standard connection)
Description
DE88173
Parameters
Description
Residual current measurment by 1 A or 5 A CTs
DE88174
4 Parameters
DE88175
188

Description
DE88350

primary
primary.
Parameters
DE88351
Description
The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of
DE88178
1/n (50 y n y 1500) and the Sepam residual current input.

installation.
Parameters
(0.00578 y k y 0.04)
(0.00578 y k y 0.26316)
k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam
189
Main channels
Phase voltage input connection variants

Variant 1: measurement of Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 U)
(3 V, standard connection)
DE88179
DE88180
Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages allows This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.
the calculation of residual voltage, V0Σ.
Variant 3: measurement of Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 V)

1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 U)
4
DE88181
DE88182
voltage.
Residual voltage input connection variants

Variant 5: measurement of Variant 6: measurement of residual voltage Vnt
residual voltage V0 in generator neutral point
DE88183
DE88184
190
Additional channels for Sepam B83
Additional phase voltage input connection

variants
Variant 1: measurement of Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages (2 U’)
(3 V’, standard connection)
DE88185
DE88186
Measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages allows This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage.
the calculation of residual voltage, V’0Σ.
Variant 3: measurement of Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-neutral voltage (1 V’)

1 phase-to-phase voltage (1 U’)
4
DE88187
DE88188
voltage.
Additional residual voltage input connection

Variant 5: measurement of residual voltage V’0
DE88189
191
Additional channel for Sepam B80
Connection to measure one additional

voltage
DE88353
This connection should be used to measure:

b three phase-to-neutral voltages V1, V2, V3 on busbars no. 1
b one additional phase-to-neutral voltage V’1 (or one additional phase-to-phase
voltage U’21) on busbars no. 2.
DE88352
This connection should be used to measure:

b two phase-to-phase voltages U21, U32 and one residual voltage V0 on busbars
no. 1
b one additional phase-to-phase voltage U’21 (or one additional phase-to-neutral
voltage V’1) on busbars no. 2.
192
Available functions
The availability of certain protection and metering functions depend on the phase and
residual voltages measured by Sepam.
The table below gives the voltage input connection variants for which for each
protection and metering function dependent on measured voltages is available.
Example:
The directional overcurrent protection function (ANSI 67N/67NC) uses residual
voltage V0 as a polarization value.
It is therefore operational in the following cases:
b measurement of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and calculation of
V0Σ (3 V + V0Σ, variant 1)
b measurement of residual voltage V0 (variant 5).
The protection and metering functions which do not appear in the table below are
available regardless of the voltages measured.
Phase voltages measured 3 V + V0Σ 2U 1U 1V

(connection variant) (var. 1) (var. 2) (var. 3) (var. 4)
Residual voltage measured – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt – V0 Vnt
(connection variant) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6) (v. 5) (v. 6)
Protection functions dependent on voltages measured
Directional phase overcurrent 67 b b b b b b
Directional earth fault 67N/67NC b b b b b b
Directional active overpower 32P b b b b b b
Directional reactive active overpower 32Q b b b b b b
Directional active underpower 37P b b b b b b
Field loss (underimpedance) 40 b b b b b b
Pole slip, phase shift 78PS b b b b b b
Voltage-restrained overcurrent 50V/51V b b b b b b
Underimpedance 21B b b b b b b
Inadvertent energization
100 % stator earth fault
Overfluxing (V/Hz)
50/27
64G2/27TN
24
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b b b b b b b
4
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D bv bv b bv bv b
Remanent undervoltage 27R bv bv b bv bv b bvU bv b bvU bv b
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N) 27 bv bv b bv bv b bvU bv b bvU bv b
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N) 59 bv bv b bv bv b bvU bv b bvU bv b
Neutral voltage displacement 59N bv bv b bv b bv b bv b
Negative sequence overvoltage 47 bv bv b b bv b bv
Overfrequency 81H bv bv b bv bv b bvU bv b bvU bv b
Underfrequency 81L bv bv b bv bv b bvU bv b bvU bv b
Rate of change of frequency 81R b b b b b b
Measurements dependent on voltages measured
Phase-to-phase voltage U21, U32, U13 or U’21, U’32, U’13 bv bv b bv bv bv U21, U21 U21
U’21
Phase-to-neutral voltage V1, V2, V3 or V’1, V’2, V’3 bv bv b b V1, V1, V1
V’1 V’1
Residual voltage V0 or V’0 bv bv b bv bv bv
Neutral point voltage Vnt b b b b
Third harmonic neutral point or residual voltage b b b b
Positive sequence voltage Vd or V’d / bv bv b bv bv b
negative sequence voltage Vi or V’i
Frequency bv bv bv bv bv bv bvU bv bv bvU bv bv
Active / reactive / apparent power: P, Q, S b b b b b b b b b
Peak demand power PM, QM b b b b b b b b b
Active / reactive / apparent power per phase : b (1) b (1) b (1) b (1) P1/ P1/ P1/
P1/P2/P3, Q1/Q2/Q3, S1/S2/S3 Q1/ Q1/ Q1/S1
S1 S1
Power factor b b b b b b b b b
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh) b b b b b b b b b
Total harmonic distortion, voltage Uthd b b b b b b b b b
Phase displacement φ0, φ’0 b b b b b b
Phase displacement φ1, φ2, φ3 b b b b b b
Apparent positive sequence impedance Zd b b b b b b
Apparent phase-to-phase impedances Z21, Z32, Z13 b b b b b b
b Function available on main voltage channels.
v Function available on Sepam B83 additional voltage channels.
U Function available on Sepam B80 additional voltage channel, according to the type of the additional voltage measured.
(1) If all three phase currents are measured.
193
TOOLS
schneider-electric.com The electrical

installation guide
This international site allows you According to IEC 60364

to access all the Schneider Electric This guide, part of the
products in just 2 clicks Schneider Electric offer, is
via comprehensive range data- the essential tool to "guide"
sheets, with direct links to: you any time in your business:
ppcomplete library: technical ppdesign office, consultant
documents, catalogs, FAQs, ppcontractor, panelbuilder
brochures… ppteacher, trainer.
ppselection guides from Comprehensive
the e-catalog. and concrete information on:
ppproduct discovery sites and ppall the new technical solutions
their Flash animations. ppall the components of an
You will also find illustrated installation from a global point of
overviews, news to which you view
can subscribe, the list of country ppall the IEC standards modifications
contacts… ppall the fundamental
5 electrotechnical knowledge
ppall the design stages, from medium
to low voltage.
194
Sepam series 20 Additional modules and
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
accessories
Sepam series 80
Range description 5
Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 51
Sepam series 60 89
Sepam series 80 139
Software 197
Sepam software 197
SFT2841 setting and operating software 198
Function 198
SFT2841 connection to Sepam 200
Adaptation of the predefined functions 201
SFT2826 disturbance recording data display software 202
SFT850 configuration software for IEC 61850 protocol 203
SFT2885 programming software - Logipam 204
Power Launcher 206
Logic input / output modules 207

MES114 modules 207
Logic input / output assignment of Sepam series 20 209
Logic input / output assignment of Sepam series 40 210
MES120, MES120G, MES120H 14 input / 6 output module 211
Presentation 211
Installation 212
Logic input / output assignment 213
Remote modules 217

Selection guide 217
Connection 218
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module 219
MSA141 Analog output module 221
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module 222
MCS025 Synchro-check module 224
5
.../...
195
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
Sepam series 80
234
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
245
249
249
251
257
258
259
260
260
261
262
265
266
and CSH300 268
270
271
5 275
196
Software Sepam software
Presentation
Three types of Sepam PC software are available:
b SFT2841 setting and operating software
b SFT2826 disturbance recording data display software
b SFT2885 programming software for the Sepam series 80 (Logipam)
b SFT850 advanced-configuration software for IEC 61850 protocol.
SFT2841 and SFT2826 software

SFT2841 and SFT2826 software is provided on the same CD-ROM as the Sepam
documentation in PDF format.
PC connection cord
In order to use the SFT2841 software in point to point connected mode:
- the CCA783 PC connection cord, to be ordered separately, is designed to connect
a PC to the RS 232 port on the front panel of a Sepam unit.
- the CCA784 PC connection cord, to be ordered separately, is designed to connect
a PC to the USB port on the front panel of a Sepam unit.
The USB/RS232 TSXCUSB232 converter may be used with the CCA783 connection
cord for connection to a USB port.
SFT2885 software
SFT2885 is available on a separate CD-ROM.
SFT850 software
SFT850 is available on a separate CD-ROM.
Minimum configuration required

SFT2841 and SFT2826 software
Operating systems Microsoft 2000/XP
RAM 128 MB
Space on disk 200 MB
SFT2885
RAM 64 MB
Space on disk
SFT850
30 MB
5
RAM 512 MB
Space on disk 200 MB
197
Software SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Function
The SFT2841 software is the setting and operating tool for Sepam series 20, Sepam
series 40, Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
It may be used:
b prior to commissioning and without connection to Sepam, to prepare Sepam
protection and parameter settings
b during commissioning, on a PC connected point-to-point to the front panel Sepam:
v to load, unload and modify Sepam protection and parameter settings
v to obtain all measurements and useful information during commissioning
b during operation, on a PC connected to a set of Sepam relays via an E-LAN
multipoint communication network:
v to manage the protection system
v to monitor the status of the electrical network
v to run diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electrical network.
Preparation of Sepam parameter and protection settings in

unconnected mode
PE88112
b configuration of Sepam and optional modules, and entry of general settings

b enabling/disabling of functions and entry of protection settings
b adaptation of predefined control and monitoring functions
b creation of personalized mimic diagrams for local display.
Sepam commissioning via a point-to-point connection to the

front panel
b access to all functions available in unconnected mode, after entering the
protection-setting or parameter-setting password
b transfer of Sepam parameter and protection setting file, prepared in unconnected
mode (downloading function), protected by the parameter-setting password
b display of all measurements and useful information during commissioning 
SFT2841: Sepam series 80 hardware configuration.
b display of logic input, logic output and LED status
b test of logic outputs
b display of Logipam variables (Sepam series 80 only)
b setting of Logipam parameters (configuration bits, timers, etc.), (Sepam series 80
PE88113
only)
b modification of passwords.
Management of protection functions and network diagnostics
5 with an E-LAN multipoint network connection

b reading of all Sepam protection and parameter settings, modifications following
entry of the protection-setting or parameter-setting password
b display of all the Sepam measurement data
b display of Sepam, switchgear and network diagnosis data
b display of time-tagged alarm messages
b retrieval of disturbance recording data.
SFT2841: output testing.

Efficient, easy-to-use software
b menus and icons for fast, direct access to the data required
b guided navigation to go through all the data input screens in the natural order
PE88108
b all data on the same function together in the same screen

b trilingual software: English, French, Spanish
b another local language: please contact us regarding local language customization
b on-line help, with all the technical information needed to use
and implement Sepam
b familiar file management in Microsoft Windows environment:
v all file management services included: copy / paste, save, etc.
v printing of parameter and protection settings in standard layout.
SFT2841: alarm history.
198
software
Function
The table below gives the SFT2841 functions available for each of the 4 Sepam
series: Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
PE88114
NC: function available in unconnected mode.

S: function available with SFT2841 connected via Sepam front panel.
E: function available with SFT2841 connected to Sepam via E-LAN communication network.
Functions Series 20 Series 40 Series 60 Series 80

NC S E NC S E NC S E NC S E
Management
On-line help b b b b b b b b b b b b
Management of parameter and b b b b b b b b b b b b
protection setting files: creation,
saving, downloading and uploading
Downloading and uploading of b b b b b b b b
(1)
parameter and protection setting files
Exporting of parameter and protection b b b b
settings in a text file
SFT2841: Sepam series 80 sensor parameter setting. Printing of parameter and protection b b b b b b b b b b b b
settings
Modification of passwords, one b b b b b b b b
for parameter setting and one for
protection setting
Sepam parameter setting
PE88115
Display of parameter settings b b b b b b b b b b b b

Hardware configuration and b b b b b b b b b b b b
parameter entry protected by
parameter setting password
Graphical parameter setting b b b b b b
assistance
Standard configuration for IEC 61850 b b b b b b b b b b b b
network
Protection setting
Display of protection settings b b b b b b b b b b b b
Entry of protection settings, protected b b b b b b b b b b b b
by protection setting password
Definition of customized tripping curve b b b b b b
SFT2841: Sepam series 80 application, with protection Adaptation of the predefined functions
function measurement origin. Display and modification of the control b b b b b b b b b b b b
matrix
Logic equation editing b b b b b b b b
5
Number of instructions 100 200 200
PE88116
Number of dedicated 10 20 20
remote indications
Display of logic equations b b b b b b
Load the Logipam program b b b
Setting of Logipam parameters b b b
Assignment of LEDs on front b b b b b b b b b b b b
Editing of user messages b b b b b b b b
Number of user messages 30 100 100
Editing of personalized mimic diagram b b b b b b
Assistance in commissioning and operating the installation
Display of all the Sepam b b b b b b b b
measurement data
Display of switchgear diagnosis b b b b b b b b
assistance data 
SFT2841: protection settings. Display of machine operating b b b b b b b b
assistance data 
Display of time-tagged alarm b b b b b b b b
messages
b b b b b b b b
PE88117
Tripping context
Retrieval of disturbance recording b b b b b b b b
files
Display of Logipam variables b b
Display of logic input/output status b b b b b b b b
Output testing b b b b b b b b
Sepam diagnosis b b b b b b b b
(1) Except for logic equations and personalized messages.
SFT2841: Sepam diagnosis.
199
software
SFT2841 connection to Sepam
SFT2841 connection to the front panel of a Sepam

The SFT2841 can be connected to the front panel of Sepam series 20, Sepam series
40, Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 using the CCA783 or CCA784 cord or using
the CCA783 + USB/RS232 (TSXCUSB232) converter .
DE88354
DE88355
SFT2841 connection to a set of Sepam relays
The SFT2841 can be connected to a set of Sepam relays, themselves connected to a
E-LAN communication network in one of the three architectures presented below.
These connections do not require any further software development work.
Ethernet connection RS 485 serial connection Telephone-line connection

b connection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS 485 b connection a set of Sepam to a b connection a set of Sepam to a
network Modbus RS 485 network Modbus RS 485 network
b Ethernet RS 485 link via the EGX100 or EGX300 b connection of the PC via its RS 232 b RS 485-RTC link via an RS 485
gateway or the ECI850 server port, using the ACE909-2 interface. modem (Wertermo TD-34 for example)
b embedded Ethernet link via the ACE850 b connection of the PC via its modem
communication interface port.
b connection of the PC via its Ethernet port.
DE60586
DE60587
DE60588
200
software
Adaptation of the predefined functions
Logic equation editor (Sepam series 40, series 60

and series 80)
PE88118
v etc.
sequences, etc.
Note that the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the
Logipam programming software.

b logic inputs
using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as
SFT2841: logic equation editor.
time delays, bistables and time programmer.

b assigned to a logic output, LED or message from the control matrix
Alarms and operating messages (Sepam series 40, series 60

and series 80)
New alarm and operating messages may be created using the SFT2841 software.
b on Sepam’s advanced UMI
b in the SFT2841 “Alarms” and “Alarm History” screens.
Local-control mimic diagram (Sepam series 60 and series 80)

The local-control mimic diagram displayed on the UMI can be personalized by
5
PE88109
adapting one of the supplied, predefined mimic diagrams or by creating a diagram

from scratch.
The mimic-diagram editor can be used to:
b create a fixed, bitmap background (128 x 240 pixels) using a standard drawing tool
b create animated symbols or use predefined animated symbols to represent the
electrotechnical devices or other objects
b assign the logic inputs or internal status conditions that modify the animated
symbols. For example, the logic inputs for the circuit-breaker position must be linked
to the circuit-breaker symbol to enable the display of the open and closed conditions
b assign the logic outputs or internal status conditions that are activated when an
opening or closing order are issued for the symbol
b display the current, voltage and power measurements on the mimic diagram.
SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.
Control matrix
The control matrix is used for simple assignment of data from:
PE88120
b logic inputs
b logic equations or the Logipam program
b logic outputs
b 9 LEDs on the front of Sepam
b messages for local display
201
Software SFT2826 disturbance recording
data display software
Function
The SFT2826 software is used to display, analyze and print disturbance data
recorded by Sepam.
PE88026
It uses COMTRADE (IEEE standard: Common format for transient data exchange for
power systems) files.
Transfer of disturbance recording data

Before they are analyzed by SFT2826, the disturbance recording data must be
transferred from Sepam to the PC:
b by the SFT2841 software
b or by the Modbus communication link.
Analysis of disturbance recording data

b selection of analog signals and logic data for display
SFT2826: analysis of a disturbance data record. b zoom and measurement of time between events
b display of all numerical values recorded
b exporting of data in file format
b printing of curves and/or numerical values recorded.
Characteristics
The SFT2826 software comes with the SFT2841 software:
b 4 languages: English, French, Spanish, Italian
b on-line help with description of software functions.
202
Software SFT850 configuration software
for IEC 61850 protocol
Function
The SFT850 software is used to easily create, modify and consult the SCL
(Substation Configuration Language) configuration files for the IEC 61850
communication protocol:
b CID (Configured IED description) file for configuration of a device connected to an
IEC 61850 network
b SCD (Substation Configuration Description) file for IEC 61850 configuration of
substation equipment.
The SFT850 software supplements the standard IEC 61850 configuration created
with the SFT2841 software in cases where the configuration must be precisely
adapted to system requirements.
Adding or deleting equipment

The SFT850 software can be used to add or delete connected equipment in the
IEC 61850 configuration. If a Sepam unit is added, the software uses the supplied
ICD (IED capability description) file to start configuration.
Equipment connection
The SFT850 software describes the data for equipment connection to the network.
Editing the equipment configuration

The configuration of a given device described in a CID or SCD file can be modified:
b add, modify or delete datasets. A dataset is used to group data and optimise
communication
b add, modify or delete RCBs (Report Control Block). A Report Control Block defines
dataset transmission conditions
b add, modify or delete GCBs (Goose Control Block). A Goose Control Block defines
how data is exchanged between Sepam units
b modify dead measurement bands. This parameter is used to optimise
communication in that measurements are transmitted only if they have changed
significantly.
Generating CID files

The SFT850 software can generate the CID file for each device on the basis of an
SCD file.
203
Software SFT2885 programming
software - Logipam
Function
The SFT2885 programming software (called Logipam) is intended exclusively for the
Sepam series 80 and can be used to:
b adapt predefined control and monitoring functions
b program specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined
versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required
by the application.
It is made up of:
b a ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program
complex control functions
b a simulator for complete program debugging
b a code generator to run the program on Sepam.
The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete
file can be printed.
Only the Sepam series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080
option can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by the
Logipam SFT2885 software.
The complete Logipam software is made up of the executable program run by

Sepam and the source program that can be modified by the Logipam SFT2885
programming software.
The SFT2841 setting and operating software, required for implementation of the
Logipam program, offers the following functions:
b association of the complete Logipam program with the Sepam parameter and
protection settings
b loading and unloading of Logipam program, parameters and settings in the Sepam
cartridge
b running of the functions programmed with Logipam:
v display of the status of Logipam internal bits
v setting of Logipam parameters: configuration bits, timers, etc.
Operating principle
DE88359
.bin
204
Software SFT2885 programming
software - Logipam
Characteristics
Program structure
A ladder-language program is made up of a series of rungs executed sequentially:
PE88036
b maximum 1000 lines with 9 contacts and 1 coil maximum per line
b with a maximum total number of 5000 contacts and coils.
Comments may be made for each line.
Sections
The program can be broken down into sections and subsections to clarify the
structure and facilitate reading. It is possible to set up three levels of sections.
Comments may be added for each section.
Execution of each section can be subjected to conditions.
Variable editor
Each variable is defined by an invariable identifier and can be linked to a name or a
comment.
The programmer can decide to work directly with the identifiers or with the linked
names.
The list of the variables used and the cross references may be consulted during
SFT2885: ladder-language program, structured in sections.
programming.
Graphic elements in the ladder language

PE88057
The graphic elements are the instructions in the ladder language:

b NO and NC contacts
b rising and falling-edge detection contacts
b direct or negated coils
b set and reset coils
b coils and contacts linked to timers, counters and clocks.
Available resources
Sepam variables
All the data used by Sepam functions can be addressed by Logipam:
b all logic inputs and outputs
b all remote-control orders and remote indications
(the remote-control orders and remote indication used in the Logipam program are
no longer used by the predefined functions)
SFT2885: variable editor.
b all protection-function inputs and outputs 
5
b all inputs and outputs for the predefined control and monitoring functions
b all inputs and outputs for symbols in the mimic-based UMI
b all system data
b all logic inputs GOOSE
Logipam internal variables

b 64 configuration bits to parameter program processing, settable via the SFT2841
software and the display
b 128 bits used by the control matrix to control LEDs, messages and logic outputs
b 128 internal bits that are saved
b 512 internal bits that are not saved.
Logipam functions
b 60 timers that can be set for a rising edge (TON) or a falling edge (TOF)
b 24 incremental counters with adjustable thresholds
b 4 clocks for a given week.
PE88à58
Debugging tools
The Logipam software offers a complete set of tools for program debugging:
b step-by-step or continuous program execution to simulate the programmed
functions
b color animation of the rungs and all program variables
b grouping in a table of all program variables requiring monitoring.
Documentation
The application file can be printed in part or in whole.
The application file can be personalized : front page, title block, general description of
the program, etc.
SFT2885: program debugging.
205
Software Power Launcher
Makes it easy
Power Launcher makes it easy to have the latest version of all your software
compliant with your latest device.
b In one glance, you can see the available software for each device family:
v Compact NSX & Masterpact circuit breakers
v TeSys motor-starters
v Sepam relays
v ION,PM and CM meters
b Always up to date thanks to the simple notification and download of the latest
software updates.
b Save time by customizing your own software “favorites”.
DE60595
206
Logic input / output modules MES114 modules
Function
The 4 outputs included on the Sepam series 20 and 40 may be extended by adding
PE88059
an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs, available in 3 versions:

b MES114: 10 DC inputs voltage from from 24 V DC to 250 V DC
b MES114E: 10 inputs, voltage 110-125 V AC or V DC
b MES114F: 10 inputs, voltage 220-250 V AC or V DC.
Characteristics
MES114 module
Weight 0.28 kg (0.617 lb)
Operating -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °Fto +158 °F)
temperature
Environmental Same characteristics as Sepam base units
characteristics
Logical inputs MES114 MES114E MES114F
Voltage 24 to 110 to 110 V AC 220 to 220 to
250 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC 240 V AC
Range 19.2 to 88 to 88 to 176 to 176 to
275 V DC 150 VV DC 132 V AC 275 V DC 264 V AC
Frequency / / 47 to 63 Hz / 47 to 63 Hz
10 input/4 output MES114 module. Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA
Typical switching 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V
threshold AC
Input limit At state 1 u 19 V DC u 88 V DC u 88 V AC u 176 V DC u 176 V AC
voltage At state 0 y 6 V DC y 75 V DC y 22 V AC y 137 V DC y 48 V AC
Isolation of inputs from Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
Isolation between Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
inputs
O11 control relay output
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V CC
AC - - - - 100 to
(47.5 to 240 V AC
63 Hz)
5
Breaking capacity Resistive 8 / 4A 0.7 A 0.3 A 0.2 A 8A
load
Load 6 / 2A 0.5 A 0.2 A - -
L/R < 20 ms
Load 4 / 1A 0.2 A 0.1 A - -
L/R < 40 ms
Load - - - - 5A
cos φ > 0.3
Isolation of outputs Enhanced
from other isolated
groups
Isolation between Enhanced
outputs
O12 to O14 annunciation relay output
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC
AC - - - - 100 to
(47.5 to 240 V AC
63 Hz)
Breaking capacity Resistive 2 / 1A 0.6 A 0.3 A 0.2 A -
load
Load 2 / 1A 0.5 A 0.15 A - -
L/R < 20 ms
Load - - - - 1A
cos φ > 0.3
Isolation of outputs Enhanced
in relation to other
isolated groups
Isolation between Enhanced
outputs
207
Logic input / output modules MES114 modules
Description
DE60672
L , M and K : 3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors

L : connectors for 4 relay outputs:
b O11: 1 control relay output
b O12 to O14: 3 annunciation relay outputs
M : connectors for 4 independent logic inputs I11 to I14
K : connectors for 6 logic inputs:
b I21: 1 independent logic input
b I22 to I26: 5 common point logic inputs.
1 25-pin sub-D connector to connect the module to the base unit.

2 Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs, to be set to:
b V DC for 10 DC voltage inputs (default setting)
b V AC for 10 AC voltage inputs.
3 Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and
MES114F input voltages.
The parameter setting status can be accessed in the “Sepam Diagnosis” screen of
the SFT2841 software tool.
Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage (V AC setting) inhibits the “operating
time measurement” function.
Assembly
PE60320
1 Insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit.
2 Flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2.
3 Tighten the mounting screw 3.
5
Connection
The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external.
CAUTION
DE88199
!
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should
be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Wiring of connectors L , M and K :

b Wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12)
v or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.315 to 0.39 in)
b Wiring with fittings:
v terminal 5, recommended wiring with Schneider Electric:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2 (AWG 18)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).
208
Logic input / output modules Logic input / output assignment
of Sepam series 20
The use of the preset control and monitoring functions requires exclusive parameter
setting and particular wiring of the inputs according to their application and the type
of Sepam.
The advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software may be used to assign inputs and set
the control and monitoring function parameters.
Since an input may only be assigned to a single function, not all the functions are
available at the same time.
Example: if the logic discrimination function is used, the switching of groups of
settings function may not be used.
Table of input/output assignment by application

Functions S20 S24 T20 T24 M20 B21 - B22 Assignment
Logic inputs
Open position b b b b b b I11
Closed position b b b b b b I12
Logic discrimination, receive blocking input b b b b I13
Switching of groups of settings A/B b b b b b
External reset b b b b b b I14
External tripping 4 (1) b b b b b b
External tripping 1 (1) b b b (2) b (2) b b I21
External network synchronization b b b b b b
External tripping 2 (1) b b (3) b b I22
Motor re-acceleration b
External tripping 3 (1) b b b (4) b (4) b b I23
Buchholz alarm (1) (Buchholz alarm message) b b
Rotor rotation detection b
Thermistor tripping (1) b b b
Inhibit earth fault protection b
End of charging position b b b b b I24
Thermostat alarm (1) (thermostat alarm message) b b
Thermistor alarm (1) b b b
External tripping 5 and 50BF activation (1) b (1) b (1)
Inhibit remote control, excluding TC1 (1) b b b b b b I25
Inhibit remote control, including TC1 (1) b b b b b b
SF6-1 b b b b b b
SF6-2 b b b b b b I26
Change of thermal settings
Inhibit thermal overload
Inhibit recloser b b
b
b
b
b
b
b 5
Logic outputs
Tripping b b b b b b O1
Inhibit closing b b b b b b O2
Watchdog b b b b b b O4
Close order b b b b b b O11
Note: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other non predefined applications.
(1) These inputs have parameter setting with the prefix “NEG” for undervoltage type operation.
(2) Buchholz/Gas trip message.
(3) Thermostat trip message.
(4) Pressure trip message.
209
Logic input / output modules Logic input / output assignment
of Sepam series 40
Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions
using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below.
b all the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used
for the SFT2841 customization functions according to specific application needs:
v in the control matrix, to link inputs to output relays, LED indications or display
messages
v in the logic equation editor, as logic equation variables
b the control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.
Assignment table of logic inputs by application

Functions S40 S41 S42 S43 S44 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 T40 T42 T50 T52 M40 M41 G40 Assignment
Logic inputs
Open position b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b I11
Closed position b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b I12
Logic discrimination, b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
receive blocking
input 1
Logic discrimination, b b Free
receive blocking
input 2
Switching of groups b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b I13
of settings A/B
External reset b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
External tripping 1 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Buchholz/gas tripping b b b b Free
Thermostat tripping b b b b Free
Pressure tripping b b b b Free
Thermistor tripping b b b b b b b Free
Buchholz/gas alarm b b b b Free
Thermostat alarm b b b b Free
Pressure alarm b b b b Free
Thermistor alarm b b b b b b b Free
End of charging b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
position
Inhibit remote control b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
SF6 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit recloser b b b b b b b b b b Free
5 External
synchronization
Inhibit thermal
b b b b b b b b b b b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I21
Free
overload
Switching of thermal b b b b b b b Free
settings
Motor re-acceleration b b Free
Rotor rotation b b Free
detection
Inhibit undercurrent b b Free
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Open order b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Close order b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Phase voltage b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
transformer fuse
melting
Residual voltage b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
transformer fuse
melting
External positive b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
active energy counter
External negative b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
active energy counter
External positive b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
reactive energy
counter
External negative b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
reactive energy
counter
Downstream load b b b b b b b
start up
Logic outputs
Tripping b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b O1
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b O2
Watchdog b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b O4
Close order b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b O11
Note: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 matrix for other non predefined applications.
210
Logic input / output modules MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 input / 6 output module
Presentation
Function
PE88061
The output relays included on the Sepam series 60 and 80 base unit may be
extended by adding 1, 2 or 3 MES120 modules with 14 DC logic inputs and 6 outputs
relays (1 control relay output and 5 indication relay outputs).
Sepam series Output on Extendable with

base unit nb max of MES120
series 60 4 2
series 80 5 3
Three modules are available for the different input supply voltage ranges and offer
different switching thresholds:
b MES120, 14 inputs 24 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
14 V DC
b MES120G, 14 inputs 220 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
155 V DC
b MES120H, 14 inputs 110 V DC to 125 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
82 V DC.
MES120 14 input / 6 output module. Characteristics

MES120 / MES120G / MES120H modules
Weight 0,38 kg (0,83 lb)
Operating temperature -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Logic inputs MES120 MES120G MES120H
Voltage 24 à 250 V DC 220 to 250 V DC 110 to 125 V DC
Range 19.2 à 275 V DC 170 to 275 V DC 88 to 150 V DC
Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA
Typical switching threshold 14 V DC 155 V DC 82 V DC
Input limit voltage At state 0 < 6 V DC < 144 V DC < 75 V DC
At state 1 > 19 V DC > 170 V DC > 88 V DC
Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
Control relay output Ox01
Voltage DC 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) - - - - 100 à 240 V AC
Breaking capacity Resistive load 8 / 4A 0.7 A 0.3 A 0.2 A 8A
Load L/R < 20 ms 6 / 2A 0.5 A 0.2 A - -
Load L/R < 40 ms 4 / 1A 0.2 A 0.1 A - -
Load p.f > 0.3 - - - - 5A
5
Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups Enhanced
Relay output Ox02 to Ox06
Tension Continue 24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC
Alternative (47.5 à 63 Hz) - - - - 100 to 240 V AC
Breaking capacity Load L/R < 20 ms 2 / 1A 0.5 A 0.15 A 0.2 A -
Load p.f > 0.3 - - - - 1A
Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups Enhanced
mm
in Description
bb 3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors.
DE60673
1 20-pin connector for 9 logic inputs:

bb Ix01 to Ix04: 4 independent logic inputs
bb Ix05 to Ix09: 5 common point logic inputs.
2 7-pin connector for 5 common point logic inputs Ix10 à Ix14.
3 17-pin connector for 6 relay outputs:
bb Ox01: 1 control relay output
bb Ox02 to Ox06 : 5 indication relay outputs.
Addressing of MES120 module inputs / outputs:
bb x = 1 for the module connected to H1
bb x = 2 for the module connected to H2
bb x = 3 for the module connected to H3.
6.69 4 MES120G, MES120H identification label (MES120 modules have no labels).
4.72
1.57
211
Installation
Assembly
Installation of an MES120 module on the base unit
b insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit
PE60321
b push the module flat up against the base unit to plug it into the connector H2
b partially tighten the two mounting screws 2 before locking them.
MES120 modules must be mounted in the following order:
b if only one module is required, connect it to connector H1
b if 2 modules are required, connect them to connectors H1 and H2 (maximum
configuration for Sepam series 60)
b if 3 modules are required (maximum configuration for Sepam series 80 only), the 3
connectors H1 , H2 and H3 are used.
Installation of the second MES120 module, connected to base

unit connector H2.
Connection
The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external.
! CAUTION
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
b NEVER work alone.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off.
5 Wiring of connectors
DE88201
b wiring without fittings:

v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
v or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (u AWG 24-16)
- DZ5CE015D for one 1.5 mm² wire (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for one 2.5 mm² wire (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for two 1 mm² wires (AWG 18)
212
Logic input / output assignment
The control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.
All the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for
the customization functions according to specific application needs:
b in the control matrix (SFT2841 software), to connect an input to a logic output, a
LED on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display
b in the logic equation editor (SFT2841 software), as logic equation variables
Logic Ox output assignment table

Functions S60 S62 T60 T62 M61 G60 G62 C60 Assignment
Tripping / contactor control b b b b b b b b O1
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b O2 by default
Closing b b b b b b b b O3 by default
Watchdog b b b b b b b b O5
Logic discrimination, blocking send 1 b b b b b b b b O102 by default
Logic discrimination, blocking send 2 b b b b O103 by default
Genset shutdown b b Free
De-excitation b b Free
Load shedding b Free
AT, closing of NO circuit breaker b b b b b b Free
AT, closing of coupling b b b b b b Free
AT, opening of coupling b b b b b b Free
Note: The logic outputs assigned by default may be freely reassigned.
Assignment table for logic Ix inputs common to all applications

T67 G66
Closed circuit breaker b b b b b b b b I101
Open circuit breaker b b b b b b b b I102
Synchronization of Sepam internal clock b b b b b b b b I103
via external pulse
Switching of groups of settings A/B b b b b b b b b Free
External reset b b b b b b b b Free
5
Earthing switch closed b b b b b b b b Free
Earthing switch open b b b b b b b b Free
External trip 1 b b b b b b b b Free
End of charging position b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit remote control (Local) b b b b b b b b Free
SF6 pressure default b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b Free
Open order b b b b b b b b Free
Close order b b b b b b b b Free
Phase VT fuse blown b b b b b b b b Free
V0 VT fuse blown b b b b b b b b Free
External positive active energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
External negative active energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
External positive reactive energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
External negative reactive energy meter b b b b b b b b Free
Racked out circuit breaker b b b b b b b b Free
Switch A closed b b b b b b b b Free
Switch A open b b b b b b b b Free
Switch B closed b b b b b b b b Free
Switch B open b b b b b b b b Free
Closing-coil monitoring b b b b b b b b Free
213
Assignment table of logic Ix inputs by application

Inhibit recloser b b Free
Inhibit thermal overload b b b b b b b Free
Switching of thermal settings b b b b b Free
Blocking reception 1 b b b b b b Free
Blocking reception 2 b b b b Free
Buchholz trip b b b b b Free
Thermostat trip b b b b b Free
Pressure trip b b b b b Free
Thermistor trip b b b b b Free
Buchholz alarm b b b b b Free
Thermostat alarm b b b b b Free
Pressure alarm b b b b b Free
Thermistor alarm b b b b b Free
Rotor speed measurement b b b I104
Rotor rotation detection b b b Free
Motor re-acceleration b Free
Load shedding request b Free
Inhibit undercurrent b Free
Priority genset shutdown b b Free
Close enable (ANSI 25) b b b b b b Free
Inhibit opposite-side remote control (local) b b b b b b Free
Inhibit remote-control coupling (local) b b b b b b Free
Coupling open b b b b b b Free
Coupling closed b b b b b b Free
Opposite side open b b b b b b Free
Opposite side closed b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Manual (ANSI 43) b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Auto (ANSI 43) b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Circuit breaker (ANSI 10) b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Coupling (ANSI 10) b b b b b b Free
Opposite-side circuit breaker disconnected b b b b b b Free
Coupling circuit breaker disconnected b b b b b b Free
Coupling close order b b b b b b Free
Opposite-side voltage OK b b b b b b Free
Inhibit closing of coupling b b b b b b Free
Automatic closing order b b b b b b Free
214
The control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.
All the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for
the customization functions according to specific application needs:
b in the control matrix (SFT2841 software), to connect an input to a logic output, a
LED on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display
b in the logic equation editor (SFT2841 software), as logic equation variables
b in Logipam (SFT2885 software) as input variables for the program in ladder
language.
Logic Ox output assignment table

Functions S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80 B83 C86 Assignment
T87 M88 G88
Tripping / contactor control b b b b b b b b b b b b b O1
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b b b b b b O2 by default
Closing b b b b b b b b b b b b b O3 by default
Watchdog b b b b b b b b b b b b b O5
Logic discrimination, blocking send 1 b b b b b b b b b b b b b O102 by default
Logic discrimination, blocking send 2 b b b b b O103 by default
Genset shutdown b b Free
Load shedding b b Free
AT, closing of NO circuit breaker b b b b b b b b b b Free
AT, closing of coupling b b b b b b b b b b Free
AT, opening of coupling b b b b b b b b b b Free
Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4) b Free
Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4) b Free
Note: The logic outputs assigned by default may be freely reassigned.
Assignment table for logic Ix inputs common to all applications

T87 M88 G88
Closed circuit breaker b b b b b b b b b b b b b I101
5
Open circuit breaker b b b b b b b b b b b b b I102
Synchronization of Sepam internal clock b b b b b b b b b b b b b I103
via external pulse
Switching of groups of settings A/B b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
External reset b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Earthing switch closed b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Earthing switch open b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
External trip 1 b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
End of charging position b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit remote control (Local) b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
SF6 pressure default b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit closing b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Open order b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Close order b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Phase VT fuse blown b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
V0 VT fuse blown b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
External positive active energy meter b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
External negative active energy meter b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
External positive reactive energy meter b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
External negative reactive energy meter b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Racked out circuit breaker b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Switch A closed b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Switch A open b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Switch B closed b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Switch B open b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
Closing-coil monitoring b b b b b b b b b b b b b Free
215
Assignment table of logic Ix inputs by application

T87 M88 G88
Inhibit recloser b b b b Free
Inhibit thermal overload b b b b b b b b b b Free
Switching of thermal settings b b b b b b Free
Blocking reception 1 b b b b b b b b b b Free
Blocking reception 2 b b b b b Free
Buchholz trip b b b b Free
Thermostat trip b b b b Free
Pressure trip b b b b Free
Thermistor trip b b b b b b Free
Buchholz alarm b b b b Free
Thermostat alarm b b b b Free
Pressure alarm b b b b Free
Thermistor alarm b b b b b b Free
Rotor speed measurement b b b b I104
Rotor rotation detection b b Free
Motor re-acceleration b b Free
Load shedding request b b Free
Inhibit undercurrent b b Free
Priority genset shutdown b b Free
Close enable (ANSI 25) b b b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit opposite-side remote control (local) b b b b b b b b b b Free
Inhibit remote-control coupling (local) b b b b b b b b b b Free
Coupling open b b b b b b b b b b Free
Coupling closed b b b b b b b b b b Free
Opposite side open b b b b b b b b b b Free
Opposite side closed b b b b b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Manual (ANSI 43) b b b b b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Auto (ANSI 43) b b b b b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Circuit breaker (ANSI 10) b b b b b b b b b b Free
Selector set to Coupling (ANSI 10) b b b b b b b b b b Free
Opposite-side circuit breaker disconnected b b b b b b b b b b Free
Coupling circuit breaker disconnected b b b b b b b b b b Free
Coupling close order b b b b b b b b b b Free
Opposite-side voltage OK b b b b b b b b b b Free
b b b b b b b b b b
5
Inhibit closing of coupling Free
Automatic closing order b b b b b b b b b b Free
External closing order 1 b b Free
External closing order 2 b b Free
Additional phase voltage transformer fuse b b Free
blown
Additional V0 voltage transformer fuse blown b Free
Capacitor step 1 open b Free
Capacitor step 1 closed b Free
Step 1 opening order b Free
Step 1 closing order b Free
Step 1 external trip b Free
Capacitor step 1 VAR control b Free
External capacitor step control inhibit b Free
Manual capacitor step control b Free
Automatic capacitor step control b Free
216
Remote modules Selection guide
Selection guide
4 remote modules are proposed as options to enhance the Sepam base unit
functions:
b the number and type of remote modules compatible with the base unit depend on
the Sepam application
b the DSM303 remote advanced UMI module is only compatible with base units that
do not have integrated advanced UMIs.
Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam

series 20 series 40 series 60 series 80
S2x, T2x, S4x T4x,M4x, S6x T6x, M6x, S8x, T8x, M8x,
B2x M2x G4x G6x C6x B8x G8x C8x
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module See page 216 0 1 0 2 0 2 2 0 2 2
MSA141 Analog output module See page 218 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module See page 219 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MCS025 Synchro-check module See page 221 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
Number of sets of interlinked modules / maximum number of 1 set of 3 1 set of 3 interlinked 1 set of 3 interlinked 5 modules split between
remote modules interlinked modules modules 2 sets of interlinked
modules modules
217
Remote modules Connection
CAUTION Connection
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION Connection cords
The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be connected Different combinations of modules may be connected using cords fitted with 2 black
with the special CCA785 cord, supplied with the RJ45 connectors, which come in 3 lengths:
module and equipped with an orange RJ45 plug and b CCA770: length = 0.6 m (2 ft)
a black RJ45 plug. b CCA772: length = 2 m (6.6 ft)
Failure to follow this instruction can cause b CCA774: length = 4 m (13.1 ft).
equipment damage. The modules are linked by cords which provide the power supply and act as functional links with
the Sepam unit (connector D to connector Da , Dd to Da , …).
Rules on inter-module linking

b linking of 3 modules maximum
b DSM303 and MCS025 modules may only be connected at the end of the link.
Maximum advisable configurations

Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40: just 1 set of interlinked modules
Base Cord Module 1 Cord Module 2 Cord Module 3
DE88203
Series 20 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA774 DSM303

Series 40 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA772 MET148-2
Series 40 CCA772 MET148-2 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA774 DSM303
Sepam series 60: just 1 set of interlinked modules

DE60674

Series 60 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA785 (1) MCS025
Series 60 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA772 MET148-2
Series 60 CCA772 MET148-2 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA774 DSM303
Series 60 CCA772 MET148-2 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA785 (1) MCS025
Sepam series 80: 2 sets of interlinked modules

Sepam series 80 has 2 connection ports for remote modules, D1 and D2 .
Modules may be connected to either port.
Set 1 D1 CCA772 MET148-2 CCA770 MET148-2 CCA774 DSM303
DE88204
- -
Set 2 D2 CCA772 MSA141 CCA785 (1) MCS025 - -
(1) CCA 785 delivered with MCS025 synchro-check module.
218
Remote modules MET148-2
Temperature sensor module
Function
The MET148-2 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors (RTDs)
of the same type:
PE88063
b Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting

b 3-wire temperature sensors
b A single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit, to be connected by one of the
CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords
b 2 modules for each Sepam series 40 or series 80 base unit, to be connected by
CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords
The temperature measurement (e.g. in a transformer or motor winding) is
utilized by the following protection functions:
b Thermal overload (to take ambient temperature into account)
b Temperature monitoring.
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module.
Characteristics
MET148-2 module
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Temperature sensors Pt100 Ni100 / Ni120
Isolation from earth None None
Current injected in RTD 4 mA 4 mA
Description and dimensions

DE88205
mm A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4.

in
B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8.
Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord
3.46
Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord
(according to application).
t Grounding/earthing terminal.
1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to: 5
b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.
2 Jumper used to select module number, to be set to:
1.81
b MET1: 1st MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8
5.67 (default position)
b MET2: 2nd MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.
(for Sepam series 40, series 60 and series 80 only).
219
Remote modules MET148-2
Temperature sensor module
Connection
CAUTION
b NEVER work alone.
b Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages.
Connection of the earthing terminal

By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with
DE88206
cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a
4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in).
Connection of RTDs to screw-type connectors
b 1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (AWG 24-12)
b or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (AWG 24-18).
Recommended cross-sections according to distance:
b Up to 100 m (330 ft) u 1 mm² (AWG 18)
b Up to 300 m (990 ft) u 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
b Up to 1 km (0.62 mi) u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Maximum distance between sensor and module: 1 km (0.62 mi).
Wiring precautions
b It is preferable to use shielded cables.
The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree
according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance
b Only connect the shielding at the MET148-2 end, in the shortest manner possible,
to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and B
b Do not connect the shielding at the RTD end.
Accuracy derating according to wiring
The error ∆t is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the
cable cross-section:
L ( km )
∆t ( °C ) = 2 × -------------------2---
S (m m )
5
b ±2.1°C/km for 0.93 mm² cross-section (AWG 18)
b ±1°C/km for 1.92 mm² cross-section (AWG 14).
220
Remote modules MSA141
Analog output module
Function
The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog
signal:
PE80748
b selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting

b 0-1 mA, 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting
b scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the
converted measurement.
Example: the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0-10 mA analog output with a
dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is:
v minimum value = 0
v maximum value = 3000
b a single module for each Sepam base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770
(0.6m or 2 ft), CCA772 (2m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4m or 13.1 ft) cords.
MSA141 analog output module. The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network.
Characteristics
MSA141 module
Analog output
Current 0-1 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA
Scaling Minimum value
(no data input checking) Maximum value
Load impedance < 600 Ω (including wiring)
Accuracy 0.5 %
Measurements Unit series series series series
available 20 40 60 80
Phase and residual currents 0.1 A b b b b
Phase-to-neutral and phase-to- 1V b b b b
phase voltages
Frequency 0.01 Hz b b b b
Thermal capacity used 1% b b b b
Temperatures 1 °C b b b b
5
Active power 0.1 kW b b b
Reactive power 0.1 kvar b b b
Apparent power 0.1 kVA b b b
Power factor 0.01 b b
Remote setting via communication b b b b
link

DE88207
mm
in
A Terminal block for analog output.
Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.
3.46 Dd RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord
(according to application).
t Earthing terminal.
1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.
1.81
Connection
5.67
Connection of the earthing terminal
By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.
cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), equipped with a
4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
DE88208
Connection of analog output to screw-type connector

b 1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (AWG 24-12)
b or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (AWG 24-18).
Wiring precautions
b It is preferable to use shielded cables
b Use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end.
221
Remote modules DSM303
Remote advanced UMI module
Function
When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user-machine
interface, the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated
PE88065
advanced UMI.
It can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating
location:
b reduced depth < 30 mm (1.2 in)
b a single module for each Sepam, to be connected by one of the CCA772 (2 m or
6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords.
The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs.
Characteristics
DSM303 module
Assembly Flush-mounted
DSM303 remote advanced UMI module. Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as for Sepam base units
222
Remote modules DSM303
Remote advanced UMI module

The module is simply flush-mounted and secured by its clips. No additional
screw-type fastening is required.
Front view Side view

mm 16 17
in mm
DE88209
DE88210
in
3.78
4.6
0.98
5.99 0.6

2 Red LED:
- steadily on: module unavailable
- flashing: Sepam link unavailable.
3 9 yellow LEDs.
4 Label identifying the LEDs.
5 Graphic LCD screen.
7 Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data.
10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing (or move cursor up).
12 Access to protection settings.
13 Access to Sepam parameters.
5
16 Mounting clip.
17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness
(gasket supplied with the DSM303 module, to be installed if necessary).
Da RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with
a CCA77x cord.
CAUTION Cut-out for flush-mounting (mounting plate thickness < 3 mm or 0.12 in)
HAZARD OF CUTS mm
Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any in
DE88211
jagged edges.
serious injury.
98.5 0,5
3.88
5.67
Connection
Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.
DE88212
The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it
systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor (Rc).
223
Remote modules MCS025
Synchro-check module
Function
The MCS025 module checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit
PE88066
breaker to ensure safe closing (ANSI 25).

It checks the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase between the two
measured voltages, taking into account dead line/busbar conditions.
Three relay outputs may be used to send the close enable to several
Sepam series 60 and 80 units.
The circuit-breaker control function of each Sepam series 60 and 80 unit will take this
close enable into account.
The settings for the synchro-check function and the measurements carried out by the
module may be accessed by the SFT2841 setting and operating software, similar to
the other settings and measurements for the Sepam series 60 and 80.
The MCS025 module is supplied ready for operation with:

b the CCA620 connector for connection of the relay outputs and the power supply
b the CCT640 connector for voltage connection
b the CCA785 cord for connection between the module and the Sepam series 60 and
80 base unit.
MCS025 synchro-check module.
Characteristics
MCS025 module
Assembly With the AMT840 accessory
Voltage inputs
5 Impédance d’entrée
Consommation
> 100 kΩ
< 0.015 VA (VT 100 V)
Tenue thermique permanente 240 V
Surcharge 1 seconde 480 V
Relay outputs
Relay outputs O1 and O2
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 à 240 V AC
Load L/R < 20 ms 6A/ 2A 0.5 A 0.2 A
Load L/R < 40 ms 4A/ 1A 0.2 A 0.1 A
Resistive load 8A
Load p.f. > 0.3 5A
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
Relay outputs O3 and O4 (O4 not used)
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Load p.f. > 0.3 5A
Isolation of outputs from other Enhanced
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC, -20 % / +10 % 110 to 240 V AC, -20 % / + 0 %
47.5 to 63 Hz
Maximum consumption 6W 9 VA
Inrush current < 10 A for 10 ms < 15 A for one half period
Acceptable momentary outages 10 ms 10 ms
224
Description
1 MCS025 module
A CCA620 20-pin connector for:
DE88213
b auxiliary power supply
b 4 relay outputs:
v O1, O2, O3: close enable.
v O4: not used
B CCT640 connector (phase-to-neutral or phase-to-

phase) for the two input voltages to be
synchronized
C RJ45 connector, not used
D RJ45 connector for module connection to the

Sepam series 80 base unit, either directly or via
another remote module.
2 Two mounting clips
3 Two holding pins for the flush-mount position
4 CCA785 connection cord
225
Dimensions
mm
in
DE88361
DE88214
8.74
6.93
MCS025.

DE88109
The MCS025 module should be mounted at the back of the compartment using the
mm
in
DE88216
4.84
5
A Screw-type CCA620 b Wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (> AWG 24-
12) or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (>AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 à 0.39 in)
B Screw-type CCT640 VT wiring: same as wiring of the CCA620
Earthing connection: by 4 mm (0.15 in) ring lug
D Orange RJ45 connector CCA785, special prefabricated cord supplied with the MCS025
  module:
b orange RJ45 connector for connection to port D on the
MCS025 module
b black RJ45 connector for connection to the Sepam series 60
and 80 base unit, either directly or via another remote module.
226
DE60589
Sepam series 60 or 80
(1) Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral connection.
5
CAUTION CAUTION
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
connected with the special CCA785 cord, performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
supplied with the module and equipped with an technical characteristics of the device.
orange RJ45 plug and a black RJ45 plug. b NEVER work alone.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
equipment damage. b Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
is off.
227
5
228
5
229
5
230
5
231
5
232
5
233
Communication accessories Selection guide
There are 2 types of Sepam communication accessories:

b communication interfaces, which are essential for connecting Sepam to the
communication network
b converters and oth er accessories, as options, which are used for complete
implementation of the communication network.
Communication-interface selection guide

ACE949-2 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP-2 ACE969FO-2 ACE850TP ACE850FO
Type of network
S-LAN S-LAN S-LAN S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN and S-LAN and
or E-LAN (1) or E-LAN (1) or E-LAN (1) E-LAN E-LAN
Protocol
Modbus RTU b b b b (3) b b (3) b
DNP3 b (3) b (3)
IEC 60870-5-103 b (3) b (3)
Modbus TCP/IP b b
IEC 61850 b b
Physical interface
RS 485 2-wire b b b b
4-wire b
Fiber optic ST Star b b
Ring b (2)
10/100 base Tx 2 ports b
100 base Fx 2 ports b
Power supply
DC Provided by Provided by Provided by 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V 24 to 250 V
AC Sepam Sepam Sepam 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V 110 to 240 V
See details Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue
page 236 page 237 page 238 page 239 page 239 page 244 page 244
(1) Only one connection possible, S-LAN or E-LAN.

(2) Except with the Modbus protocol.
(3) Not simultaneously (1 protocol per application).
Converter selection guide

5 Converter
ACE909-2 ACE919CA ACE919CC EGX100 EGX300 ECI850
Physical interface 1 port RS 232 1 port 1 port 1 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port
RS 485 port 2-wire RS 485 port 2-wire 10/100 base T 10/100 base T 10/100 base T
Modbus RTU b (1) b (1) b (1)

IEC 60870-5-103 b (1) b (1) b (1)
DNP3 b (1)
b (1)
b (1)
Modbus TCP/IP b b
IEC 61850 b
To Sepam
Physical interface 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port 1 port
RS 485 2-wire RS 485 2-wire RS 485 2-wire RS 485 2-wire or RS 485 2-wire or RS 485 2-wire or
4-wire 4-wire 4-wire
Distributed power supply b b b
RS 485
Modbus RTU b (1) b (1) b (1) b b b
IEC 60870-5-103 b (1) b (1) b (1)
DNP3 b (1) b (1) b (1)
Alimentation
DC 24 to 48 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
AC 110 to 220 V AC 110 to 220 V AC
See details Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue

page 248 page 250 page 250 page 257 page 257 page 255
(1) The supervisor protocol is the same as the Sepam protocol.
Note: all these interfaces accept the E-LAN protocol.
234
Communication interfaces Communication interface
connection
CCA612 connection cord

DE88266
Function
The CCA612 prefabricated cord is used to connect ACE942-2, ACE959, ACE937,
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 communication interfaces:
b to the white communication port C on a Sepam series 20 or series 40 base unit, or
b to the white communication port C1 on a Speam series 60 base unit.
b to the white communication port C1 or C2 on a Sepam series 80 base unit.
Characteristics
b Length = 3 m (9.8 ft)
b Fitted with 2 white RJ45 plugs.
Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40: 1 communication port.

DE88267
Sepam series 80 : 2 communication ports.
CAUTION CCA614 connection cord

HAZARD OF DEFECTIVE COMMUNICATION
b Never use both communication ports C2 and F on Function
5
a Sepam series 80 at the same time. The CCA614 prefabricated cord can be used to connect ACE850TP and ACE850FO
b The only communication ports that can be used communication interfaces:
simultaneously on a Sepam series 80 unit are b to the white communication port C on a Sepam series 40 base unit, or
ports C1 and C2 or ports C1 and F . b to the blue communication port F on a Sepam series 60 or series 80 base unit.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in Characteristics
equipment damage. b Length = 3 m (9.8 ft)
b Fitted with 2 blue RJ45 connectors
b Minimum curvature radius = 50 mm (1.97 in)
ACE850 ACE850
DE80439
DE80440
CCA614
ACE937
CCA614
CCA612
235
Communication interfaces Communication interface
connection
Connection to the communication network

RS485 network for ACE949-2, ACE959 and ACE969TP-2
interfaces
RS 485 network cable 2-wire 2-wire
RS 485 medium 1 shielded twisted pair 2 shielded twisted pairs
Distributed power supply (1) 1 shielded twisted pair 1 shielded twisted pair
Shielding Tinned copper braid, coverage > 65 %
Characteristic impedance 120 Ω
Gauge AWG 24
Resistance per unit length < 100 Ω/km (62.1Ω/mi)
Capacitance between conductors < 60 pF/m (18.3 pF/ft)
Capacitance between < 100 pF/m (30.5 pF/ft)
conductor and shielding
Maximum length 1300 m (4270 ft)
Fiber-optic network for ACE937 and ACE969FO-2 interfaces

Fiber optic
Fiber type Graded-index multimode silica
Wavelength 820 nm (invisible infra-red)
Type of connector ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum
diameter aperture attenuation power available fiber length
(µm) (NA) (dBm/km) (dBm)
50/125 0,2 2,7 5,6 700 m (2300 ft)
62,5/125 0,275 3,2 9,4 1800 m (5900 ft)
100/140 0,3 4 14,9 2800 m (9200 ft)
200 (HCS) 0,37 6 19,2 2600 m (8500 ft)
Fiber optic Ethernet network for the ACE850FO

communication interface
Fiber optic communication port
Fiber type Multimode
Wavelength 1300 nm
5 Type of connector
Fiber Minimum
SC
Maximum Sensitivity Saturation Maximum
optic optical optical RX (dBm) RX (dBm) distance
diameter power TX power TX
(µm) (dBm) (dBm)
50/125 -22,5 -14 -33,9 -14 2 km (1,24 mi)
62,5/125 -19 -14 -33,9 -14 2 km (1,24 mi)
Wired Ethernet network for the ACE850TP communication

interface
Wired communication port
Type of connector Data Medium Maximum distance
RJ45 10/100 Mbps Cat 5 STP or 100 m (328 ft)
FTP or SFTP
236
Communication interfaces ACE949-2
2-wire RS 485
network interface
Function
The ACE949-2 interface performs 2 functions:
b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 2-wire RS 485 communication
PE88069
network
b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with
a CCA612 cord.
Characteristics
ACE949-2 module
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
2-wire RS 485 electrical interface
Standard EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
Power consumption 16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
Maximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network
mm with standard cable
DE88268
in Number of Maximum length with Maximum length with

Sepam units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply
5 320 m (1000 ft) 1000 m (3300 ft)
10 180 m (590 ft) 750 m (2500 ft)
3.46
20 160 m (520 ft) 450 m (1500 ft)
25 125 m (410 ft) 375 m (1200 ft)

A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
1.81 C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord
2.83 t Grounding/earthing terminal
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.

1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in
progress).
5
2 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
2-wire Power supply (Rc = 150 Ω ), to be set to:
or
DB88383
networks DC b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position)
b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.
3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).
Connection
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with
cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover
shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
2-wire Power supply v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
or b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
networks DC
cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings)
b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
237
Communication interfaces ACE959
4-wire RS 485
network interface
Function
The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions:
b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 4-wire RS 485 communication network
PE88070
b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612
cord.
Characteristics
ACE959 module
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
4-wire RS 485 electrical interface
mm Standard EIA 4-wire RS 485 differential
in Distributed power supply External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
Power consumption 16 mA in receiving mode
DE88270
3.46 40 mA maximum in sending mode

Maximum length of 4-wire RS 485 network
with standard cable
Number of Maximum length with Maximum length with
Sepam units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply
5 320 m (1000 ft) 1000 m (3300 ft)
10 180 m (590 ft) 750 m (2500 ft)
20 160 m (520 ft) 450 m (1500 ft)
25 125 m (410 ft) 375 m (1200 ft)
1.81
5.67
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected. A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
-wire Power supply C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord
or
networks DC D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply (12 V DC or 24 V DC)
5
t Grounding/earthing terminal
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in

progress).
DB88384
2 Jumper for 4-wire RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
(Rc = 150 Ω), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position)
b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.
3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).
Power supply
or
DC
Connection
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with
cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug.
b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover
shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
networks Power supply
or
b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
-wire DC cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings)
b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC
b The ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply (not
(1) Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in
the shielded cable (3 pairs).
included in shielded cable). Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed
(2) Terminal block for connection of the distributed power power supply module.
supply module.
238
Communication interfaces ACE937 Fiber optic interface
Function
The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star
system.
PE88071
This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord.
Characteristics
ACE937 module
Power supply Supplied by Sepam
ACE937 fiber optic connection interface. Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Fiber optic interface
Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum Maximum
CAUTION diameter aperture attenuation optical power fiber length
HAZARD OF BLINDING (µm) (NA) (dBm/km) available (dBm)
Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic.
50/125 0.2 2.7 5.6 700 m (2300 ft)
Failure to follow this instruction can cause 62.5/125 0.275 3.2 9.4 1800 m (5900 ft)
serious injury.
100/140 0.3 4 14.9 2800 m (9200 ft)
200 (HCS) 0.37 6 19.2 2600 m (8500 ft)
Maximum length calculated with:

b Minimum optical power available
b Maximum fiber attenuation
b Losses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm
b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 µm fiber
Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi)

5
mm
in C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.
DE88272
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active

(sending or receiving in progress).
3.46 2 Rx, female ST type connector (Sepam receiving).
3 Tx, female ST type connector (Sepam sending).
1.81
2.83
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.
Connection
DE88273
b The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type
connectors
b Fiber optics screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.
The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings).
239
Communication interfaces ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Network interfaces
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2
Function
PE88072
The ACE969 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20,
Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent
communication networks:
b The S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port is used to connect Sepam to a
communication network dedicated to supervision, using one of the three following
protocols:
v IEC 60870-5-103
v DNP3
v Modbus RTU.
The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting.
b The E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for Sepam remote
parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software.
ACE969TP-2 communication interface.
There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces, which are identical except for the
S-LAN port:
b ACE969TP-2 (Twisted Pair), for connection to an S-LAN network using a 2-wire
PE88073
RS 485 serial link

b ACE969FO-2 (Fiber Optic), for connection to an S-LAN network using a fiber-optic
connection (star or ring).
The E-LAN port is always a 2-wire RS485 type port.
ACE969FO-2 communication interface.
240
network interfaces
Characteristics
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 module
Technical characteristics
Weight 0.285 kg (0.628 lb)
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC
Range -20%/+10% -20%/+10%
Maximum consumption 2W 3 VA
Inrush current < 10 A 100 µs
Acceptable ripple content 12%
2-wire RS 485 communication ports
Electrical interface
Standard EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply ACE969-2 not required (built-in)
Fiber optic interface
Maximum length of fiber optic network
Fiber diameter Numerical Attenuation Minimum Maximum fiber
(µm) aperture (dBm/km) optical power length
(NA) available
(dBm)
50/125 0.2 2.7 5.6 700 m (2300 ft)
62.5/125 0.275 3.2 9.4 1800 m (5900 ft)
100/140 0.3 4 14.9 2800 m (9200 ft)
200 (HCS) 0.37 6 19.2 2600 m (8500 ft)
Maximum length calculated with:
b Minimum optical power available
b Maximum fiber attenuation
b Losses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm
b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 µm fiber 5
Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi).
Dimensions
mm
in
DE88274
service
Rx Tx on Rx Tx
ACE969TP-2
B
1
A
2 3
V- V+
4 5
B
1
A
2 3
V- V+
4 5 94
S-LAN E-LAN 3.70
Rc Rc
e1 e2 Rc Rc
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
144 51.2
5.67 2.0
241
network interfaces
Description
ACE969-2 communication interfaces

ACE969TP-2 ACE969FO-2
1 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6
2 Power-supply terminal block
DE88275
DE88276
3 RJ45 connector to connect the interface to the base
unit with a CCA612 cord
4 Green LED: ACE969-2 energized SENS
DE LE
CT URE
SENS
DE LE
CT URE
5 Red LED: ACE969-2 interface status

b LED off = ACE969-2 set up and communication
Tx Tx
Rx Rx
on on
Tx Tx
operational
Rx
V- V+ Rx V- V+
B A 3 4 5 B A 4 5
3
1 2 1 2
V- V+
b LED flashing = ACE969-2 not set up or setup ACE

9 69TP
-2 B A
1 2
3 4 5
E -LAN
9 69FO
-2 E -LAN
N ACE N
incorrect S-LA S-LA
b LED remains on = ACE969-2 has faulted 1 2

3 4
5
1 2
3 4
5
6 Service connector: reserved for software upgrades 1 2

3 4
5
7 E-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port

(ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2)
8 S-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port
(ACE969TP-2) 2 1 8 7 2 1 9 7
9 S-LAN fiber-optic communication port
(ACE969FO-2).
2-wire RS485 communication ports

1 Draw-out terminal block, with two rows of S-LAN port (ACE969TP) E-LAN port (ACE969TP or ACE969FO)
connections to the RS485 2-wire network:
b 2 black terminals: connection of RS485 twisted- 2 1 2 1
pair (2 wires)
DE88277
DE88278
b 2 green terminals: connection of twisted-pair for
s
s
distributed power supply Rx Tx on Rx Tx Rx Tx on Rx Tx
2 Indication LEDs:
b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending B
1
A
2 3
V- V+
4 5
B
1
A
2 3
V- V+
4 5
B A V- V+
1 2 3 4 5
b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving.
3 Jumper for RS485 network line-end impedance S-LAN E-LAN LAN E-LAN
matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 Ω), to be set to:
Rc Rc
b Rc, if the interface is not at the line end (default Rc
Rc Rc
position) Rc
b Rc, if the interface is at the line end. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5
3 3
Fiber-optic communication port

1 Indication LEDs: S-LAN port (ACE969FO)
b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending 1
b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving.
DE88279
2 Rx, female ST-type connector (Sepam receiving)

3 Tx, female ST-type connector (Sepam sending). Rx Tx on Rx Tx
B A V V+
1 2 3 4 5
S-LAN E-LAN
Rc
Rc
1 2 3 4 5
3 2
242
network interfaces
Connection
Power supply and Sepam

b The ACE969-2 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using
a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.84 ft, white RJ45 fittings)
b The ACE969-2 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC.
CAUTION
b NEVER work alone.
is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional
earth.
ACE969TP-2 Terminals Type Wiring

CCA612 e1-e2 - supply Screw terminals b Wiring with no fittings:
SENS
DE LE
CT URE
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to

DE88385
Tx
on
Rx
Tx
2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to
Rx V- V+
B A 3 4 5
1 2
V- V+
B A 4 5
-2 3 N
69TP
1 2
E-LA
1 mm² (u AWG 24-18)

ACE9 N
S-LA

5
3 4
1 2
5
3 4
1 2

v recommended wiring with Schneider
Electric fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm² (AWG 18)
Screw terminal 1 green/yellow wire, max. length 3 m (9.8 ft)
DE88282 DE88281
Protective earth
and max. cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Functional earth 4 mm (0.16 in) Earthing braid, supplied for connection to

V DC/V AC
ring lug cubicle grounding
5
C
243
network interfaces
Connection
2-wire RS 485 communication ports

DE88386
(S-LAN or E-LAN)
b Connection of the RS 485 twisted pair (S-LAN or E-LAN) to terminals A and B.
b In case of ACE 969TP wired with ACE969TP-2:
v connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to terminals 5(V+) et 4(V-).
b In case of ACE969TP-2 only:
v connexion only on the terminal 4(V-) ( ground continuity)
v no need of external power supply.
b The cable shields must be connected to the terminals marked 3(.) on the
connection terminal blocks.
b Terminal marked 3(.) are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals
of the ACETP-2 interface (protective an functional earthing): Ie the shielding of the
RS 485 cables is earthed as well.
b On the ACE960TP-2 interface, the cable clamps for the S-LAN and E-LAN RS 485
networks are earthed by the terminal 3.
If ACE969TP and ACE969TP-2 are used together,

the external power supply is required.
DE88387
If ACE969TP-2 is used alone, the external power supply

is not required, the V- connectors on the modules must be
interconnected.

DE88388
(S-LAN)
CAUTION
HAZARD OF BLINDING
Never look directly into the fiber optic.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury.
The fiber optic connection can be made:

b point-to-point to an optic star system
b in a ring system (active echo).
The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type
connectors.
The fiber optics are screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.
244
Communication interfaces ACE850TP and ACE850FO
network interfaces
ACE850TP and ACE850FO

Function
PB105301
ACE850 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 40 and

Sepam series 80 units.
They have two Ethernet communication ports to connect a Sepam unit to a single
Ethernet network depending on the topology (star or ring):
b For a star topology, only one communication port is used.
b For a ring topology, both Ethernet communication ports are used to provide
redundancy. This redundancy conforms to the RSTP 802.1d 2004 standard.
Either port can be used for connection:

b To the S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port to connect a Sepam unit to
an Ethernet communication network dedicated to supervision, using either of the
following protocols:
v IEC 61850
ACE850TP communication interface. v eModbus TCP/IP TRA 15.
b To the E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for remote
parameter setting and operation of a Sepam unit using SFT2841 software.
PB105300
There are two versions of the ACE850 interface, which are identical except for the
type of port featured:
b ACE850TP (Twisted Pair), for connection to an Ethernet network (S-LAN or
E-LAN) using a copper RJ45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet link.
b ACE850FO (Fiber Optic), for connection to an Ethernet network (S-LAN or E-LAN)
using a 100Base FX fiber optic connection (star or ring).
Compatible Sepam units

The ACE850TP and ACE850FO multi-protocol interfaces are compatible with the
following Sepam units:
ACE850FO communication interface. b Sepam series 40, series 60 version u V7.00
b Sepam series 80 base version and application version u V6.00 .
245
network interfaces
Characteristics
ACE850TP and ACE850FO module
Technical characteristics
Weight 0,4 kg (0.88 lb)
Power supply
Voltage 24 to 250 V CC 110 to 240 V CA
Range -20 % / +10 % -20 % / +10 %
Maximum ACE850TP 3,5 W in CC 1,5 VA in CA
consumption ACE850FO 6,5 W in CC 2,5 VA in CA
Inrush current < 10 A 10 ms in CC < 15 A 10 ms in CA
Wired Ethernet communication ports (ACE850TP)
Number of ports 2 x RJ45 ports
Type of port 10/100 Base TX
Protocols HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, CEI61850, TCP/
IP, RSTP 801.1d 2004
Baud rate 10 or 100 Mbits/s
Medium CAT 5 STP or FTP or SFTP
Maximum distance 100 m (328 ft)
Fiber optic Ethernet communication ports (ACE850FO)
Number of ports 2
Type of port 100 Base FX
Protocols HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, CEI61850, TCP/
IP, RSTP 801.1d 2004
Baud rate 100 Mbits/s
Fiber type Multimode
Wavelength 1300 nm
Type of connector SC
Maximum length of fiber optic network
Fiber optic Minimum Maximum Sensitivity Saturation Maximum
diameter optical power optical RX (dBm) RX (dBm) distance
(µm) Tx (dBm) power Tx
(dBm)
5
50/125 -22,5 -14 -33,9 -14 2 km (1.24 mi)
62,5/125 -19 -14 -33,9 -14 2 km (1.24 mi)
Dimensions
mm
in
DE80441
ACE850FO
108
4.25
127,2
Sepam
F C
P2
100
P1
100
5
S80 S40 BASE- FX BASE- FX
Tx Rx Tx Rx
4
3
2
1
58
2.28
mm
in
DE80403
171,2
6.74
58
2.28
246
network interfaces
Connection
ACE850TP communication interfaces

1 ACE850 communication interface status LED
b LED off = ACE850 de-energized
DE80430
ACE850TP 1 b Green LED permanently on = ACE850 energized and operational

2 b Red LED flashing = ACE850 not configured and/or not connected to the base
3 unit
4 b Red LED permanently on = ACE850 not operational (initialization in progress
5
6 or failed)
Sepam P2 P1
F C
S80 S40
10/100
BASE-TX
10/100
BASE-TX
2 STS LED: communication status: green permanently on = OK
3 Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED: off = 10Mbps, permanently on = 100 Mbps
4 Ethernet Port 2 activity LED: flashing on transmission/reception
5 Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED: off = 10Mbps, permanently on = 100 Mbps
ACE850TP: Front view

8 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid
DE80431
9 RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the Sepam base unit with a CCA614 cord :
b Sepam series 40: communication port C (identified by a white label on the
Sepam unit)
b Sepam series 80: port F (identified by a blue label on the Sepam unit)
10 RJ45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet communication port P2 (E-LAN or S-LAN)
7 8 9 10 11 11 RJ45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet communication port P1 (E-LAN or S-LAN)
ACE850TP: View of underside
ACE850FO communication interfaces

1 ACE850 communication interface status LED
b LED off = ACE850 de-energized
DE80432
ACE850FO 1 b Green LED permanently on = ACE850 energized and operational

2 b Red LED flashing = ACE850 not configured and/or not connected to the base
3 unit
4 b Red LED permanently on = ACE850 not operational (initialization in progress
5
6 or failed)
Sepam P2 P1
F C
S80 S40
100 100
BASE- FX BASE- FX
2 STS LED: communication status: green permanently on = OK
Tx Rx Tx Rx
3 Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED: permanently on = 100 Mbps
5 Ethernet Port 2 100 green LED: permanently on = 100 Mbps
5
ACE850FO: Front view

8 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid
DE80433
9 RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the Sepam base unit with a CCA614 cord :
b Sepam series 40: communication port C (identified by a white label on the
Sepam unit)
b Sepam series 80: port F (identified by a blue label on the Sepam unit)
12 Tx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P2
7 8 9 12 13 14 15 (E-LAN or S-LAN)
13 Rx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P2
ACE850FO: View of underside (E-LAN or S-LAN)
14 Tx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P1
(E-LAN or S-LAN)
15 Rx fiber of 100 Base FX SC connector for Ethernet communication port P1
(E-LAN or S-LAN)
CAUTION
HAZARD OF BLINDING
Never look directly into the fiber optic.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury.
247
network interfaces
Connection
Connection to Sepam
DE88444
b The ACE850 communication interface should only be connected to Sepam series

40 or Sepam series 80 base units using a CCA614 prefabricated cord (length = 3m or
9.8ft, blue RJ45 fittings).
b Sepam series 40: Connect the CCA614 cord to the connector C on the Sepam
base unit (white label).
b Sepam series 60 and series 80: Connect the CCA614 cord to the connector F on
the Sepam base unit (blue label).
4321
CCA614
Connection to Sepam
ACE850 interfaces must be powered by a 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC supply.
ACE850
! CAUTION
CCA614 be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
b NEVER work alone.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is
off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional
ground.
CCA614
CD
Connecting the ACE850 to a Sepam series 40
Terminals Type Wiring

3 -/~ b Wiring without fittings:
DE88445
4 +/~ v 1 wire with maximum cross-section of 0.2

to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 20-12) or 2 wires with
maximum cross-section of 0.5 to 1 mm²
(u AWG 20-18)
5
v recommended wiring with Schneider
Electric fitting:
4321 - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
CCA614 - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm² (AWG 18)
v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in).
Protective earth Screw terminal 1 green/yellow wire, max. length 3 m (9.8 ft)
DE88282 DE88281
and max. cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Functional earth 4 mm (0.16 in) Earthing braid, supplied for connection to

ACE850 ring lug cubicle grounding
CCA614
C1 C2 F
D1
CCA614 D2
Connecting the ACE850 to a Sepam series 60 and series 80.
248
Converters ACE909-2
RS 232 / RS 485 converter
Function
The ACE909-2 converter is used to connect a master/central computer equipped
with a V24/RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected
PE88074
to a 2-wire RS 485 network.

Without requiring any flow control signals, after the parameters are set, the
ACE909-2 converter performs conversion, network polarization and automatic
dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two-way simplex
(half-duplex, single-pair) transmission.
The ACE909-2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the
distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces.
The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor
communication settings.
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter.
Characteristics
Mechanical characteristics
CAUTION
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC Weight 0.280 kg (0.617 lb)
ARC OR BURNS Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
b Only qualified personnel should install this Electrical characteristics
equipment. Such work should be performed Power supply 110 to 220 V AC ± 10%, 47 to 63 Hz
only after reading this entire set of instructions Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
and checking the technical characteristics of the and frame, and between ACE power supply
device. and interface supply
b NEVER work alone. Galvanic isolation 1000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces
before working on or inside it. Consider all Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating
sources of power, including the possibility of (0.2 in x 0.79 in)
backfeeding. Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing Data format 11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
device to confirm that all power is off. Transmission delay < 100 ns
b Start by connecting the device to the protective Distributed power supply for Sepam 12 V DC or 24 V DC, 250 mA max
5
earth and to the functional earth. interfaces
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use. Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12
distributed supply
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in death or serious injury. Environmental characteristics
Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
Electromagnetic compatibility IEC Value
standard
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns 60255-22-4 4 kV with capacitive
coupling
in common mode
2 kV with direct coupling
in common mode
1 kV with direct coupling
in differential mode
1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255-22-1 1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential mode
1.2/50 µs impulse waves 60255-5 3 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode
249
Converters ACE909-2
RS 232 / RS 485 converter

mm A Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m (33 ft).
in
DE88286
B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power-supply terminal block
3.34
4.13
1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
3 LEDs:
b ON/OFF: on if ACE909-2 is energized
b Tx: on if RS 232 sending by ACE909-2 is active
1.77 b Rx: on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909-2 is active.
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and
4.13 2.56
line impedance matching resistors.
Function SW1/1 SW1/2 SW1/3
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 Ω ON
mm Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 Ω ON
in 2-wire RS 485 network impedance ON
DE88287
1.75 matching by 150 Ω resistor
5 SW2, parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format

2.22 (same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2-wire RS 485 network).
1.42 Rate (bauds) SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/3
1200 1 1 1
2400 0 1 1
4800 1 0 1
9600 0 0 1
0.63
19200 1 1 0
38400 0 1 0
Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE909-2. Format SW2/4 SW2/5
With parity check 0
Without parity check 1
1 stop bit (compulsory for Sepam) 1
DE88288
2 stop bits 0
5 Converter configuration when delivered

b 12 V DC distributed power supply
b 11-bit format, with parity check
b 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.
Connection
RS 232 link
b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A
b Maximum length 10 m (33 ft)
b Rx/Tx: RS 232 receiving/sending by ACE909-2
b 0V: Rx/Tx common, do not earth.
2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply
b To connector B female 9-pin sub-D
b 2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, L-
b Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
Power supply
b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C
b Reversible phase and neutral
b Earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).
250
Converters ACE919CA and ACE919CC
RS 485 / RS 485 converters
Function
The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master/central computer equipped
with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a
PE88075
2-wire RS 485 network.

Without requiring any flow control signals, the ACE919 converters perform network
polarization and impedance matching.
The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed
power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces.
There are 2 types of ACE919 converter:
b ACE919CC, DC-powered
b ACE919CA, AC-powered.
ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converter.
Characteristics
Mechanical characteristics
CAUTION
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC Weight 0.280 kg (0.617 lb)
ARC OR BURNS Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
b Only qualified personnel should install this Electrical characteristics ACE919CA ACE919CC
equipment. Such work should be performed Power supply 110 to 220 V AC 24 to 48 V DC ±20%
only after reading this entire set of instructions ±10%, 47 to 63 Hz
and checking the technical characteristics of the Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating 1 A rating
device. (0.2 in x 0.79 in)
b NEVER work alone. Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz,
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment and frame, and between ACE power supply 1 min
before working on or inside it. Consider all and interface supply
sources of power, including the possibility of Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply
backfeeding. Data format 11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing Transmission delay < 100 ns
device to confirm that all power is off. Distributed power supply for Sepam 12 V DC or 24 V DC, 250 mA max
b Start by connecting the device to the interfaces
5
protective earth and to the functional earth. Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in distributed supply
use. Environmental characteristics
Failure to follow these instructions will result Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
in death or serious injury. Electromagnetic compatibility IEC standard Value
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns 60255-22-4 4 kV with capacitive
coupling
in common mode
2 kV with direct
coupling
in common mode
1 kV with direct
coupling
in differential mode
1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255-22-1 1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential
mode
1.2/50 µs impulse waves 60255-5 3 kV common mode
1 kV differential
mode
251
Converters ACE919CA and ACE919CC
RS 485 / RS 485 converters

A Terminal block for 2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply.
B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
DE88289
distributed power supply.

1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power supply terminal block.
1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.

2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
ACE 919CC
3 ON/OFF LED: on if ACE919 is energized.
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and
line impedance matching resistors.
Function SW1/1 SW1/2 SW1/3
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 Ω ON
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 Ω ON
mm 2-wire RS 485 network impedance ON
in matching by 150 Ω resistor
DE88287
1.75
Converter configuration when delivered
b 12 V DC distributed power supply
2.22 b 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.
1.42
0.63
Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE919.
Connection
2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply
b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A
DE88290
b L+, L-: 2-wire RS 485 signals

b t Shielding.
2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply
b To connector B female 9-pin sub-D
5 b 2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, L-

b Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
Power supply
b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C
b Reversible phase and neutral (ACE919CA)
b Earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).
252
5
253
5
254
5
255
5
256
Converters PowerLogic EGX100
Ethernet gateway
Function
The EGX100 serves as an Ethernet gateway for PowerLogic system devices and
PE86138
for any other communicating devices utilising the Modbus protocol. The EGX100
gateway offers complete access to status and measurement information provided by
the connected devices via PowerLogic software installed on a PC.
PowerLogic software compatibility
PowerLogic software is recommeded as a user interface because they provide
access to all status and measurement information. They also prepare summary
reports. The EGX100 is compatible with:
b PowerLogic ION EEM enterprise energy management software
b PowerLogic ION Enterprise power management software
b PowerLogic System Manager power management software
b PowerLogic PowerView power monitoring software
Architecture
PowerLogic
Ethernet EGX100 gateway.
software
DE88422
PowerLogic EGX100
Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP
EGX100 gateway
Modbus RS-485 serial link
ION6200 PM800 Micrologic Sepam

5
Setup
Setup via an Ethernet network
Once connected to an Ethernet network, the EGX100 gateway can be accessed by
a standard internet browser via its IP address to:
b specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway
b configure the serial port parameters (baud rate, parity, protocol, mode, physical
interface, and timeout value)
b create user accounts
b create or update the list of the connected products with their Modbus or
PowerLogic communication parameters
b configure IP filtering to control access to serial devices
b access Ethernet and serial port diagnostic data
b update the firmware.
b specify the user language.
Setup via a serial connection
Serial setup is carried out using a PC connected to the EGX100 via an RS232 link.
This setup:
b specifies the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway
b specifies the language used for the setup session.
Part numbers
EGX100
EGX100 EGX100
257
Converters PowerLogic EGX300
Integrated gateway-server
Function
The EGX300 integrated gateway-server uses only a simple web browser and
PE86181
Ethernet network to access, log and display real-time data and trend plots from up
to 64 PowerLogic system devices, including other gateway devices on the same
network. The EGX300 embedded web page function and 512 Mb of onboard
memory allow users to create pages for viewing data from their electrical system
and store third-party web pages and documents such as instruction bulletins or
equipment and system diagrams.
PowerLogic software compatibility

Combine the EGX300 with PowerLogic software for extensive analysis and
additional functionality. The EGX300 is compatible with:
b PowerLogic ION EEM enterprise energy management software

b PowerLogic ION Enterprise power management software
b PowerLogic System Manager power management software
b PowerLogic PowerView power monitoring software
PowerLogic EGX300
Architecture
View real-time data and

DE88423
trend plots through a

simple browser — no
software needed
EGX300 Web Page
Trend plots
Data log files

Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP
EGX300 integrated
gateway-server EGX100 gateway
5
Pull information into web pages
from other PowerLogic
gateways (PM8ECC, EGX100) Modbus RS485 serial link
ION6200 PM800 Micrologic Sepam
Features
b View real-time and historical information from multiple locations via any Microsoft-
compatible web browser
b Automatically detect networked devices for easy setup
b Automatically email or FTP selected logged data to your PC for additional analysis
b Select the logging intervals and topics you want logged
b Ensures data and system security through password protection and controlled
network access to individual web pages
b Simplifies installation by receiving control power through the Ethernet cable
utilising Power-over-Ethernet and offers the option to utilise 24 Vdc control power
Part numbers
EGX300
EGX300 EGX300
258
Converters Ethernet EGX100 gateway
Ethernet EGX300 server
EGX100
Characteristics
EGX100 EGX300
Weight 170 g 170 g
Dimensions (H x W x D) 91 x 72 x 68 mm 91 x 72 x 68 mm
Mounting Din rail Din rail
DE88079
Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) Class 3 Class 3

Power supply 24 V DC if not using PoE 24 V DC if not using PoE
Operating temperature -25 to 70ºC -25 to 70ºC
Humidity rating 5 % to 95 % relative humidity 5 % to 95 % relative humidity
(without condensation) at (without condensation) at
+55 °C +55 °C
Regulatory/standards compliance for electromagnetic interference
Emissions (radiated and EN 55022/EN 55011/ EN 55022/EN 55011/
conducted) FCC class A FCC class A
Immunity for industrial EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2
environments:
- electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2
- radiated RF EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3
- electrical fast transients EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4
1 24 Vdc power connection.
- surge EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5
2 10/100 Base TX (802.3af) port for connection to Ethernet
via an RJ45 connector. - conducted RF EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6
3 Ethernet and serial indication LEDs. - power frequency magnetic EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-8
4 Power/Status LED. field
5 Reset button. Regulatory/standards compliance for safety
6 RS485 connection.
7 Dip switches for biasing, termination, and 2-wire/4-wire International (CB scheme) IEC 60950 IEC 60950
jumpers. USA UL508/UL60950 UL508/UL60950
8 RS232 connection. Canada cUL (complies with CSA cUL (complies with CSA
C22.2, no. 60950) C22.2, no. 60950)
EGX300 Europe EN 60950 EN 60950
Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS25 60950 AS/NZS 60950
Serial ports
Number of ports 1 1
Types of ports RS232 or RS485 (2-wire or RS232 or RS485 (2-wire or
4-wire), depending on settings 4-wire), depending on settings
PE86181
Protocol Modbus RTU/ASCII Modbus RTU/ASCII

PowerLogic® (SY/MAX), PowerLogic® (SY/MAX),
JBus JBus
Maximum baud rate 38400 or 57600 baud 57600
5
depending on settings
Maximum number of directly 32 64
connected devices
Ethernet port
Number of ports 1 1
Types of ports One 10/100 base TX One 10/100 base TX
(802.3af) port (802.3af) port
Protocol HTTP, Modbus TCP/IP, FTP, HTTP, Modbus TCP/IP, FTP,
SNMP (MIB II), SNTP, SMTP SNMP (MIB II), SNTP, SMTP
Baud rate 10/100 MB 10/100 MB
Web server
Memory for custom HTML None 512 Mo
pages
Installation
DIN rail mounting (EGX100, EGX300)
DE88302
DE88303
259
Sensors Selection guide
Phase current sensors

Two types of sensor may be used with Sepam to measure phase current:
b LPCT (Low Power Current Transducer) type current sensors.
Selection guide
1 A or 5 A current sensors are:
b to be sized case by case: accuracy, electrical characteristics, etc.
b defined according to the IEC 60044-1 standard.
The LPCT type current sensors are:
b simple to size: a given LPCT sensor is suitable for the measurement of different
rated currents: for example, the CLP1 sensor measures rated currents of 25 to
1250 A
b defined according to the IEC 60044-8 standard
(rated secondary voltage = 22.5 mV).
Residual current sensors

The residual current value may be obtained using different sensors and assemblies,
which are chosen according to the required performance (measurement accuracy
and earth fault protection sensitivity).
Residual current may be:
b measured by a specific CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT
b measured by a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), with an ACE990
adapter.
b calculated by Sepam from the vector sum of the 3 phase currents.
Selection guide
Measurement sensors Accuracy Recommended Easy
minimum set point assembly
CSH120 or CSH200 or CSH300
core balance CT
*** > 1A
*
1 or 3 x 1 A or 5 A CT+ CSH30
** 0.10 InCT (DT)
0.05 InCT (IDMT)
**
Core balance CT + ACE990
** 0.10 InCT (DT)
** revamping
5 3 phase CT
*
0.05 InCT (IDMT)
0.30 InCT (DT) (1)

* new
***
(I0 calculated by Sepam) 0.10 InCT (IDMT) (1)
(1) Recommended minimum set point for ANSI 50N/51N function with H2 restraint:
0.10 InCT (DT) or 0.05 InCT (IDMT).
It is advisable not to set the earth fault protection functions below the recommended
minimum set point to avoid any risk of unwanted tripping caused by oversensitive
detection of residual current or false residual current due to the saturation of a CT.
Lower settings may be used to trigger alarms.
260
Sensors Voltage transformers
Function
Sepam may be connected to any standard voltage transformer with a rated
secondary voltage of 100 V to 220 V.
PE88083
PE88084
Schneider Electric offers a range of voltage transformers:
b to measure phase-to-neutral voltages: voltage transformers with one insulated MV
terminal
b to measure phase-to-phase voltages: voltage transformers with two insulated MV
terminals
b with or without integrated protection fuses.
Consult us for more information.

VRQ3 without fuses. VRQ3 with fuses.
Connection
The voltage transformers connect to Sepam:
b directly, for Sepam series 40, Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80
b or via the CCT640 connector for Sepam B21, B22 and the additional voltage inputs
for Sepam B83.
The table below presents the different connection possibilities for voltage
transformers to Sepam.
Sepam Sepam Sepam Sepam
B21 and B22 series 40 series 60 series 80
Number of voltage 4 3 3 4 main 4 additional (1)
inputs
Intermediate CCT640 - - - CCT640
connector
Sepam connector B E E E B2
(1) Sepam B83 only.
b when voltage transformers are connected directly to the E connector on Sepam,

four transformers built into the Sepam base unit ensure matching and isolation
between the VTs and the Sepam input circuits.
b when voltage transformers are connected via the CCT640 connector, the four
transformers for matching and isolation between the VTs and the Sepam input
circuits are contained in the CCT640.
261
Sensors 1 A / 5 A current transformers
Function
Sepam may be connected to any standard 1 A or 5 A current transformer.
Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary
PE88085
PE88086
currents from 50 A to 2500 A.

Consult us for more information.
Sizing of current transformers

Current transformers are sized so as not to be saturated by the current values they
are required to measure accurately (minimum 5 In).
For overcurrent protection functions

ARJA1. ARJP3.
b with DT tripping curve:
the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the setting
b with IDMT tripping curve:
the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the highest working value on
the curve.
Practical solution when there is no information on the settings
Rated secondary Accuracy Accuracy CT secondary Wiring
current (in) burden class resistance RCT resistance Rf
1A 2.5 VA 5P 20 <3Ω < 0.075 Ω
5A 7.5 VA 5P 20 < 0.2 Ω < 0.075 Ω
262
Sensors 1 A / 5 A current transformers
CCA630/CCA634 connector
Function
The current transformers (1 A or 5 A) are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634
DE88308
connector on the rear panel of Sepam:

b The CCA630 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers to Sepam
b The CCA634 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers and a
residual current transformer to Sepam.
The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through
primaries, which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or
5 A circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents.
The connectors can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does
not open the CT secondary circuit.
CCA634 CAUTION
DE88309

b NEVER work alone.
is off.
b To remove current inputs to the Sepam unit, unplug the CCA630 or CCA634
connector without disconnecting the wires from it. The CCA630 and CCA634
connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary circuits.
b Before disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634
connector, short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits.
263
Sensors 1 A / 5 A current transformers
Connecting and assembling the CCA630 connector

1. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can be
PE88087
removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after
wiring.
2. If necessary, remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1, 2 and 3. This strap is
supplied with the CCA630.
3. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the
6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits.
The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm²
(AWG 16-10).
4. Close the side shields.
5. Plug the connector into the 9-pin inlet on the rear panel (item B ).
6. Tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam.
Connecting and assembling the CCA634 connector

1. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can be
DE88310
DE88311
removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after
wiring.
2. According to the wiring required, remove or reverse the bridging strap. This is used
to link either terminals 1, 2 and 3, or terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9 (see picture opposite).
3. Use terminal 7 (1 A) or 8 (5 A) to measure the residual current according to the CT
secondary.
4. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the
6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits.
The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm²
(AWG 16-10).
The wires only exit from the base.
5. Close the side shields.
6. Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit.
7. Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector
(principle similar to that of the MES module).
8. Tighten the mounting screw.
Bridging of terminals Bridging of terminals
1, 2, 3 and 9 1, 2 and 3
5 CAUTION
HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION
Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40
b Do not connect the connector A residual
current input I0 (terminals 18 and 19) and the
CCA634 residual current input (terminal 9 and 7
or 8) simultaneously.
These 2 residual current input use the same
Sepam analog channel.
Sepam series 60 and series 80
b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B1
and residual current input I0 on connector E
(terminals 14 and 15) simultaneously.
Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634
on connector B1 will disturb input I0 on connector
E.
b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B2
and residual current input I’0 on connector E
(terminals 17 and 18) simultaneously.
Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634
on connector B2 will disturb input I’0 on
connector E.
equipment damage.
264
Sensors LPCT type current sensors
Function
Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors are voltage-output sensors,
which are compliant with the IEC 60044-8 standard.
PE88088
The Schneider Electric range of LPCTs includes the following sensors: CLP1, CLP2,
CLP3,TLP130, TLP160 and TLP190.
CLP1 LPCT sensor
CCA670/CCA671
connector
Function
The 3 LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear
DE88312
panel of Sepam.
The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and
causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position.
The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose,
the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs:
b CCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
b CCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam series 80.
Description
1 3 RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors.
2 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670/CCA671 to the rated phase current
5
value.
3 Microswitch setting/selected rated current equivalency table (2 In values per
position).
4 9-pin sub-D connector to connect test equipment (ACE917 for direct connector or
via CCA613).
Rating of CCA670/CCA671 connectors

The CCA670/CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary
current In measured by the LPCT sensors. In is the current value that corresponds to
the rated secondary current of 22.5 mV. The possible settings for In are (in A): 25, 50,
100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
The selected In value should be:
b entered as a Sepam general setting
b configured by microswitch on the CCA670/CCA671 connector.
CAUTION Operating mode:
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION 1. Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the “LPCT settings” zone; the
b Set the microswitches for the CCA670/
shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1, L2, L3.
CCA671 connector before commissioning the
2. On the L1 block, set the microswitch for the selected rated current to “1” (2 In
device.
values per microswitch).
b Check that only one microswitch is in position 1
b The table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected
for each block L1, L2, L3 and that no microswitch
rated current In is printed on the connector
is in the center position.
b Leave the 7 other microswitches set to “0”.
b Check that the microswitch settings on all 3
blocks are identical. 3. Set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1
block and close the shield.
Failure to follow these instructions can cause
equipement damage.
265
Test accessories
Accessory connection principle

CAUTION
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
b NEVER work alone.
is off.
1 LPCT sensor, equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which
is plugged directly into the CCA670/CCA671 connector.
DE88313
2 Sepam protection unit.

3 CCA670/CCA671 connector, LPCT voltage interface, with microswitch setting of
rated current:
b CCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
b CCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam series 60 and series 80.
4 CCA613 remote test plug, flush-mounted on the front for Sepam series 60 and 80
of the cubicle and equipped with a 3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to be plugged into the test
plug of the CCA670/CCA671 interface connector (9-pin sub-D).
5 ACE917 injection adapter, to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard
injection box.
6 Standard injection box.
266
Test accessories
ACE917 injection adapter

Function
The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection
box, when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors.
DE88314
The ACE917 adapter is inserted between:

b The standard injection box
b The LPCT test plug:
v integrated in the Sepam CCA670/CCA671 interface connector
2.75 v or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory.
The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter:
b Power supply cord
b 3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on
10.24
CCA670/CCA671 or CCA613.
6.70
Characteristics
Power supply 115/230 V AC
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0.25 A rating
(0.2 x 0.79 in )
CCA613 remote test plug

DE88394
Function
The CCA613 test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle, is equipped with a
3-meter (9.84 ft) cord to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670/
CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam.
Dimensions
mm mm
in in
DE88316
DE88395
Lug
Accessory connection principle
2.66
Wire
67,5
2.66
5
1.73
13 50
0.51 1.97
80
3.15
Front view with cover lifted. Right side view.
CAUTION mm
in
DE88318
HAZARD OF CUTS
any jagged edges.
serious injury.
2.72
1.81
Cut-out.
267
Sensors CSH120 and CSH200 and CSH300
Core balance CTs
Function
The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 and CSH300 core balance CTs
are for direct residual current measurement. The only difference between them is
PE88089
the diameter. Due to their low voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
Characteristics
CSH120 CSH200 CSH300
Inner diameter 120 mm (4.7 in) 196 mm (7.72 in) 291 mm (11.46 in)
Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 1.4 kg (3.09 lb) 2.4 Kg (5.29 lb)
Accuracy ±5% at 20°C (68°F)
±6% max. from -25°C to 70°C
(-13°F to +158°F)
Transformation ratio 1/470
CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs. Maximum permissible current 20 kA - 1 s
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Dimensions
6 6
DE88396
5 Dimensions A
CSH120
(in)
120
(4.75)
B
164
(6.46)
D
44
(1.73)
E
190
(7.48)
F
80
(3.14)
H
40
(1.57)
J
166
(6.54)
K
65
(2.56)
L
35
(1.38)
CSH200 196 256 46 274 120 60 254 104 37
(in) (7.72) (10.1) (1.81) (10.8) (4.72) (2.36) (10) (4.09) (1.46)
CSH300 291 360 46 390 120 60 369 104 37
(in) (11.46 (14.17) (1.81) (15.35) (4.72) (2.36) 14.53 (4.09) (1.46)
268
Sensors CSH120 and CSH200 and CSH300
Core balance CTs
CAUTION Assembly
DE88325
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC Group the MV cable (or cables) in the
ARC OR BURNS middle of the core balance CT.
b Only qualified personnel should install this Use non-conductive binding to hold the
equipment. Such work should be performed only cables.
after reading this entire set of instructions and Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage
checking the technical characteristics of the cable shielding earthing cables
device. through the core balance CT.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
PE88090
PE88091
before working on or inside it. Consider all sources
of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off.
b Only CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 and CSH280
core balance CTs can be used for direct residual
current measurement. Other residual current
sensors require the use of an intermediate device, Assembly on MV cables. Assembly on mounting
plate.
CSH30, ACE990 or CCA634.
b Install the core balance CTs on insulated
cables.
b Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V
must also have an earthed shielding.
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION Connection
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
core balance CTs to earth. Connection for Sepam series 60 and 80
This connection is made in Sepam.
b To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b To residual current I’0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
equipement damages.
Only for Sepam series 80.
Recommended cable
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18)
b Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
5
b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
DE88320
b Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam

b Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.
The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not exceed 4 Ω
(i.e. 20 m maximum for 100 mΩ/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 mΩ/ft).
269
Sensors CSH30 Interposing ring CT
Function
PE88092
PE88093
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is
measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers.
Characteristics
Vertical assembly of CSH30 Horizontal assembly of Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail

interposing ring CT. CSH30 interposing ring CT. In vertical or horizontal position
Dimensions
mm
in
DE88321
0.18 0.16
1.18
1.97 0.63
0.2
3.23
0.18
0.315
2.36 1.14
Connection
The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer, 1 A or 5 A, by
the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT:
b 5 A rating - 4 turns
b 1 A rating - 2 turns
Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit

DE88397
5
PE88121
PE88094
turns
turns
1. Plug into the connector. 1. Plug into the connector.

2. Insert the transformer secondary wire 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire
through the CSH30 interposing ring CT through the CSH30 interposing ring CT
4 times. twice.
Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40

To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
DE88398
Connection for Sepam series 60 and 80

Recommended cable
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mm², AWG 12)
b Resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
b Maximum length: 2 m (6.6 ft).
It is essential for the CSH30 interposing ring CT to be installed near Sepam
turns (Sepam - CSH30 link less than 2 m (6.6 ft) long).
turns
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
any other means.
270
Sensors ACE990 Core balance CT
interface
Function
The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV core balance CT with a
ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), and the Sepam residual current input.
PE88095
Characteristics
Assembly Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail
Amplitude accuracy ±1%
Phase accuracy < 2°
Maximum permissible current 20 kA - 1 s
(on the primary winding of an MV core
balance CT with a ratio of 1/50 that does not
saturate)
ACE990 core balance CT interface. Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
Storage temperature -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
mm
DE88323
E ACE990 input terminal block, for connection of the core balance CT.
S ACE990 output terminal block, for connection of the Sepam residual current.

39 99
52
96
271
interface
Connection
Connection of core balance CT
Only one core balance CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface.
DE88324
The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990

interface input terminals. To define the 2 input terminals, it is necessary to know the
following:
b Core balance CT ratio (1/n)
b Core balance CT power
b Close approximation of rated current In0
(In0 is a general setting in Sepam and defines the earth fault protection setting
range between 0.1 In0 and 15 In0).
The table below can be used to determine:

b The 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT
secondary
b The type of residual current sensor to set
b The exact value of the rated residual current In0 setting, given by the following
formula: In0 = k x number of core balance CT turns
with k the factor defined in the table below.
The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for
correct operation: the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be
connected to the terminal with the lowest index (Ex).
272
interface
Connection (cont.)
K value ACE990 input Residual current Min. MV core
terminals to be sensor setting balance CT
connected power
Example: 0.00578 E1 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/400 2 VA, used within 0.00676 E2 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
a measurement range of 0.5 A to 60 A.
0.00885 E1 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990?
1. Choose a close approximation of the rated current In0, 0.00909 E3 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
i.e. 5 A. 0.01136 E2 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
2. Calculate the ratio: 0.01587 E1 - E3 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
approx. In0/number of turns = 5/400 = 0.0125.
0.01667 E4 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
3. Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to
k = 0.01136. 0.02000 E3 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
4. Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT: 0.02632 E2 - E3 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
2 VA core balance CT > 0.1 VA V OK. 0.04000 E1 - E2 ACE990 - range 1 0.2 VA
5. Connect the core balance CT secondary to ACE990 input
terminals E2 and E4.
6. Set Sepam up with: 0.05780 E1 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 2.5 VA
In0 = 0.01136 x 400 = 4.5 A. 0.06757 E2 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 2.5 VA
0.08850 E1 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
This value of In0 can be used to monitor current between
0.09091 E3 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
0.45 A and 67.5 A.
0.11364 E2 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
Wiring of MV core balance CT secondary circuit: 0.15873 E1 - E3 ACE990 - range 2 4.5 VA
b S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal 0.16667 E4 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 4.5 VA
b S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal.
0.20000 E3 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 5.5 VA
0.26316 E2 - E3 ACE990 - range 2 7.5 VA
Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40

To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection for Sepam series 60 and 80
Recommended cables
b Cable between core balance CT and ACE990: less than 50 m (160 ft) long
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and
Sepam, maximum length 2 m (6.6 ft)
b Cable cross-section between 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) and 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
b Resistance per unit length less than 100 mΩ/m (30.5 mΩ/ft)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 100 Vrms.
Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible
5
(2 cm or 5.08 in maximum) to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector.
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
any other means.
273
TOOLS
schneider-electric.com The technical guide
This international site allows you These technical guides help you
to access all the Schneider Electric comply with installation standards
products in just 2 clicks and rules i.e.: the electrical
via comprehensive range data- installation guide, the protection
sheets, with direct links to: guide, the switchboard
ppcomplete library: technical implementation guide,
documents, catalogs, FAQs, the technical booklets
brochures… and the co-ordination tables all form
ppselection guides from genuine reference tools
the e-catalog. for the design of high performance
ppproduct discovery sites and electrical installations.
their Flash animations. For example, the LV protection
You will also find illustrated co-ordination guide - discrimination
overviews, news to which you and cascading - optimises choice
can subscribe, the list of country of protection and connection devices
contacts… while also increasing markedly
continuity of supply
5 in the installations.
274
Sepam series 20 Order form
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 60
Sepam series 80
Range description 5
Sepam series 60 89
Sepam series 80 139
Sepam series 20 276

Sepam series 40 277
Sepam series 60 278
Sepam series 80 279
281
275
Order form Sepam series 20
Ready-to-use configuration
Number of identical Sepam This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration.
Check the boxes that match your choices.
configurations ordered
Base unit, connectors and application

Base unit and UMI Application Type Sensor
Base unit with advanced UMI S10UD 59607 Substation S20 59620 CT CT LPCT
With lead seal accessory (1) AMT852 59639 S24 59778 CT CT LPCT
(1) Can be used only with an advanced UMI. Transformer T20 59621 CT CT LPCT
Base unit with basic UMI S10UX 59603 T24 59779 CT CT LPCT
Remote advanced UMI module DSM303 59608 Motor M20 59622 CT CT LPCT
Connection cord L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660 Busbars B21 59624 VT
L=2m CCA772 59661 B22 59625 PT
L=4m CCA774 59662 59630 59629 59631 59632
Mounting plate AMT840 59670 CCA630 CCA634 CCA670 CCT640
Working language
Sepam series 20 EN/FR 59609
EN/ES 59611
Connectors Note:
Type Screw-type CCA620 59668 CCA630: 3 phase CT
CCA634: 3 phase CT + IO
Ring-lug CCA622 59669
type
Modules, communication interfaces and core balance CTs

Core balance CTs Modules
Core balance CT, Ø 120 mm CSH120 59635 Input / output modules
Core balance CT, Ø 196 mm CSH200 59636 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DC MES114 59646
Core balance CT, Ø 291 mm CSH300 59637 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC MES114E 59651
Interposing ring CT CSH30 59634 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC MES114F 59652
Core balance CT interface ACE990 59672 Note: the Sepam base unit has 4 outputs; only one input/output module can be added.
Note: only one core balance CT can be added. Remote modules Connection cord
8 temperature sensor MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660
Warning: Using core balance CTs is incompatible with
the CCA634. module L=2m CCA772 59661
L=4m CCA774 59662
Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T and M.
Analog output module MSA141 59647 L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660
L=2m CCA772 59661
L=4m CCA774 59662
Note: MSA141 can be used with all applications.
6
Communication interfaces
Modbus interfaces Connection cord
2-wire RS 485 interface ACE949-2 59642 CCA612 59663
4-wire RS 485 interface ACE959 59643 CCA612 59663
Fiber optic interface ACE937 59644 CCA612 59663
Multi-protocol interfaces (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103)
2-wire RS 485 interface ACE969TP-2 59723 CCA612 59663
Fiber optic interface ACE969FO-2 59724 CCA612 59663
Note: only one communication interface per Sepam application.
276
Number of identical Sepam This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration.
Check the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate
configurations ordered spaces according to your choices.
Base unit, connectors and application

Base unit and UMI Application Type Sensor
Base unit with advanced UMI S10MD 59604 Substation S40 59680 CT CT LPCT
(1) Can be used only with an advanced UMI. S42 59682 CT CT LPCT
Base unit with basic UMI S10MX 59600 S43 59687 CT CT LPCT
Remote advanced UMI module DSM303 59608 S44 59688 CT CT LPCT
Connection cord L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660 S50 59780 CT CT LPCT
L=2m CCA772 59661 S51 59781 CT CT LPCT
L=4m CCA774 59662 S52 59782 CT CT LPCT
Mounting plate AMT840 59670 S53 59783 CT CT LPCT
Working language S54 59786 CT CT LPCT
Sepam series 40 EN/FR 59615 Transformer T40 59683 CT CT LPCT
EN/ES 59616 T42 59684 CT CT LPCT
Connectors T50 59784 CT CT LPCT
Type Screw-type CCA620 - 59668 and CCA626 - 59656 T52 59785 CT CT LPCT
Ring-lug type CCA622 - 59669 and CCA627 - 59657 Motor M40 59689 CT CT LPCT
M41 59685 CT CT LPCT
Generator G40 59686 CT CT LPCT
Note: p 59630 59629 59631
CCA630: 3 phase CT CCA630 CCA634 CCA670
CCA634: 3 phase CT + IO

Core balance CT, Ø 196 mm CSH200 59636 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DC MES114 59646
Core balance CT, Ø 291 mm CSH300 59637 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC MES114E 59651
Interposing ring CT CSH30 59634 10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC MES114F 59652
Core balance CT interface ACE990 59672 Note: the Sepam base unit has 4 outputs; only one input/output module can be added.
Note: using core balance CTs is incompatible with the 8 temperature sensor MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660
CCA634. module L=2m CCA772 59661
L=4m CCA774 59662
Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T, M and G.
Maximum of 2 modules per application.
L=2m CCA772 59661
Note: the MSA141 can be used with all the applications.

L=4m CCA774 59662
6
Note: only one interface per application.
TCP/IP interfaces (IEC 61850 and Modbus)
TCP/IP firmware option 59754
RJ45 interface ACE850TP 59658
Fiber optic interface ACE850FO 59659
Note: connection cords are included with the ACE850TP and ACE850FO interfaces.
Note: a specific firmware is necessary to one TCP/IP interfaces.
277
Number of identical Sepam This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check
the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces
configurations ordered according to your choices.
Sepam series 60 base unit, cartridge, connectors and application
Base unit and UMI Application Type B1 sensor
Base unit with mimic-based UMI SEP666 59837 Substation S60 59787 CT CT LPCT
Base unit with advanced UMI SEP363 59836 S62 59789 CT CT LPCT
With lead seal accessory (1) AMT852 59639 Transformer T60 59790 CT CT LPCT
Base unit without basic UMI SEP060 59835 T62 59791 CT CT LPCT
Remote advanced DSM303 59608 Motor M61 59792 CT CT LPCT
UMI module (compulsory with SEP060) Generator G60 59793 CT CT LPCT
Connection cord L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660 G62 59794 CT CT LPCT
L=2m CCA772 59661 Capacitor C60 59795 CT CT LPCT
L=4m CCA774 59662 59630 59629 59702
Mounting plate AMT880 59706 CCA630 CCA634 CCA671
Note: 8 mounting clips included
Memory cartridge
Memory cartridge MMS020 59707
Working language
Sepam series 60 EN/FR 59846
EN/ES 59847
Connectors
Type Screw-type CCA620 59668 Note:
Ring-lug CCA622 59669 CCA630: 3 phase CT
type CCA630: 3 phase CT + IO
(1) Can be used only with an advanced UMI
Core balance CT, Ø 196 mm CSH200 59636 14 inputs (24-250 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120 59715
Core balance CT, Ø 291 mm CSH300 59637 14 inputs (220-250 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120G 59716
Interposing ring CT CSH30 59634 14 inputs (110-125 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120H 59722
Core balance CT interface ACE990 59672 Note: the Sepam base unit comes with 4 outputs; 2 input/output modules can be added.
Note: using core balance CTs is incompatible with the CCA634. 8 temperature sensor MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660
module L=2m CCA772 59661
L=4m CCA774 59662
Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T, M, G and C.
Maximum of 2 MET 148-2 modules per application.
L=2m CCA772 59661
L=4m CCA774 59662
6 Synchro-check module
Mounting plate
Note: the MCS025 can be used only with applications S, G and T.
MCS025
AMT840
59712
59670
Comes with connection cord CCA785 and voltage connector CCT640.

Note: a specific firmware is necessary to use the TCP/IP interfaces.
Note: the connection cord is included in ACE850 TP and FO interfaces.
Note: only one interface ACE850TP or ACE850FO per Sepam application.
278
Number of identical Sepam This order form can be used to define a complete Sepam configuration. Check
the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces
configurations ordered according to your choices.
Sepam series 80 base unit, cartridge, connectors and application
Base unit and UMI Application Type B1 sensor B2 sensor
Base unit with mimic-based UMI SEP888 59705 Substation S80 59729 CT CT LPCT
Base unit with advanced UMI SEP383 59704 S81 59730 CT CT LPCT
Base unit without basic UMI SEP080 59703 S84 59732 CT CT LPCT
Remote advanced DSM303 59608 Transformer T81 59733 CT CT LPCT
UMI module (compulsory with SEP080) T82 59734 CT CT LPCT
Connection cord L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660 T87 59735 CT CT CT CT
L=2m CCA772 59661 Motor M81 59736 CT CT LPCT
L=4m CCA774 59662 M87 59737 CT CT LPCT CT CT LPCT
Mounting plate AMT880 59706 M88 59738 CT CT CT CT
Note: 8 mounting clips included Generator G82 59739 CT CT LPCT
Memory cartridge G87 59741 CT CT LPCT CT CT LPCT
Memory cartridge MMS020 59707 G88 59742 CT CT CT CT
Extended memory cartridge MMR020 59701 Busbar B80 59743 CT CT LPCT
Logipam option SFT080 59711 B83 59744 CT CT VT
Note: option required to use Logipam program. Capacitor C86 59745 CT CT LPCT CT CT
Working language 59630 59629 59702 59630 59629 59702 59632
Sepam series 80 EN/FR 59709 CCA630 CCA634 CCA671 CCA630 CCA634 CCA671 CCT640
EN/ES 59710
Connectors
Type Screw-type CCA620 59668 Note:
Ring-lug type CCA622 59669 CCA630: 3 phase CTCCA634: 3 phase CT + IO
(1) Can be used only with an advanced UMI

Core balance CT, Ø 196 mm CSH200 59636 14 inputs (24-250 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120 59715
Core balance CT, Ø 291 mm CSH300 59637 14 inputs (220-250 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120G 59716
Interposing ring CT CSH30 59634 14 inputs (110-125 V DC) + 6 outputs MES120H 59722
Core balance CT interface ACE990 59672 Note: the Sepam base unit comes with 5 outputs; 3 input/output modules can be added.
Note: the total number of core balance CTs cannot exceed 2. Remote modules Connection cord
Warning: using core balance CTs is incompatible with 8 temperature sensor MET148-2 59641 L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660
the CCA634. module L=2m CCA772 59661
L=4m CCA774 59662
Note: the MET148-2 can be used only with applications T, M, G and C.
Maximum of 2 MET 148-2 modules per application.
L=2m CCA772 59661

L=4m CCA774 59662
6
Synchro-check module MCS025 59712
Mounting plate AMT840 59670
Note: the MCS025 can be used only with applications S, B, G and T.
Comes with connection cord CCA785 and voltage connector CCT640.
Note: the total number of communication interfaces cannot exceed 2.
Note: a specific firmware is necessary to use the TCP/IP interfaces.
Note: connection cords are included with the ACE850TP and ACE850FO interfaces.
Note: only one interface ACE850TP or ACE850FO per Sepam application.
279
6
280
Order form Sepam accessories
and spare parts
Check the boxes or indicate the required quantities in the appropriate spaces
according to your choices.
Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40 or MCS025:
Mounting plate AMT840  59670
Sepam series 20, 40, 60 and 80 with advanced UMI
Lead seal accessory AMT852 59639
Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80
Mounting plate AMT880 59706
Blanking plate AMT820 59699
Software tools
Sepam PC software: SFT2841 and SFT2826 SFT2841 CD 59679
(1 CD-ROM without connection cord CCA783)
PC cord RS232 connection CCA783 59664
PC cord USB connection CCA784 59671
Logipam SFT2885 programming software CD SFT2885 59727
IEC 61850 configuration software CD SFT850 59726
Input / output modules

10 inputs + 4 outputs, 24-250 V DC MES114 59646
10 inputs + 4 outputs, 110-125 V DC / V AC MES114E 59651
10 inputs + 4 outputs, 220-250 V DC / V AC MES114F 59652
14 inputs + 6 outputs, 24-250 V DC MES120 59715
14 inputs + 6 outputs, 110-125 V DC MES120H 59722
14 inputs + 6 outputs, 220-250 V DC MES120G 59716
Remote modules and cords

8 temperature sensor module MET148-2 59641
Analog output module MSA141 59647
Remote advanced UMI module DSM303 59608
Synchro-check module (including connection cord MCS025 59712
CCA785)
Remote module connection cord L = 0.6 m CCA770 59660
Remote module connection cord L = 2 m CCA772 59661
Remote module connection cord L = 4 m CCA774 59662
Synchro-check module connection cord CCA785 59665
L = 2 m (spare parts)
Communication accessories
Sepam communication interfaces
2-wire RS 485 Modbus interface (without CCA612) ACE949-2 59642
4-wire RS 485 Modbus interface (without CCA612) ACE959 59643
Fiber optic Modbus interface (without CCA612) ACE937 59644
RS 485 multi-protocol 2-wire interface (without CCA612) ACE969TP-2 59723
Fiber optic multi-protocol interface (without CCA612) ACE969FO-2 59724
Connection cord, L = 3 m
RJ45 TCP/IP interface (with CCA614)
CCA612
ACE850TP
59663
59658
6
Fiber optic TCP/IP interface (with CCA614) ACE850FO 59659
Connection cord, L= 3 m, for TCP/IP interfaces CCA614 59751
Converters
RS 232 / RS 485 converter ACE909-2 59648
RS 485 / RS 485 interface (AC) ACE919CA 59649
RS 485 / RS 485 interface (DC) ACE919CC 59650
Ethernet gateway EGX100 EGX100MG
Ethernet webserver EGX300 EGX300MG
Core balance CTs

Core balance CT, Ø 120 mm CSH120 59635
Core balance CT interface ACE990 59672
Accessories for phase-current sensors (LPCT)

LPCT injection adapter ACE917 59667
Remote LPCT test plug CCA613 59666
281
and spare parts
Manuals
Sepam series 20
User’s manual PCRED301005 EN FR
Sepam series 40
User’s manual PCRED301006 EN FR
Sepam series 60
User’s manual SEPED310017 EN FR
Sepam series 80
Metering, protection, control and monitoring user’s SEPED303001 EN FR
manual
Modbus communication user’s manual SEPED303002 EN FR
Installation and operation manual SEPED303003 EN FR
Communication protocol
DNP3 protocol SEPED305001 EN FR
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol SEPED305002 EN FR
Note: the technical manuals must be ordered separately form the CDI centre in Evreux.
Spare connectors
Sepam
20-pin screw-type connector CCA620 59668
20-pin ring lug connector CCA622 59669
6-pin screw-type connector CCA626 59656
6-pin ring lug connector CCA627 59657
1 A / 5 A CT current connector CCA630 59630
1 A / 5 A CT + IO current connector CCA634 59629
LPCT lateral current connector CCA670 59631
LPCT radial current connector CCA671 59702
VT voltage connector CCT640 59632
MES modules
Connectors for 2 MES114 and 2 MES120 Kit 2640 59676
Spare Sepam series 60 and series 80 base units
Series 60 base unit with mimic-based UMI SEP666 59837
Series 60 base unit with advanced UMI SEP363 59836
Series 60 base unit without UMI SEP060 59835
Series 80 base unit with mimic-based UMI SEP888 59705
Series 80 base unit with advanced UMI SEP383 59704
Series 80 base unit without UMI SEP080 59703
12 spring clips XBTZ3002
Note: the base units are supplied without connectors and without memory cartridges.
282
and spare parts
Spare Sepam series 60 and series 80 memory cartridge

Memory cartridges MMS020 59707
Extended memory cartridges (Sepam 80 only) MMR020 59701
Note: memory cartridges cannot be sold without application. When ordering a base unit or a
memory cardrige to be used with TCP/IP interfaces this option is mandatory.
Application Type Working language TCP/IP
series 60 option
59846 59847 59754

Substation S60 59787 EN/FR EN/SP
S62 59789 EN/FR EN/SP
Transformer T60 59790 EN/FR EN/SP
T62 59791 EN/FR EN/SP
Motor M61 59792 EN/FR EN/SP
Generator G60 59793 EN/FR EN/SP
G62 59794 EN/FR EN/SP
Capacitor C60 59795 EN/FR EN/SP
Application Type Working language Logipam TCP/IP
series 80 option
59709 59710 59711 59754

Substation S80 59729 EN/FR EN/SP
Transformer T81 59733 EN/FR EN/SP
Motor M81 59736 EN/FR EN/SP
M87 59737 EN/FR EN/SP
M88 59738 EN/FR EN/SP
Generator G82 59739 EN/FR EN/SP
Busbar B80 59743 EN/FR EN/SP
B83 59744 EN/FR EN/SP
Capacitor C86 59745 EN/FR EN/SP
Note: customized reference for series 80 only: –
Sepam series 20, 40, 60 and 80 UMI replacement kit

Kit advanced UMI 20/40 (serial number < 0440001) SDK303 59694
6
Kit advanced UMI 20/40 (serial number > 0440001) SDK313 59695
Kit advanced UMI series 60 and series 80 SDK383 59696
Kit mimic-based UMI series 60 and series 80 SDK888 59697
UMI tool kit SDK000 59698
Note: the UMI tool kit is required for installing the UMI kit.
Note: the same kit can be used with both Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40.
Note: the same kit can be used with both Sepam series 60 and Sepam series 80.
283
Note
284
Note
285
ART.52475 © Schneider Electric Industries SAS - All rights reserved
Schneider Electric Industries SAS As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
of the information given in this publication.
35, rue Joseph Monier
CS 30323 Printed on recycled paper.
F - 92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439
Capital social 896 313 776 € Design: Schneider Electric Industries SAS - Polynotes - Sedoc
Publishing: Schneider Electric Industries SAS
http://www.schneider-electric.com Printing:
SEPED303005EN 01-2013
12-2020

SEPED303005EN Dec20

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEPED303005EN Dec20

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEPED303005EN Dec20

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical network protection

Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 2

Additional modules and accessories 5

Sepam protection relays

Keep informed to manage better

Maintain installation availability

Enhance installation dependability

industrial environments including off-shore oil rigs and chemical

Sepam protection relays

Make configuration easily

Communicate the open way

Installation Setup Local display Supervision

A Sepam relay for Custom

L Line differential 46, 79, 25

> Thermal protection based on

Custom Demanding Standard

Sepam series 80 Sepam series 60 Sepam series 40 Sepam series 20

10 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 40 minutes

The setup is now ready to be

Analysis of Real-time Management

Automatic generation of the

15 years of peace of mind

b standard and specific Sepam functions to be implemented to protect the

The list of functions is given for information purposes.

Busbar P. 20 B21 B22

Transformer P. 22 A B N T20 T24

series 40 Page 53 series 60 Page 89

Motor P. 28 M40 M41 M61

Generator P. 32 G40 G60 G62

series 80 Page 138

S80 S81 S82 S84

T81 T82 T87

M81 M88 M87

G82 G88 G87

Protection of low-capacitance feeders in impedance earthed or solidly

Protection of high-capacitance feeders in impedance earthed or

Incomer protection: Sepam S20, S24, S40, S50, S60 or S80

Protection of an incomer or coupling circuit breaker with load shedding

Ring-incomer protection: Sepam S42, S52, S62 or S82

Protection functions ANSI code B21 B22 B80 B83

Incomer protection with additional busbar voltage

Transformer feeder protection

Transformer feeder protection with voltage monitoring and additional

Transformer feeder differential protection: Sepam T87

Transformer incomer protection

Transformer incomer differential protection: Sepam T87

Parallel transformer incomer protection: Sepam T42, T52, T62 or T82

b transformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67

Parallel incomer differential protection: Sepam T87

Motor differential protection: Sepam M87

Motor-transformer unit protection

1 b power supply fault protection

Motor-transformer unit protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20

Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring:

Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring:

Motor-transformer unit differential protection: Sepam M88

Protection functions ANSI G40 G60 G62 G82 G87 G88

Protection of a separate generator: Sepam G40 or G60

Protection of a generator coupled to other generators or to a network:

Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 2

Characteristics Sepam series 20  Sepam series 40 72